Home

Edge Products ES3528 Switch User Manual

1. network CTLLLLUILLLLi Li RES O S O T L E E Port based VLAN gt 2 1 9 3 4 LLL gets TT eres Pea A ue EE TARR 10 11 13 18 12 J 14 19 Forwarding Tagged Untagged Frames If you want to create a small port based VLAN for devices attached directly to a single switch you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN However to participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches you should create a VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs Each port on the switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN aware devices the switch should include VLAN tags When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN aware devices including the destination host the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame When the switch receives a tagged frame it will pass this frame onto the VLAN s indicated by the frame tag However when this switch receives an untagged frame from a VLAN unaware device it first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID 12 3 4A 2 VLAN Configuration Enabling or Disabling GVRP
2. Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 0 0 Console config if queue cos map 1 1 Console config if queue cos map 2 2 Console config if exit Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 Traffic Class 012 Priority Queue 0 1 2 Console Related Commands show queue cos map 31 6 show queue bandwidth This command displays the weighted round robin WRR bandwidth allocation for the eight priority queues Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 31 5 3 4 Class of Service Commands Example Console show queue bandwidth Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 1 2 2 4 3 6 4 8 5 10 6 12 7 14 show queue cos map This command shows the class of service priority map Syntax show queue cos map interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show queue cos map ethernet 1 1 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 0
3. Note When restarting the system it will always run the Power On Self Test 4 25 A Basic Management Tasks Setting the System Clock Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP allows the switch to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a time server SNTP or NTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries You can also manually set the clock using the CLI See calendar set on page 19 41 If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup When the SNTP client is enabled the switch periodically sends a request for a time update to a configured time server You can configure up to three time server IP addresses The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence Configuring SNTP You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers Command Attributes e SNTP Client Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client This requires at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field Default Disabled SNTP Poll Interval Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update from a time server Range 16 16384 seconds Default 16 seconds e SNTP Server Sets the IP address for up to three time servers The switch attempts to update the time from the first server if this fails it attempts an
4. Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority e DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 Console config if show map ip port This command shows the IP port priority map Syntax show map ip port interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 31 12 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 31 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0 Console show map ip port TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 5 80 0 Console Related Commands map ip port Global Configuration 3 map ip port Interface Configuration 1 8 31 9 show map ip precedence This command shows the IP precedence priority map Syntax show map ip precedence interface interface ethernet unit p
5. spanning tree pathcost method This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 This method is based on the IEEE 802 1 Spanning Tree Protocol Default Setting Long method Command Mode Global Configuration 29 6 spanning tree transmission limit 29 Command Usage The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Note that path cost page 29 12 takes precedence over port priority page 29 13 Example Console config spanning tree pathcost method long Console config spanning tree transmission limit This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree transmission limit count no spanning tree transmission limit count The transmission limit in seconds Range 1 10 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command limits the maximu
6. Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 35 Use the spanning tree pathcost method command on page 29 6 to set the path cost method 29 12 spanning tree port priority 29 Command Usage This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority When the spanning tree pathcost method page 29 6 is set to short the maximum value for path cost is 65 535 Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 Console config if spanning tree port priority This command configures the priority for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The priority for a port Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest prior
7. VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid page 30 9 Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled page 30 10 Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only page 30 9 Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID page 30 11 Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames page 31 3 GVRP status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled page 30 3 Allowed VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface has joined where u indicates untagged and t indicates tagged page 30 11 Forbidden VLAN Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP page 30 12 Unknown multicast block Shows if the unknown multicast packets are blocked page 24 8 Unknown unicast block Shows if the unknown unicast packets are blocked page 24 8 24 12 Chapter 25 Link Aggregation Commands Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link i e trunk to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Or you can use the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP to automatically negotiate a trunk link between this switch and another network device For static trunks the switches have to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard For dynamic trunks the switches have to comply with LACP Th
8. etal jaaa AAAs FARATA 1 Client attempts to access a switch port 2 Switch sends client an identity request 3 Client sends back identity information 4 Switch forwards this to authentication server 5 Authentication server challenges client 6 Client responds with proper credentials 7 Authentication server approves access 8 Switch grants client access to this port The operation of dot1x on the switch requires the following e The switch must have an IP address assigned The IP address of the RADIUS server must be specified 802 1X must be enabled globally for the switch Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1x Auto mode e Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1x client software installed and properly configured 6 13 6 User Authentication e The RADIUS server and 802 1X client support EAP The switch only supports EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP encryption method for passing authentication messages MD5 TLS or TTLS Native support for these encryption methods is provided in Windows XP and in Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 To support these encryption methods in Windows 95 and 98 you can use the AEGIS dot1x client or other comparable client software Displaying 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authenti
9. Address Table Sort Key You can sort the information displayed based on MAC address VLAN or interface port or trunk Dynamic Address Counts The number of addresses dynamically learned e Current Dynamic Address Table Lists all the dynamic addresses 10 2 Displaying the Address Table 4 oO Web Click Address Table Dynamic Addresses Specify the search type i e mark the Interface MAC Address or VLAN checkbox select the method of sorting the displayed addresses and then click Query Dynamic Addresses Query by F Interface Port iz C Trunk z I MAC Address ee F VLAN fi Address Table Sort Key Address Query Dynamic Address Table Dynamic Address Counts 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 VLAN 2 Unit 1 Port 1 Dynamic Current Dynamic Address Table Figure 10 2 Dynamic Addresses CLI This example also displays the address table entries for port 1 Console show mac address table interface ethernet 1 1 28 3 Interface Mac Address Vlan Type Eth 1 1 00 E0 29 94 34 DE 1 Permanent Eth 1 1 00 20 9C 23 CD 60 2 Learned Console 10 3 A oO Address Table Settings Changing the Aging Time You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table Command Attributes e Aging Status Enables disables the aging function Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Web Click Address Ta
10. snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show management all client Management Ip Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 4219 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1525 192 168 1 30 SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1219 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 2125 192 168 1 30 TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console 21 34 Chapter 22 Client Security Commands This switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to each of the data ports and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to the network Private VLANs and port based authentication using IEEE 802 1X are commonly used for these purposes In addition to these methods several other options of providing client security are supported by this switch These include port based authentication which can be configured for network client access by specifying a fixed set of MAC addresses either by freezing a set of dynamically learned entries or through static configuration or by statically configured MAC IP address pairs The addresses assigned to DHCP clients can also be carefully controlled using static or dynamic bindings with the IP Source Guard and DHCP Snooping commands Table 22 1 Client Security Comm
11. 1000full Forces 1 Gbps full duplex operation e 100full Forces 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Forces 100 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Forces 10 Mbps full duplex operation 10half Forces 10 Mbps half duplex operation 24 2 negotiation 24 Default Setting Auto negotiation is enabled by default When auto negotiation is disabled the default speed duplex setting is Fast Ethernet ports 100full 100 Mbps full duplex Gigabit Ethernet ports 1000full 1 Gbps full duplex Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed duplex command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To set the speed duplex mode under auto negotiation the required mode must be specified in the capabilities list for an interface e 100BASE BX ports are fixed at 100 Mbps full duplex The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Auto negotiation must always be used to establish a connection over any 1000BASE T port or trunk Example The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps half duplex operation Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if speed duplex 100half Console config if no negotiation Cons
12. 802 1X Port Authentication 21 dot1x system auth control This command enables IEEE 802 1X port authentication globally on the switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no dot1x system auth control Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1lx system auth control Console config dot1x default This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default values Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config dot1x default Console config dot1x max req This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count The maximum number of requests Range 1 10 Default 2 Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx max req 2 Console config if 21 25 2 4 User Authentication Commands dot1x port control This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control e auto Requires a dot1x aware connected client to be authorized by the RADIUS server Clients that a
13. Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters e Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available e Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Actions Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete To change the assigned group of a user click Change Group in the Actions column of
14. There can be more than one user defined configuration file saved in the switch s flash memory but only one is designated as the startup file that is loaded when the switch boots The copy running config startup config command always sets the new file as the startup file To select a previously saved configuration file use the boot system config lt filename gt command The maximum number of saved configuration files depends on available flash memory with each configuration file normally requiring less than 20 kbytes The amount of available flash memory can be checked by using the dir command To save the current configuration settings enter the following command 1 From the Privileged Exec mode prompt type copy running config startup config and press lt Enter gt 2 Enter the name of the start up file Press lt Enter gt Console copy running config startup config 19 13 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 2 Initial Configuration 2 10 Section Il Switch Management This section describes the basic switch features along with a detailed description of how to configure each feature via a web browser and a brief example for the Command Line Interface Configuring the Switch 0 0 6 teens 3 1 Basic Management Tasks 0 000 cece cece e eee 4 1 Simple Network Management Protocol 0
15. General Configuration Domain Lookup Status V Enable Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Current New sample com uk sample com jp en Domain Name Name Server List Current New 192 168 1 55 Pee ee Name Server A Figure 16 1 DNS General Configuration CLI This example sets a default domain name and a domain list However remember that if a domain list is specified the default domain name is not used Console config ip domain name sample com 34 3 Console config ip domain list sample com uk 34 3 Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip name server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 34 4 Console config ip domain lookup 34 5 Console show dns 34 7 Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com uk sample com jp Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 555 Console 16 2 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries 4 6 Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map domain names to IP addresses Command Usage e Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached network or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associa
16. Unit2 Power Module B Status Power Module A Type Done All Pass Console System Up time 0 days System Name NONE System Location NONE System Contact NONE 00 20 1A DF 9C A0 00 20 1A DF 9E CO Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled Power Module A Status UP Not present Power Module B Type None Fan 1 OK Fan 2 OK Fan 3 OK POST Result DUMMY Test L oe scetug cue seeeesdhn eo eadie PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TABE Ya e ie Seats serene iE Stas Scan eae PASS miner TES Sore sctcee suscsog eae eres PASS PCI Device 1 Test PASS I2C Bus Initialization PASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Fan Speed Test PASS S3528 System Description 24 port WDM Metro Access Switch t ES3528 WDM System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 3 19 6 System Status Commands 4 9 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user name idle time and IP address of Telnet client Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The session used to execute this command is indicated by a the Line i e session index number kI symbol next to Example Console show users Username accounts Username Privilege Public Key admin 15 None guest 0 None steve 15 RSA Online
17. e Trunk 2 Shows if port is a trunk member Web Click Port Port Broadcast Control or Trunk Broadcast Control Check the Enabled box for any interface set the threshold and click Apply Port Broadcast Control Port Type 1 100Base TX OlEnabled 500 2 100Base TX MeEnabled 600 3 100Base TX MeEnabled 500 4 100Base TX MeEnabled 500 5 100Base TX MEnabled 500 Protect Status Threshold 500 262143 Trunk packets sec packets sec packets sec packets sec packets sec Figure 9 9 Port Broadcast Control CLI Specify any interface and then enter the threshold The following disables broadcast storm control for port 1 and then sets broadcast suppression at 600 packets per second for port 2 Console config if exit Console config if end Information of Eth 1 2 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress rate limit Egress rate limit VLAN membership mode Ingress rule Acceptable frame type Native VLAN GVRP status Allowed VLAN Forbidden VLAN Console 9 18 Priority for untagged traffic Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if no switchport broadcast Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 2 Enabled 600 packets second Disabled Disable 1000M bits per second Disable 1000M bits per second Hybrid Disa
18. 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 7505461 7325313674890836547254 15020245593 19986854435836 1651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 7654680172627257 141342876294 1301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206 51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545 2408397 1752646358058 1767 16709574804776117 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch with the username command as described on page 21 2 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 0555361616310517759408386863 1109291 23222682851 9254374603100937187721199 69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324 10163799759237 1449011938 00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671 31629432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters Set other optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH server on the switch Authentication One of the
19. Click System Logs Remote Logs To add an IP address to the Host IP List type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box and then click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the Host IP List and then click Remove Remote Logs Remote Log Status Disabled Logging Facility 16 23 E Logging Trap 0 7 F Host IP Address Current New Host IP List none ae Host IP Address emove Figure 4 17 Remote Logs CLI Enter the syslog server host IP address choose the facility type and set the logging trap Console config logging host 10 1 0 9 19 30 Console config logging facility 23 19 30 Console config logging trap 4 19 32 Console config logging trap Console config exit Console tshow logging trap 19 32 Syslog logging Enabled REMOTELOG status Disabled REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Warning conditions REMOTELOG server ip address 10 1 0 9 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server ip address 0 0 0 0 Console 4 22 Configuring Event Logging 4 Displaying Log Messages Use the Logs page to scroll through the logged system and event messages The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory RAM i e memory flushed on power reset and up to 4096 entries in permanent flash memory Web
20. Command Attributes Disabled Disables both priority services This is the default setting IP Precedence Maps layer 3 4 priorities using IP Precedence IP DSCP Maps layer 3 4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point Mapping 13 7 A 3 Class of Service Web Click Priority IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status Select Disabled IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll down menu then click Apply IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence v Figure 13 5 IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status CLI The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch Console config map ip precedence 31 9 Console config Mapping IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The default IP Precedence values are mapped one to one to Class of Service values i e Precedence value 0 maps to CoS value 0 and so forth Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control and the other bits for various application types ToS bits are defined in the following table Table 13 3 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Level Traffic Type Priority Level Traffic Type 7 Network Control 3 Flash 6 Internetwork Control 2 Immediate 5 Critical 1 Priority 4 Flash Override 0
21. NO AINAHAUNPRWNEF OO wo 10 Console 16 6 FLAG 4 SRABRR AR RR TYPE CNAME CNAME CNAME CNAME CNAME ALIAS CNAME ALIAS CNAME ALIAS CNAME IP 207 46 207 46 207 46 207 46 207 46 POINTER TO 134 134 134 249 249 222 190 155 222 27 4 207 46 68 27 POINTER TO 6 65 54 131 192 POINTER TO 8 165 193 72 190 TTL 51 51 51 51 51 S1 71964 71964 605 605 87 DOMAIN www microsoft www microsoft www microsoft www microsoft www microsoft www microsoft msn com tw www msn com tw akadns akadns akadns akadns akadns com passportimages com www passportimages com global msads net 34 7 net net net net net Section Ill Command Line Interface This section provides a detailed description of the Command Line Interface along with examples for all of the commands Overview of Command Line Interface 0 0c 17 1 General Commands e crcr ekee pee denie oe ve eee a eee ees 18 1 System Management Commands 00 eee eee eee eee 19 1 SNMP Commands sas io d 4 55 M2 fs fae eek He eee ae 20 1 User Authentication Commands 0 0 0 c eee ees 21 1 Client Security Commands 0 00 eect eee 22 1 Access Control List Commands 0 00 cee eee eee 23 1 Interface Commands 0 cette eae 24 1 Link Aggregation Commands 0 cee eee eee 25 1 Mirror Port Commands 0 00 d ea A
22. The UDP port used for HTTPS Range 1 65535 Default Setting 443 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port 21 13 2 4 User Authentication Commands e If you change the HTTPS port number clients attempting to connect to the HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL in this format https device port_number Example Console config ip http secure port 1000 Console config Related Commands ip http secure server 21 12 Telnet Server Commands This section describes commands used to configure Telnet management access to the switch Table 21 9 Telnet Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet also GC 21 11 specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface ip telnet server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet It also specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface Use the no form without the port keyword to disable this function Use the no from with the port keyword to use the default port Syntax ip telnet server port port number no telnet server port port The TCP port used by the Telnet interface port number The TCP port number to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting e Server Enabled Serve
23. Vty O Note You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet 17 2 Entering Commands 4 7 Entering Commands This section describes how to enter CLI commands Keywords and Arguments A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and 1 5 specifies the unit port You can enter commands as follows To enter a simple command enter the command keyword To enter multiple commands enter each command in the required order For example to enable Privileged Exec command mode and display the startup configuration enter Console gt enable Console tshow startup config To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter Console config username admin password 0 smith Minimum Abbreviation The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a command For example the command configure can be entered as con If an entry is ambiguous the system will prompt for further input Command Completion If you terminate input with a Tab key the CLI will print the remaining characters of a partial keyword up to the point of
24. C defaultview gt Back Ada Figure 5 8 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 5 15 5 Simple Network Management Protocol CLI Use the snmp server group command to configure a new group specifying the security model and level and restricting MIB access to defined read and write views Console config snmp server group secure users v3 priv read defaultview write defaultview notify defaultview 20 11 Console config exit Console show snmp group 20 12 Group Name secure users Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View defaultview Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Setting SNMPv3 Views SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Attributes e View Name The name of the SNMP view Range 1 64 characters e View OID Subtrees Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view Edit OID Subtrees Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Type Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included or excluded from the SNMP view 5 16 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 5 Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Views Cl
25. Click System Log Logs Logs Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information VLAN 1 link up notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information STA topology change notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information Unit 1 Port 21 link up notification Error Message Level 6 Module 6 functions 1 error number 1 Information System coldStart notification Figure 4 18 Displaying Logs CLI This example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 19 32 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Console Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts To alert system administrators of problems the switch can use SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a specified level The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients Command Attributes Admin Status Enables disables the SMTP function Default Enabled Email Source Address Sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrato
26. DSCP6 CoS0 xf Class of Semice Value 0 7 1 Restore Default Figure 13 7 IP DSCP Priority 13 10 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings 4 3 CLI The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 on port 1 and then displays the DSCP Priority settings Console config map ip dscp 31 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if map ip dscp 1 cos 0 31 11 Console config if end Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 31 14 DSCP mapping status disabled Port DSCP COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 2 0 Eth 1 1 61 0 Eth 1 1 62 0 Eth 1 1 63 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch Mapping IP Port Priority You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP port number i e TCP UDP port number in the frame header Some of the more common TCP service ports include HTTP 80 FTP 21 Telnet 23 and POP3 110 Command Attributes IP Port Priority Status Enables or disables the IP port priority IP Port Priority Table Shows the IP port to CoS map IP Port Number TCP UDP Set a new IP port number e Class of Service Value Sets a CoS value for a new IP port Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority
27. PE 31 5 show queue cos map Shows the class of service map PE 31 6 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an PE 24 11 interface VLAN based Priority Settings vlan priority Modifies the priority for frames entering a VLAN througha IC 31 6 selected interface show vlan based priority Displays the modified priority for frames entering a VLAN PE 31 7 31 1 3 4 Class of Service Commands queue mode This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin WRR for the class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax queue mode strict wrr no queue mode e strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues wrr Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 7 respectively Default Setting Weighted Round Robin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch
28. Powered by Accton ES3528 ES3528 WDM Layer 2 Metro Access Switch Management Guide www edge core com Management Guide ES3528 Fast Ethernet Switch Layer 2 Ethernet Metro Access Switch with 24 Fast Ethernet Ports RJ 45 2 Gigabit Combination Ports RJ 45 SFP 2 Gigabit Extender Module Slots RJ 45 SFP 1 Fast Ethernet Management Port RJ 45 ES3528 WDM Fast Ethernet Switch Layer 2 WDM Metro Access Switch with 24 100BASE BX Single Fiber Ports SC 2 Gigabit Combination Ports RJ 45 SFP 2 Gigabit Extender Module Slots RJ 45 SFP 1 Fast Ethernet Management Port RJ 45 ES3528 ES3528 WDM F1 0 1 7 E122006 ST RO1 149100033100A Contents Section Getting Started Chapter 1 Introduction Key Features Description of Software Features System Defaults Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options Required Connections Remote Connections Basic Configuration Console Connection Setting Passwords Setting an IP Address Manual Configuration Dynamic Configuration Enabling SNMP Management Access Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Trap Receivers Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients Managing System Files Saving Configuration Settings Section Il Switch Management Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface Navigating the Web Browser Interface Home Page Configuration Options Panel Display Main Menu Chapter 4 Basic Mana
29. QoS classification criteria and service policies Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on configured network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding All switches or routers that access the Internet rely on class information to provide the same forwarding treatment to packets in the same class Class information can be assigned by end hosts or switches or routers along the path Priority can then be assigned based on a general policy or a detailed examination of the packet However note that detailed examination of packets should take place close to the network edge so that core switches and routers are not overloaded Switches and routers along the path can use class information to prioritize the resources allocated to different traffic classes The manner in which an individual device handles traffic in the DiffServ architecture is called per hop behavior All devices along a path should be configured in a consistent manner to construct a consistent end to end QoS solution Notes 1 You can configure up t
30. Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 action delete on reset Assignment lasts until the switch is reset permanent Assignment is permanent Default Setting No static addresses are defined The default mode is permanent Command Mode Global Configuration 28 1 2 8 Address Table Commands Command Usage The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within a specific VLAN Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC Address Table Static addresses have the following characteristics e Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given interface link is down e Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is removed with the no form of this command Example Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset Console config clear mac address table dynamic This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear mac address
31. The switch s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed by the CLI program web interface or SNMP The switch s file system allows files to be uploaded and downloaded copied deleted and set as a start up file The three types of files are e Configuration This file type stores system configuration information and is created when configuration settings are saved Saved configuration files can be selected as a system start up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup The file named Factory_Default_Config cfg contains all the system default settings and cannot be deleted from the system If the system is booted with the factory default settings the master unit will also create a file named startup1 cfg that contains system settings for initialization including information about the unit identifier MAC address and installed module type The configuration settings from the factory defaults configuration file are copied to this file which is then used to boot the switch See Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings on page 4 14 for more information Operation Code System software that is executed after boot up also known as run time code This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web management interfaces See Managing Firmware on page 4 11 for more information e Diagnostic Code Software that is run during system boot up also known as
32. b The switch compares the client s password to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the connection is allowed Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys Public Key Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys Configuring the Secure Shell 6 stored on the switch can access it The following exchanges take place during this process Authenticating SSH v1 5 Clients a The client sends its RSA public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256 bit string as a challenge encrypts this string with the user s public key and sends it to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string computes the MD5 checksum and sends the checksum back to the switch e The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original string it sent If the two checksums match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authent
33. lt 1 2 gt 2 Source file name V3 1 16 20 BIX Destination file name V311620 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on the TFTP server Console copy file tftp Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name startup TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Destination file name startup 01 TFTP completed Success Console The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file Console copy running config file destination file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console 19 14 File Management Commands 4 9 The following example shows how to download a configuration file Console copy tftp startup config TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 99 Source configuration file name startup 01 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console This example shows how to copy a secure site certificate from an TFTP server It then reboots the switch to activate the certificate Consolet tcopy tftp https certificate TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Source certificate file name SS certificate Source private file name SS private Private password Success Console treload System will be restarted continue lt y
34. out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified IP ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Example Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl Related Commands mask IP ACL 23 6 ip access group 23 11 mask IP ACL This command defines a mask for IP ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask protocol any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask precedence tos dscp source port port bitmask destination port port bitmask control flag flag bitmask protocol Check the protocol field any Any address will be matched e host The address must be for a host device not a subnetwork source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask 23 6 PACs 23 destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask
35. port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed 24 11 24 Interface Commands Example This example shows the configuration setting for port 4 Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 4 Broadcast Threshold Enabled 500 packets second Muilticast Threshold Disabled LACP Status Disabled Ingress Rate Limit Disable 1000M bits per second Egress Rate Limit Disable 1000M bits per second VLAN Membership Mode Hybrid Ingress Rule Disabled Acceptable Frame Type All frames Native VLAN 1 Priority for Untagged Traffic 0 GVRP Status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Forbidden VLAN Unknown multicast block Disabled Unknown unicast block Disabled Console Table 24 2 show interfaces switchport display description Field Description Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also Muilticast Threshold shows the threshold level page 24 7 Shows if multicast storm suppression is enabled or disabled if enabled it also shows the threshold level page 24 7 LACP status Ingress Egress rate limit Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled page 25 2 Shows if rate limiting is enabled and the current rate limit page 27 1
36. rd_class match any Remove Class Description Class Configuration Class Name jrd_class Type match any z RsD service for DSCP 3 Description Match Class Settings Class Name rd_class IPOSCP 3 ACL List rone z Ada Posce os au IP Precedence 0 7 Adal VLAN 1 4093 Ada Figure 14 1 Configuring Class Maps CLI This example creates a class map call rd class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config class map rd_class match any 32 2 Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 32 3 Console config cmap exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in 23 6 Console config ip mask acl mask any any dscp 23 6 Console config ip mask ac1 14 4 Configuring Quality of Service Parameters 4 4 Creating QoS Policies This function creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces Command Usage To configure a Policy Map follow these steps Create a Class Map as described on page 14 2 Open the Policy Map page and click Add Policy When the Policy Configuration page opens fill in the Policy Name field and click Add When the Policy Rule Settings page opens select a class name from the scroll down list Class Name field Configure a policy for traffic that matches criteria defined in this class by setting the quali
37. which includes both ports and trunks Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Designated Root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Root Port The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root This switch communicates with the root device through this port If there is no root port then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree network Root Path Cost The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root device Configuration Changes The number of times the Spanning Tree has been reconfigured Last Topology Change Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI Spanning tree mode Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w MSTP Mu
38. 0 10 INACTIVE None Console 15 14 Multicast VLAN Registration 4 5 Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces Command Usage e Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically assigned to it under the MVR Configuration menu see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 15 10 The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk Member Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been statically assigned to the selected interface Non Member Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have not been statically assigned to the selected interface Web Click MVR Group Member Configuration Select a port or trunk from the Interface field and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups Select a multicast address from the displayed lists and click the Add or Remove button to modify the Member list MVR Static Group Member Interface Pot 1 YY OTrunk Member Non Member 228 1 23 1 228 1 23 2 A 228 1 23 3 228 1 23 4 228 1235 228 1 23 6 Figure 15 10 MVR Gro
39. 10 12 14 are assigned to queues 0 7 respectively Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling weights Example This example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console configure Console config int eth 1 5 Console config if queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Console config if Related Commands show queue bandwidth 31 5 queue cos map This command assigns class of service CoS values to the priority queues i e hardware output queues 0 7 Use the no form set the CoS map to the default values Syntax queue cos map queue_id cos7 cosn no queue cos map queue_id The ID of the priority queue Ranges are 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority queue cos7 cosn The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID It is a space separated list of numbers The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority 31 4 Priority Commands Layer 2 3 1 Default Setting This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues with Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below Table 31 3 Default CoS Priority Levels Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7
40. And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames Command Attributes Jumbo Packet Status Configures support for jumbo frames Default Disabled Web Click System Jumbo Frames Enable or disable support for jumbo frames and click Apply Jumbo Frames Jumbo Packet Status Enabled Figure 4 4 Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames CLI This example enables jumbo frames globally for the switch Console config jumbo frame 19 10 Console config A Basic Management Tasks Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Use the Switch Information page to display hardware firmware version numbers for the main board and management software as well as the power status of the system Field Attributes Main Board Serial Number The serial number of the switch e Hardware Version Hardware version of the main board e EPLD Version Version number of EEPROM Programmable Logic Device Number of Ports Number of built in ports e Main Power Status Displays the status of the primary power supply e Redundant Power Status Displays the status of the redundant power supply Management Software Unit ID Unit number in stack e Loader Version Version number of loader code Boot ROM Version Version of Power On Self Test POST and boot code Operation Code Version Version number of runtime code e Role
41. Command Usage e When configuring static trunks the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard Use no channel group to remove a port group from a trunk Use no interfaces port channel to remove a trunk from the switch Example The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11 Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if lacp This command enables 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the current interface Use the no form to disable it Syntax no lacp 25 2 lacp 2 5 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available port channel ID e Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails Example The following shows LACP enabled on ports 46 48 Because LACP has also been enabled on the ports at the other end of the links the show interfaces s
42. Default Setting No configured entries Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time which is indicated with a value of zero by the show ip source guard command page 22 6 e When source guard is enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table with this command e Static bindings are processed as follows If there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address a new entry is added to binding table using the type of static IP source guard binding 22 5 22 Client Security Commands If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of entry is static IP source guard binding then the new entry will replace the old one If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the type of the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding then the new entry will replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source guard binding Example This example configures a static source guard binding on port 5 Console config ip source guard binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethern
43. Ethernet Command Usage e Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG e System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with other systems Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp admin key Ethernet Interface This command configures a port s LACP administration key Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner admin key key no lacp actor partner admin key e actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e key The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same link aggregation group LAG Range 0 65535 25 4 lacp admin key Port Channel 25 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 t
44. Ethernet destination port Command Usage e You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner e The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface e The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port e You can create multiple mirror sessions but all sessions must share the same destination port However you should avoid sending too much traffic to the destination port from multiple source ports 26 1 2 6 Mirror Port Commands Example The following example configures the switch to mirror all packets from port 6 to 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 both Console config if show port monitor This command displays mirror information Syntax show port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port e unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 Default Setting Shows all sessions Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the currently configured source port destination port and mirror mode i e RX TX RX TX Example The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11 Console config interface ethernet 1 11
45. GARP Leave Timer22 The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that after a 22 Timer settings must follow this rule 2 x join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer 12 10 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs f 2 Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 60 3000 centiseconds Default 60 e GARP LeaveAll Timer22 The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 500 18000 centiseconds Default 1000 Mode Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface Default Hybrid 1Q Trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames Hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames Dot1q Tunnel Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network See Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling on page 12
46. Object ID MIB II object ID for switch s network management subsystem Location Specifies the system location Contact Administrator responsible for the system System Up Time Length of time the management agent has been up These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI System Description Brief description of device type MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Web Server Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled Web Server Port Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface Web Secure Server Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled Web Secure Server Port Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface Telnet Server Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled Telnet Server Port Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface Authentication Login Shows the user login authentication sequence Jumbo Frame Shows if jumbo frames are enabled Power Module Status Shows the power module status Power Module Type Shows the power module type Fan Shows the power fan status POST Result Shows results of the power on self test 4 Basic Management Tasks Web Click System System Information Specify the system name location and contact information for the system administrator then click Apply This page also includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet 24 port Ethernet Metro Acc
47. Port Port identifier Trunk Trunk identifier Membership Type Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button for a port or trunk Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP For more information see Automatic VLAN Registration on page 12 2 None Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Table Select a VLAN ID from the scroll down list Modify the VLAN name and status if required Select the membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or trunks Click Apply VLAN Static Table VLAN 2 Name R amp D Status Enable Port Tagged Untagged Forbidden None Trunk Member G C C 2 e C C 3 C G 4 C E c G Figure 12 5 VLAN Sta
48. Shows that this switch is operating as Master Web Click System Switch Information Switch Information Main Board Serial Number OoO0Esgso0000 Number of Ports 29 Hardware Version RO1 Internal Power Status Not Present Management Software EPLD Version 0 01 Loader Version 1 0 0 1 Boot ROM Version 1 0 0 7 Operation Code Version 1 0 1 7 Role Master Figure 4 5 Switch Information Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 4 CLI Use the following command to display version information Console show version 19 7 Unit 1 Serial Number 0000E8900000 Hardware Version R01 EPLD Version 0 01 Number of Ports 29 Agent Master Unit ID Loader Version Boot ROM Version Operation Code Version Console Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast Filtering Traffic Classes and Virtual LANs You can access these extensions to display default settings for the key variables Field Attributes Extended Multicast Filtering Services This switch does not support the filtering of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol Traffic Classes This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic classes Refer to Class of Service on page 13 1 Static Entry Individual Port This switch allows static filtering for unicast and multicast addresses R
49. Target Port 1 x Figure 9 10 Mirror Port Configuration CLI Use the interface command to select the monitor port then use the port monitor command to specify the source port Note that default mirroring under the CLI is for both received and transmitted packets Console config interface ethernet 1 2 24 1 Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 1 26 1 Console config if 9 19 9 Port Configuration Configuring Rate Limits This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the switch Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Note Rate limits can also be based on per port CoS values using the CLI see the vlan priority command on page 31 6 Command Attribute Rate Limit Sets the output rate limit for an interface Default Status Disabled Default Rate Fast Ethernet 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps Range Fast Ethernet 1 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1 1
50. based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets Table 30 7 Protocol based VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page protocol vian protocol group Create a protocol group specifying the supported protocols GC 30 17 protocol vian protocol group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN IC 30 17 protocol group show interfaces Shows the interfaces mapped to a protocol group and the PE 30 19 protocol vlan protocol group corresponding VLAN To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 30 7 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command General Configuration mode 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol vian protocol group command Interface Configuration mode 30 16 Configuring Protocol based VLANs 30 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups This command creates a protocol group or to add specific protocols to a group Use the no form to remove a protocol group Syntax protocol vian protocol group group id add remove frame type frame protocol type protocol no protocol vian protocol group group id group id Group ident
51. dynamically configured by these services Web Click System IP Configuration Specify the VLAN to which the management station is attached set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP Click Apply to save your changes Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new address Note that the stack will also broadcast a request for IP configuration settings on each power reset IP Configuration Management VLAN 1 IP Address Mode DHCP v IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address MAC Address 00 00 8 90 00 00 Restart DHCP Figure 4 8 IP Interface Configuration DHCP Note If you lose your management connection make a console connection to the Master unit and enter show ip interface to determine the new stack address CLI Specify the management interface and set the IP address mode to DHCP or BOOTP and then enter the ip dhcp restart command Console config Console config interface vlan 1 24 1 Console config if ip address dhcp 35 1 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 35 3 Console show ip interface 35 4 IP Address and Netmask 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 Address Mode DHCP Console 4 10 Managing Firmware 4 Renewing DCHP DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a specific period of time If the address expires or the stack is moved to another network segment you will lose management access to the stack In this case you can reboo
52. establish a default gateway between this device and management stations that exist on another network segment Basic IP Configuration This section describes commands used to configure an IP address for the switch Table 35 1 Basic IP Configuration Commands Command Function Mode Page ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 35 1 ip default gateway Defines the default gateway through which this router can reach GC 35 2 other subnetworks ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 35 3 show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device NE PE 35 4 show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 35 4 show arp Displays entries in the ARP cache PE 35 4 ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network NE PE 35 4 ip address This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface Use the no form to remove the current IP address Syntax ip address ip address netmask bootp dhcp no ip address jip address IP address e netmask Network mask for the associated IP subnet This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets bootp Obtains IP address from BOOTP e dhcp Obtains IP address from DHCP Default Setting DHCP Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN 35 1 3 5 IP Interface Commands Command Usage e You must assign an IP addres
53. is the community access string to remove Press lt Enter gt Console config snmp server community admin rw 20 3 Console config snmp server community private Console config Note If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients we recommend that you delete both of the default community strings If there are no community strings then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c clients is disabled Trap Receivers You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch To configure a trap receiver use the snmp server host command From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server host host address community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv where host address is the IP address for the trap receiver community string specifies access rights for a version 1 2c host or is the user name of a version 3 host version indicates the SNMP client version and auth noauth priv means that authentication no authentication or authentication and privacy is used for v3 clients Then press lt Enter gt For a more detailed description of these parameters see snmp server host on page 20 5 The following example creates a trap host for each type of SNMP client Console Console Console Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman 20 5 config snmp server host 10 1 19 98 robin vers
54. no switchport ingress filtering Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames e lIfingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port e If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded e Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STA However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP Example The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable ingress filtering Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport ingress filtering Console config if 30 10 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 30 switchport native vlan This command configures the PVID i e default VLAN ID for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport native vlan vlan id no switchport native vlan vlan id Default VLAN ID for a port Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Ifan interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be
55. precedence Check the IP precedence field tos Check the TOS field dscp Check the DSCP field source port Check the protocol source port field destination port Check the protocol destination port field port bitmask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 control flag Check the field for control flags flag bitmask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 Default Setting None Command Mode IP Mask Command Usage e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered First create the required ACLs and ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface If you enter dscp you cannot enter tos or precedence You can enter both tos and precedence without dscp e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Example This example creates an IP ingress mask with two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console Console Console Console config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask host any config ip mask acl mask 2
56. show lacp internal display description show lacp neighbors display description show lacp sysid display description Mirror Port Commands Rate Limit Commands Mapping Default to Per Port CoS Priority Levels Address Table Commands Spanning Tree Commands Recommended STA Path Cost Range Recommended STA Path Cost Default STA Path Costs VLAN Commands GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Commands for Editing VLAN Groups Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces Commands for Displaying VLAN Information Private VLAN Commands Protocol based VLAN Commands 20 13 20 15 21 1 21 1 21 2 21 4 21 6 21 9 21 11 21 13 21 14 21 15 21 22 21 24 21 33 22 1 22 1 22 3 22 7 23 1 23 1 23 12 23 19 24 1 24 12 25 1 25 7 25 8 25 9 25 10 26 1 27 1 27 2 28 1 29 1 29 12 29 12 29 12 30 1 30 1 30 6 30 8 30 13 30 14 30 16 Table 30 8 Table 31 1 Table 31 2 Table 31 3 Table 31 4 Table 31 5 Table 31 6 Table 32 1 Table 33 1 Table 33 2 Table 33 3 Table 33 4 Table 33 5 Table 33 6 Table 33 7 Table 33 8 Table 34 1 Table 34 2 Table 35 1 Table B 1 IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Commands Priority Commands Priority Commands Layer 2 Default CoS Priority Levels Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values Quality of Service Commands Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP Query Commands Static Multicast Routing Commands Multicast VLAN Registration Co
57. spanning tree edge port 29 14 spanning tree link type This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree link type auto point to point shared no spanning tree link type auto Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting point to point Point to point link e shared Shared medium Default Setting auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Specify a point to point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly one other bridge or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges When automatic detection is selected the switch derives the link type from the duplex mode A full duplex interface is considered a point to point link while a half duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link 29 15 29 Spanning Tree Commands e RSTP only works on point to point links between two bridges If you designate a port as a shared link RSTP is forbidden Since MSTP is an extension of RSTP this same restriction applies Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree link type point to point spanning tree mst cost This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id cost co
58. 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 7 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 8 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 9 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 10 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 11 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 12 32768 00 30 F1 D4 73 A0 Table 25 5 show lacp sysid display description Field Description Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch System Priority LACP system priority for this channel group System MAC Address System MAC address The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID 25 10 Chapter 26 Mirror Port Commands This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port Table 26 1 Mirror Port Commands Command Function Mode Page port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 26 1 show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 26 2 port monitor This command configures a mirror session Use the no form to clear a mirror session Syntax port monitor interface rx tx both no port monitor interface interface ethernet unit port source port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 e rx Mirror received packets e tx Mirror transmitted packets e both Mirror both received and transmitted packets Default Setting No mirror session is defined When enabled the default mirroring is for both received and transmitted packets Command Mode Interface Configuration
59. 1 23 2 address table 10 1 28 1 aging time 10 4 28 4 B BOOTP 4 10 35 1 BPDU 11 1 broadcast storm threshold 9 17 24 7 Cc Class of Service See CoS CLI showing commands 17 4 client security 7 1 command line interface See CLI community string 2 6 5 3 20 3 configuration files restoring defaults 19 12 configuration settings saving or restoring 2 9 4 14 19 12 19 13 console port required connections 2 2 CoS configuring 13 1 31 1 32 1 DSCP 13 10 31 11 IP port priority 13 11 31 8 IP precedence 13 8 31 9 layer 3 4 priorities 13 7 31 8 queue mapping 13 3 31 4 queue mode 13 5 31 2 setting static priority for VLANs 31 6 traffic class weights 13 6 31 4 D default gateway configuration 4 9 35 2 default priority ingress port 13 1 31 3 default settings system 1 6 DHCP 4 10 35 1 client 4 9 34 1 dynamic configuration 2 5 DHCP snooping binding static addresses 22 10 global configuration 22 7 specifying trusted interfaces 22 12 verifying MAC addresses 22 11 VLAN configuration 22 9 Differentiated Code Point Service See DSCP Differentiated Services See DiffServ DiffServ 14 1 32 1 binding policy to interface 14 8 32 7 class map 14 2 32 2 32 5 policy map 14 5 32 4 service policy 14 8 32 7 DNS default domain name 16 1 34 3 displaying the cache 16 5 domain name list 16 1 34 1 enabling lookup 16 1 34 5 name server list 16 1 34 4 static entries 16 3 Domain Name Service See DNS downloading software 4 1
60. 11 MAC ACLs 23 12 access list mac 23 12 permit deny MAC ACL 23 13 show mac access list 23 14 access list mac mask precedence 23 15 mask MAC ACL 23 15 show access list mac mask precedence 23 17 mac access group 23 18 show mac access group 23 18 ACL Information 23 19 show access list 23 19 show access group 23 19 Chapter 24 Interface Commands 24 1 interface 24 1 description 24 2 speed duplex 24 2 negotiation 24 3 capabilities 24 4 flowcontrol 24 5 media type 24 6 shutdown 24 6 switchport packet rate 24 7 switchport block 24 8 clear counters 24 8 show interfaces status 24 9 show interfaces counters 24 10 xiii Contents show interfaces switchport Chapter 25 Link Aggregation Commands channel group lacp lacp system priority lacp admin key Ethernet Interface lacp admin key Port Channel lacp port priority show lacp Chapter 26 Mirror Port Commands port monitor show port monitor Chapter 27 Rate Limit Commands rate limit rate limit cos show rate limit cos Chapter 28 Address Table Commands mac address table static clear mac address table dynamic show mac address table mac address table aging time show mac address table aging time Chapter 29 Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree spanning tree mode spanning tree forward time spanning tree hello time spanning tree max age spanning tree priority spanning tree pathcost method spanning tree transmission limit spanning tree mst configuration mst vlan mst
61. 12 for a detailed description of this feature TPID 0 65535 Tag Protocol Identifier specifies the ether type of incoming packets on a tunnel port See Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling on page 12 12 for a detailed description of this parameter Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To add a trunk to the selected VLAN use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Fill in the required settings for each interface click Apply VLAN Port Configuration carp Garp CARP LeaveAll Join Leave Timer Acceptable Ingress GVRP Timer Timer Trunk Port PVID Frame Type Filtering Status Centi Centi Paracel Mode Member Seconds Seconds 6500 20 1000 60 3000 18000 fi ALL Enabled M Enabled 20 foo fioo0 Hybrid Zz au l Enabled Enabled zo bo foo Hybrid z B Tagged z Enabled M Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybrid 4 fi JA Enabled Enabled 20 eo foo Hybrid 5 M AL W Enabled M Enabled 30 30 2000 Hybrid gt 6 i fall l Enabled Enabled feo o foo Hybrid z zj Figure 12 7 VLAN Port Configuration N w 12 11 A 2 VLAN Configuration CLI This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames assigns PVID 3 as the native VLAN ID enables GVRP sets the GARP timers and then sets the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 3 24 1 Console config i
62. 1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access32 to the data ports Table 21 1 Authentication Commands Command Group Function Page User Accounts Configures the basic user names and passwords for management 21 1 access Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 21 4 RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 21 6 TACACS Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS server 21 9 Web Server Settings Enables management access via a web browser 21 11 Telnet Server Settings Enables management access via Telnet 21 14 Secure Shell Settings Provides secure replacement for Telnet 21 15 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1X 21 24 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 21 33 User Account Commands The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a Telnet connection page 19 19 user authentication via a remote authentication server page 21 1 and host access authentication for specific ports page 21 24 Table 21 2 User Access Commands Command Function Mode Page username Establishes a user name based authentication system at login GC 21 2 enable password Sets a password to control access
63. 2 0 clients Command Usage The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified on the Authentication Settings page page 6 2 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch SSH Host Key Settings and enable the SSH server Authentication Settings 6 User Authentication To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair On the SSH Host Key Settings page create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example 10 1 0 54 1024 35 156849954018676692593339467 7505461 732531367489083654 7254 150202455931 9986854435836 1651999923329781 766065830956 10825913212890233 7654680172627257 14134287
64. 2 gt Source file name V1 0 0 28 bix Destination file name V10028 Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console config Console config boot system opcode V10028 19 17 Console config exit Console reload 18 4 4 13 A Basic Management Tasks Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings You can upload download configuration settings to from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore the switch s settings Command Attributes File Transfer Method The configuration copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to running config Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration file to startup config Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server running config to file Copies the running configuration to a file running config to startup config Copies the running config to the startup config running config to tftp Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server startup config to file Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch startup config to running config Copies the startup config to the running config startup config to tftp Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a fil
65. 20 Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 6 Web Click Security IP Filter Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that are allowed management access to an interface and click Add IP Filtering Entry Telnet IP Filter 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 19 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Telnet IP Filter List Start IP a Address ml End IP Address Add Telnet IP Filtering Entry Remove Telnet IP Filtering Entry Figure 6 10 IP Filter CLI This example restricts management access for Telnet clients Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 19 21 33 Console config management telnet client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console config exit Console show management all client 21 34 Management IP Filter HTTP Client Start IP address End IP address SNMP Client Start IP address End IP address TELNET Client Start IP address End IP address 1 192 168 1 19 192 168 11 19 2 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console 6 21 6 User Authentication 6 22 Chapter 7 Client Security This switch supports many methods of segregating traffic for clients attached to each of the data ports and for ensuring that only authorized clients gain access to the network Private VLANs and port based authentication using IEEE 802 1X are commonly used for these purposes In addition to these methods several other options of providing client security are supported by this switch These include p
66. 21 7 Console config radius server retransmit 5 21 8 Console config radius server timeout 10 21 8 Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 25 at 9 Console config exit Configuring HTTPS G Console show radius server 21 8 Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 25 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 181 Retransmit times 5 Request timeout 10 Console tconfig Console config authentication login tacacs 21 4 Console config tacacs server host 10 20 30 40 21 9 Console config tacacs server port 200 21 10 Console config tacacs server key green 21 10 Console config exit Console show tacacs server ALAF Server IP address 10 20 30 40 Communication key with tacacs server Server port number 200 Console config Configuring HTTPS You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Command Usage Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in y
67. 24 2 ports configuring 9 1 24 1 ports mirroring 9 19 26 1 priority default port ingress 13 1 31 3 problems troubleshooting B 1 protocol migration 11 15 29 18 Q QoS 14 1 32 1 Quality of Service See QoS queue weights 13 6 31 4 R RADIUS logon authentication 6 2 21 6 rate limits setting input and output limits 27 1 setting output limits based on priorities 27 2 Index rate limits setting 9 20 remote logging 19 31 restarting the system 4 25 18 4 RSTP 11 1 29 2 global configuration 11 3 29 2 S Secure Shell 6 7 21 15 configuration 6 7 21 18 21 19 security client 7 1 serial port configuring 19 19 show dot1q tunnel 30 21 show system mode 19 9 show system mtu 19 11 SNMP 5 1 community string 5 3 20 3 enabling traps 5 4 20 7 trap manager 5 4 20 5 software displaying version 4 6 19 7 downloading 4 12 19 13 Spanning Tree Protocol See STA specifications software A 1 SSH configuring 6 7 21 18 21 19 STA 11 1 29 1 edge port 11 12 11 15 29 14 global settings configuring 11 6 29 2 29 7 global settings displaying 11 3 29 18 interface settings 11 10 11 19 11 20 29 12 29 18 29 19 link type 11 12 11 15 29 15 path cost 11 3 11 12 29 12 path cost method 11 7 29 6 port priority 11 12 29 13 protocol migration 11 15 29 18 transmission limit 11 7 29 7 standards IEEE A 2 startup files creating 4 15 19 13 displaying 4 12 19 2 setting 4 12 19 17 static addresses setting 10 1 28 1 st
68. 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 1t This trap is sent when the power state changes swFanFailureTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 17 This trap is sent when the fan fails swFanRecoverlTrap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 18 This trap is sent when the fan failure has recovered swlpFilterRejectTrap swSmtpConnFailure Trap 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 40 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 41 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is rejected by the IP Filter This trap is triggered if the SMTP system cannot open a connection to the mail server successfully swMainBoardVer MismatchNotificaiton 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 56 This trap is sent when the slave board version is mismatched with the master board version This trap binds two objects the first object indicates the master version whereas the second represents the slave version swModuleVer MismatchNotificaiton 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 57 This trap is sent when the slide in module version is mismatched with the main board version swThermalRising Notification 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 58 This trap is sent when the temperature exceeds the switchThermalActionRisingThreshold 5 14 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 5 Table 5 2 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description swThermalFalling 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 59 This trap is sent when the temperature falls
69. A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console 23 8 Pab 23 This shows how to create an extended ACL with an egress mask to drop packets leaving network 171 69 198 0 when the Layer 4 source port is 23 Console config access list ip extended A3 Console config ext acl deny host 171 69 198 5 any Console config ext acl deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console config ext acl end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny host 171 69 198 5 any deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 Console tconfig Console config access list ip mask precedence out Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console config ip mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 15 Console config if ip access group A3 out Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A3 deny 171 69 198 0 255 255 255 0 any source port 23 deny host 171 69 198 5 any IP egress mask ACL mask 255 255 255 0 any source port Console 23 9 2 3 Access Control List Commands This is a more comprehensive example It denies any TCP packets in which the SYN bit is ON and permits all other packets It then sets the ingress mask to check the deny rule first and finally binds port 1 to this ACL Note that once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Switch
70. Ethernet type ACLs can by used to improve performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols Port Configuration You can manually configure the speed and duplex mode and flow control used on specific ports or use auto negotiation to detect the connection settings used by the attached device Use the full duplex mode on ports whenever possible to double the throughput of switch connections Flow control should also be enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded The switch supports flow control based on the IEEE 802 3 2005 standard Rate Limiting This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Input rate limits can also be set for traffic based on Class of Service CoS values Port Mirroring The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Trunking Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection Tru
71. Ethl 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Ethl 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 8S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S VLAN ID 2 Type Static Name R amp D Status Active Ports Port Channels Console Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 1Q VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices Or configure a port as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the GVRP protocol Notes 1 You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure VLAN groups based on the port index page 9 However note that this configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members 2 VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch and can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as described under Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 12 10 12 7 A 2 VLAN Configuration Command Attributes VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets
72. Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Flow control can eliminate frame loss by blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3 2005 formally IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation To force flow control on or off with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol command use the no negotiation command to disable auto negotiation on the selected interface When using the negotiation command to enable auto negotiation the optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command To enable flow control under auto negotiation flowcontrol must be included in the capabilities list for any port e Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub 24 5 24 Interface Commands Example The following example enables flow control on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lowcontrol Console config if no negotiation Console config if Related Commands negotiation 24 3 capabilities flowcontrol symmetric 24 4 media type This command forces the port type selected for combination ports 27 28 Use the no form to restore the default mode Syntax media type mode
73. LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 9 15 9 Port Configuration Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side of an link aggregation Table 9 3 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Field Description Partner Admin System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user Partner Oper System ID LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See precedin
74. LC 19 23 failed logon attempts silent time Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible LC 19 24 after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command databits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and LC 19 24 generated by hardware parity Defines the generation ofaparitybt fice 19 25 speed Sets the terminal baud rate LC 19 25 stopbits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 19 26 show line Displays a terminal line s parameters NE PE 19 27 These commands only apply to the serial port line This command identifies a specific line for configuration and to process subsequent line configuration commands Syntax line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting There is no default line Command Mode Global Configuration 19 19 4 9 System Management Commands Command Usage Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as VTY in screen displays such as show users However the serial communication parameters e g databits do not affect Telnet connections Example To enter console line mode enter the following command Console config line console Console config line Related Commands show line 19 27 show users 19 7 l
75. Line Processing Commands are not case sensitive You can abbreviate commands and parameters as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently available commands or parameters You can use the Tab key to complete partial commands or enter a partial command followed by the character to display a list of possible matches You can also use the following editing keystrokes for command line processing Table 17 3 Keystroke Commands Keystroke Function Ctrl A Shifts cursor to start of command line Ctrl B Shifts cursor to the left one character Ctrl C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt Ctrl E Shifts cursor to end of command line Ctrl F Shifts cursor to the right one character Ctrl K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line Ctrl L Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl N Enters the next command line in the history buffer Ctrl P Enters the last command Ctrl R Repeats current command line on a new line Ctrl U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line Ctrl W Deletes the last word typed Esc B Moves the cursor back one word Esc D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command 17 9 A T Overview of Command Line Interface Command Groups The system
76. List Commands access list ip This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or extended IP ACLs Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list ip standard extended ac _name standard Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP address extended Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or destination IP address and other more specific criteria acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules Example Console config access list ip standard david Console config std acl Related Commands permit deny 23 2 ip access group 23 11 show ip access list 23 5 permit deny Standard ACL This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets emanating from the specified source Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any source bitmask host source any Any source IP address source Sour
77. MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information over the network The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware as well as the traffic passing through its ports A network management station can access this information using software such as HP OpenView Access to the onboard agent from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings To communicate with the switch the management station must first submit a valid community string for authentication Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models with each model having its own security levels There are three security models defined SNMPv1 SNMPv2c and SNMPv3 Users are assigned to groups that are defined by a security model and specified security levels Each group also has a defined security access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing which are known as views The switch has a default view all MIB objects and default groups defined for security models v1 and v2c The following table shows the security models and levels available and the system default settings 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Tab
78. Machine State Initialize 802 1X is disabled on port 1 28 Console 24 1 21 26 21 27 21 25 21 28 21 28 21 29 21 29 Authorized yes yes n a n a 6 17 6 User Authentication Displaying 802 1X Statistics This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port Table 6 2 802 1X Statistics Parameter Description Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp ld The number of EAP Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP Resp Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been tr
79. Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Displaying Current VLANs The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging Ports assigned to a large VLAN group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging However if you just want to create a small port based VLAN for one or two switches you can disable tagging Command Attributes Web e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 Up Time at Creation Time this VLAN was created i e System Up Time e Status Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic GVRP Automatically learned via GVRP Permanent Added as a static entry Egress Ports Shows all the VLAN port members Untagged Ports Shows the untagged VLAN port members Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Current Table Select any ID from the scroll down list VLAN Current Table VLAN ID 1 7 Up Time at Creationd dO hO min7 Status Permanent Egress Ports Untagged Ports Unit Port a Unit Porti Uniti Por Unitl Port Unitl Por3 Uniti Port3 Unit Port4 Unit Port4 Unit Por6 Unit Port6 Unitl Por Unitl Port Uniti Port8 Unit Port8 Uniti Pond x Uniti Po
80. Note Up to 8 entries can be specified IP Port Priority settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP Port Priority Status Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled IP Port Priority Status lP Port Priority Global Status Enabled Figure 13 8 IP Port Priority Status 13 11 4A 3 Class of Service Click Priority IP Port Priority Enter the port number for a network application in the IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box and then click Apply IP Port Priority none IIP Port Priority Table f r IP Port Number TCP UDP 80 f Class of Semice Value onb Remove IP Port Figure 13 9 IP Port Priority CLI The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch maps HTTP traffic on port 1 to CoS value 0 and then displays the IP Port Priority settings Console config map ip port 31 8 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 31 9 Console config if end Console show map ip port ethernet 1 5 31 12 TCP port mapping status disabled Port Port no COS Eth 1 1 80 0 Console Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 13 12 Chapter 14 Quality of Service The commands described in this section are used to configure Quality of Service
81. Packet Format Mask I Enabled e Figure 8 7 ACL Mask Configuration MAC 8 12 Binding a Port to an Access Control List 8 CLI This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 23 12 Console config mac acl permit any any 23 13 Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 23 13 Console config mac acl end Console show access list 23 19 MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in 23 15 Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 23 15 Console config mac mask ac1 exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 24 1 Console config if mac access group M4 in 23 18 Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console Binding a Port to an Access Control List After configuring the Access Control Lists ACL you should bind them to the ports that need to filter traffic You can only bind a port to one ACL for each basic type IP ingress IP egress MAC ingress and MAC egress Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a po
82. Range 1 4093 Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Select a a port or trunk enter a protocol group ID the corresponding VLAN ID and click Apply Protocol Vlan Port Configuration Interface Port 1 7 C Trunk Query Current New Group 1 Vlan 3 lt lt Add Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 Remove Vian ID 1 gt Figure 12 12 Protocol VLAN Port Configuration 12 20 Configuring Protocol Based VLANs 4 2 CLI The following maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 3 30 17 Console config if 12 21 A 2 VLAN Configuration 12 22 Chapter 13 Class of Service Class of Service CoS allows you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface and configure the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Note The priority for all traffic entering a VLAN can also be configured using the CLI see the vian priority command on page 31 6 Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces
83. Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 20 4 show snmp group display description Field Description groupname Name of an SNMP group security model The SNMP version readview The associated read view writeview The associated write view notifyview The associated notify view storage type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry 20 13 2 oO SNMP Commands snmp server user This command adds a user to an SNMP group restricting the user to a specific SNMP Read Write or Notify View Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP group Syntax snmp server user username groupname remote jp address v1 v2c v3 encrypted auth md5 sha auth password priv des56 priv password no snmp server user username v1 v2c v3 remote username Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters groupname Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device jip address The Internet address of the remote device v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 encrypted Accepts the password as encrypted input auth Uses SNMPv3 with authentication md5 sha Uses MD5 or SHA authentication auth password Authentication password Enter as plain text i
84. Routine Command Attributes IP Precedence Priority Table Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map e Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority 13 8 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings 4 3 Web Click Priority IP Precedence Priority Select an entry from the IP Precedence Priority Table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field and then click Apply IP Precedence Priority IP Precedence 0 CoS 0 IP Precedence 1 CoS1 IP Precedence 2 CoS 2 IP Precedence 3 CoS 3 IP Precedence 4 CoS 4 IP Precedence 5 CoS5 IP Precedence 6 CoS 6 IP Precedence 7 CoS 7 Class of Service Value 0 7 fo Restore Default IP Precedence Priority Table Figure 13 6 IP Precedence Priority CLI The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 on port 1 and then displays the IP Precedence settings Console config map ip precedence 319 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 31 10 Console config if end Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 1 31 13 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 1 0 0 Eth 1 1 1 0 Eth 1 1 2 2 Eth 1 1 3 3 Eth 1 1 4 4 Eth 1 1 5 5 Eth 1 1 6 6 Eth 1 1 7 7 Console Mapping specific values for IP
85. Showing Port Statistics on page 9 21 24 10 show interfaces switchport 24 Example Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 7 Iftable stats Octets input 30658 Octets output 196550 Unicast input 6 Unicast output 5 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 3064 Broadcast input 262 Broadcast output 1 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0 Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 227208 Packets 3338 Broadcast pkts 263 Multi cast pkts 3064 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 3150 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 139 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 49 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 0 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 0 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 0 Console show interfaces switchport This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified interfaces Syntax show interfaces switchport interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1
86. Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree protocol migration This command re checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interface Syntax spanning tree protocol migration interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the spanning tree protocol migration command at any time to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces i e RSTP or STP compatible Example Console spanning tree protocol migration eth 1 5 Console show spanning tree This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree CST or for an instance within the multiple spanning tree MST Syntax show spanning tree interface mst instance_id interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 instance_id Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes Default Setting None 29 18 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage show spanning tree 2 9 e Use the show spanning tree command with n
87. Switching Supported to ensure wire speed switching while eliminating bad frames Spanning Tree Algorithm Supports standard STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP 4 Introduction Table 1 1 Key Features Continued Feature Description Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802 1Q port based protocol based VLANs private VLANs and QinQ tunneling Traffic Prioritization Default port priority VLAN priority traffic class map queue scheduling IP Precedence or Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP and TCP UDP Port Qualify of Service Supports Differentiated Services DiffServ Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query as well as Multicast VLAN Registration Tunneling Supports IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ Description of Software Features The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port saturation Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from engulfing the network Untagged port based tagged and protocol based VLANs plus support for automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network bandwidth CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real time multimedia data across the network While multicast filtering provides support for real time network applications Some
88. Telnet i e a virtual terminal Management access via Telnet can be enabled disabled and other various parameters set including the TCP port number timeouts and a password These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes Telnet Status Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch Default Enabled Telnet Port Number Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch Range 1 65535 Default 23 Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 300 seconds Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 600 seconds Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts 4 18 Telnet Settings 4 Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password
89. Type username guest password 0 password for the Normal Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt 4 Type username admin password 0 password for the Privileged Exec level where password is your new password Press lt Enter gt Username admin Password CLI session with the Layer 2 Ethernet Metro Access Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console configure 18 2 Console config username guest password 0 password 21 2 Console config username admin password 0 password Console config Most of the interface examples in this manual are based on the ES3528 There is no significant difference in the interface provided for the ES3528 and ES3528 WDM Setting an IP Address You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management access through the network This can be done in either of the following ways Manual You have to input the information including IP address and subnet mask If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch you will also need to specify the default gateway router Dynamic The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network Manual Configuration You can manually assign an IP address to the switch You may also need to specify a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that exist on another network seg
90. VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer VLAN IDs are preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN IDs QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN in VLAN hierarchy preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame also called double tagging A port configured to support QinQ tunneling must be set to tunnel port mode The Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN ID for the specific customer must be assigned to the QinQ tunnel port on the edge switch where the customer traffic enters the service provider s network Each customer requires a separate SPVLAN but this VLAN supports all of the customer s internal VLANs The QinQ uplink port that passes traffic from the edge switch into the service provider s metro network must also be added to this SPVLAN The uplink port can be added to multiple SPVLANs to carry inbound traffic for different customers onto the service provider s network When a double tagged packet enters another trunk port in an intermediate or core switch in the service provider s network the outer tag is stripped for packet 12 12 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling f 2D processing When the packet exits another trunk port on the same core switch the same SPVLAN tag is again added to the packet When a packet enters the trunk port on the service provider s
91. VLAN Registration A method of using a single network wide multicast VLAN to transmit common services such as such as television channels or video on demand across a service provider s network MVR simplifies the configuration of multicast services by using a common VLAN for distribution while still preserving security and data isolation for subscribers residing in both the MVR VLAN and other standard or private VLAN groups Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP MSTP can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group Network Time Protocol NTP NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network The time servers operate in a hierarchical master slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio Out of Band Management Management of the network from a station not attached to the network Glossary 4 Glossary Port Authentication See IEEE 802 1X Port Mirroring A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively Port Trunk Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how
92. View The configured view for write access Range 1 64 characters e Notify View The configured view for notifications Range 1 64 characters Table 5 2 Supported Notification Messages Object Label Object ID Description RFC 1493 Traps newRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending agent has become the new root of the Spanning Tree the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its election as the new root e g upon expiration of the Topology Change Timer immediately subsequent to its election topologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when any of its configured ports transitions from the Learning state to the Forwarding state or from the Forwarding state to the Discarding state The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the same transition SNMPv2 Traps coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 AcoldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself and that its configuration may have been altered warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role is reinitializing itself such that its configuration is unaltered linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links is about to e
93. access rights from the Access Mode drop down list then click Add SNMP Configuration SNMP Community SNMP Community Capability 5 Current New private RW public RO lt lt Add Community String spiderman Remove Access Mode Read Write x gi Figure 5 2 Configuring SNMP Community Strings CLI The following example adds the string spiderman with read write access Console config snmp server community spiderman rw 20 3 Console config 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to your management station using network management platforms such as HP OpenView You can specify up to five management stations that will receive authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch Command Usage e If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the Trap Manager Community String is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use V3 authentication or encryption options authNoPriv or authPriv the user name must first be defined in the SNMPv3 Users page page 5 9 Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the no authentication noAuth option an SNMP
94. added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid the PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port Example The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 Console config if switchport allowed vian This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport allowed vlan add vian list tagged untagged remove vian list no switchport allowed vian e add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default Setting All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default e The default frame type is untagged 30 11 30 VLAN Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid must be assigned to at least one VLAN as untagged e Ifa trunk has switchport mode set to trunk i e 1Q Trunk then you can only assign an inter
95. address source Source MAC address destination Destination MAC address range with bitmask 23 13 2 3 Access Control List Commands address bitmask94 Bitmask for MAC address in hexidecimal format e vid VLAN ID Range 1 4093 e vid bitmask34 VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 protocol A specific Ethernet protocol number Range 600 fff hex e protocol bitmask34 Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Default Setting None Command Mode MAC ACL Command Usage e New rules are added to the end of the list The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets e A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include the following 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Example This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console config mac acl1 Related Commands access list mac 23 12 show mac access list This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs Syntax show mac access list ac _name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access list MAC access list jerry permit any 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 Console 34
96. an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN show mvr Shows information about the global MVR configuration PE 33 14 settings the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN 33 11 33 Multicast Filtering Commands mvr Global Configuration This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration MVR globally on the switch statically configures MVR multicast group IP address es using the group keyword or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier using the vlan keyword Use the no form of this command without any keywords to globally disable MVR Use the no form with the group keyword to remove a specific address or range of addresses Or use the no form with the vlan keyword restore the default MVR VLAN Syntax no mvr group ip address count vlan vlan id jp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 e vian id MVR VLAN ID Range 1 4094 Default Setting e MVR is disabled e No MVR group address is defined The default number of contiguous addresses is 0 e MVR VLAN ID is 1 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the mvr group command to statically configure all multicast group addresses that will join the MVR VLAN Any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all source ports and to all receiver ports that have register
97. assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Range 0 for auto configuration 1 65535 for the short path cost method29 1 200 000 000 for the long path cost method By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Table 11 1 Recommended STA Path Cost Range Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Fast Ethernet 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 3 10 2 000 200 000 Table 11 2 Recommended STA Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 4 10 000 Trunk 3 5 000 Table 11 3 Default STA Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 20 Refer to Configuring Global Settings on page 6 for information on setting the path cost method 11 14 Configuring Interface Settings 4 1 Admin Link Type The link ty
98. ba i Vd o rao a ao 0j oj Figure 13 1 Default Port Priority CLI This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3 Information of Eth 1 3 Broadcast threshold LACP status Ingress rate limit Forbidden VLAN Console 13 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 24 1 Console config if switchport priority default 5 3 3 Console config if end Console show interfaces switchport ethernet 1 3 24 11 Enabled 500 packets second Disabled Disable 1000M bits per second Egress rate limit Disable 1000M bits per second VLAN membership mode Hybrid Ingress rule Disabled Acceptable frame type All frames Native VLAN 3 Priority for untagged traffic 5 GVRP status Disabled Allowed VLAN 1 u Layer 2 Queue Settings 4 3 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues This switch processes Class of Service CoS priority tagged traffic by using eight priority queues for each port with service schedules based on strict or Weighted Round Robin WRR Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown in the following table Table 13 1 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Priority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802 1p standard for various network applications are shown in the following
99. based on this information The address table supports up to 16K addresses 4A Introduction Store and Forward Switching The switch copies each frame into its memory before forwarding them to another port This ensures that all frames are a standard Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check CRC This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth To avoid dropping frames on congested ports the switch provides 32 MB for frame buffering This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested networks Spanning Tree Algorithm The switch supports these spanning tree protocols Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D This protocol provides loop detection When there are multiple physical paths between segments this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network This prevents the creation of network loops However if the chosen path should fail for any reason an alternate path will be activated to maintain the connection Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w This protocol reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 3 to 5 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard It is intended as a complete replacement for STP but can still interoperate with switches running the older standard by automatically
100. binding the packet will be forwarded Ifthe DHCP snooping is enabled IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding static DHCP snooping binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding the packet will be forwarded If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured are not yet configured the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port except for DHCP packets IP Source Guard Commands 22 Example This example enables IP source guard on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if ip source guard sip Console config if Related Commands ip source guard binding 22 5 ip dhcp snooping 22 7 ip dhcp snooping vlan 22 9 ip source guard binding This command adds a static address to the source guard binding table Use the no form to remove a static entry Syntax ip source guard binding mac address vlan vlan id ip address interface ethernet unit port no ip source guard binding mac address vlan vian id e mac address A valid unicast MAC address e vian id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4093 jp address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C e unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28
101. code MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and 23 12 Ethernet type ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules shows ACLs assigned to each port 23 19 IP ACLs The commands in this section configure ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP port number protocol type and TCP control code To configure IP ACLs first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules set a precedence mask to control the filter sequence and then bind the access list to one or more ports Table 23 2 IP ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode for GC 23 2 standard or extended IP ACLs permit deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP address IP 23 2 STD ACL permit deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria including IP 23 3 source and destination IP address TCP UDP port number EXT ACL protocol type and TCP control code show ip access list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 23 5 access list ip Changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access GC 23 6 mask precedence control masks mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules IP Mask 23 6 show access list ip Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs PE 23 10 mask precedence ip access group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 23 11 show ip access group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 23 11 23 1 2 3 Access Control
102. config queue bandwidth 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 31 4 Console config exit Console show queue bandwidth 31 5 Information of Eth 1 1 Queue ID Weight 0 1 1 3 2 5 3 7 4 9 5 DL 6 3 7 15 Information of Eth 1 2 Queue ID Weight Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the priority bits in the Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP port If priority bits are used the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP service When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic this switch maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority IP Precedence or DSCP Priority and then Default Port Priority IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority Select one of the methods or disable this feature
103. convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device e Admin Link Type The link type attached to this interface Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge Shared A connection to two or more bridges Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Information or STA Trunk Information STA Port Information Spannin STA Forward Designated Designated jesignated Oper el Tru Port Pireo Status Transitions Cost Bridge Pesan Oper Path Cost Link Type tage Pon Port Role pda 1 Enabled Forwarding 1 0 32768 0000E8AAAAQ0 128 4 10000 Point to Point Disabled Root 2 Enabled Discarding 128 2 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled Enabled Discarding 128 3 10000 Point to Point Disabled Disabled 0 3 0 4 Enabled Discarding 0 128 4 10000 int Disabled De 5 Enabled Discarding 0 128 5 10000 int Disa Di 6 Enabled Discarding 0 128 6 10000 Dis Dis Enabl 0 128 7 10000 0 8 Enable 0 128
104. displayed in the following table Table 17 1 General Command Modes Class Mode Exec Normal Privileged Configuration Global Access Control List Class Map Interface Line Multiple Spanning Tree Policy Map VLAN Database You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes Exec Commands When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and password guest the system enters the Normal Exec command mode or guest mode displaying the Console gt command prompt Only a limited number of the commands are available in this mode You can access all commands only from the Privileged Exec command mode or administrator mode To access Privilege Exec mode open a new console session with the user name and password admin The system will now display the Console command prompt You can also enter Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode by entering the enable command followed by the privileged level password super page 21 3 To enter Privileged Exec mode enter the following user names and passwords Username admin Password admin login password CLI session with the Layer 2 Ethernet Metro Access Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console 17 6 Entering Commands 4 7 Username guest Password guest lo
105. eae 26 1 Rate Limit Commands ro serce red 0 cece tees 27 1 Address Table Commands 0 00 e ee eet eae 28 1 Spanning Tree Commands 0 0 e eee eee 29 1 VLAN Command ie resi pacar ba ed ees Pe OY EE ou eae he ee 30 1 Class of Service Commands 0 cece eee 31 1 Quality of Service Commands 00000 cece eee ees 32 1 Multicast Filtering Commands 0 cece eee 33 1 Domain Name Service Commands 0 0 0 cece eee eee 34 1 IP Interface Commands 0 00 cee eee eee 35 1 Command Line Interface Chapter 17 Overview of Command Line Interface This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system Console Connection To access the switch through the console port perform these steps 1 At the console prompt enter the user name and password The default user names are admin and guest with corresponding passwords of admin and guest When the administrator user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console prompt and enters privileged a
106. egress switch the outer tag is again stripped for packet processing However the SPVLAN tag is not added when it is sent out the tunnel port on the edge switch into the customer s network The packet is sent as a normal IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame preserving the original VLAN numbers used in the customer s network 5 ii 4 Customer wf N ustomer A VLANs 1 10 let a N WLANs 1 10 x T QinQ Tunneling N ra S VLAN 10 Service Provider Service Provider VLAN 10 Tunnel Por edge router A edge router BX Tunnel Port a a Tunnel Port Neses me Double Tagged Packets A Tunnel Port kei 20 Outer Tag Service Provider VID VLAN 20 Se Inner Tag Customer VID NZ Customer B X Customer B VLANs 1 50 Ts a WLANs 1 50 E ae ee A Si a Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Port A QinQ tunnel port may receive either tagged or untagged packets No matter how many tags the incoming packet has it is treated as tagged packet The ingress process does source and destination lookups If both lookups are successful the ingress process writes the packet to memory Then the egress process transmits the packet Packets entering a QinQ tunnel port are processed in the following manner 1 New SPVLAN tags are added to all incoming packets no matter how many tags they already have The ingress process constructs and inserts the outer tag SPVLAN into the packet based on the
107. following authentication methods is employed Password Authentication for SSH v1 5 or V2 Clients a The client sends its password to the server b The switch compares the client s password to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the connection is allowed Note To use SSH with only password authentication the host public key must still be given to the client either during initial connection or manually entered into the known host file However you do not need to configure the client s keys Public Key Authentication When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption method Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys 21 16 Secure Shell Commands 21 stored on the switch can access it The following exchanges take place during this process Authenticating SSH v1 5 Clients a The client sends its RSA public key to the switch b The switch compares the client s public key to those stored in memory c Ifa match is found the switch uses its secret key to generate a random 256 bit string as a challenge encrypts this string with the user s public key and sends it to the client d The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string computes the MD5 checksum and sends the checksum back to the switch e The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that computed for the original
108. following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr members MVR Group IP Status Members 225 0 0 1 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1 2 s 225 0 0 2 INACTIVE None 22 5 lt 0 0 3 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 6 INACTIVE None 225 007 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 9 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 10 INACTIVE None Console Table 33 8 show mvr members display description Field Description MVR Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Status Shows whether or not the there are active subscribers for this multicast group Note that this field will also display INACTIVE if MVR is globally disabled Members Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Also shows if an interface has dynamically joined a multicast group d or if a multicast group has been statically bound to the interface s 33 16 Chapter 34 Domain Name Service Commands These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System DNS services You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping table configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is specified with the ip name server
109. for a list of all permit rules the packet is dropped and if no rules match for a list of all deny rules the packet is accepted You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule This is done by specifying masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types that is Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type The following filtering modes are supported Standard IP ACL mode STD ACL filters packets based on the source IP address e Extended IP ACL mode EXT ACL filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified packets can also be filtered based on the TCP control code MAC ACL mode MAC ACL filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Command Usage The following restrictions apply to ACLs The switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However only one IP ACL and one MAC ACL can be bound to any port for ingres
110. group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface Note that immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port Command Attributes 1 MVR Type The following interface types are supported Source An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Receiver A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the MVR VLAN Non MVR An interface that does not participate in the MVR VLAN This is the default type Immediate Leave Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group Trunk28 Shows if port is a trunk member 28 Port Information only 5 12 Multicast VLAN Registration 4 5 Web Click MVR Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration MVR Port Configuration Port MVRType Immediate Leave Trunk 1 Source v Enabled 2 Receiver x M Enabled 3 NonMVR Enabled 4 Non MVR Enabled 5 Non MVR Enabled 6 Non MVR Enabled 7 Non MVR Enabled 8 N
111. in the DHCP snooping table Table entries are only learned for untrusted interfaces Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled the rate limit for the number of DHCP messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows If the global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table If the DHCP packet is from client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled as specified by the ip d
112. ip ssh crypto host key generate 21 20 ip ssh save host key 21 21 no ip ssh server 21 17 ip ssh save host key This command saves the host key from RAM to flash memory Syntax ip ssh save host key dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type e rsa RSA key type Default Setting Saves both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec 21 21 2 4 User Authentication Commands Example Console ip ssh save host key dsa Console Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 21 20 show ip ssh This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client access to the SSH server Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip ssh SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh This command displays the current SSH server connections Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ssh Connection Version State Username Encryption 0 2 0 Session Started admin ctos aes128 cbc hmac md5 stoc aes128 cbc hmac md5 Console Table 21 11 show ssh display description Field Description Session The session number Range 0 3 Version The Secure Shell version number State The authentication negotiation state Values Negotiation Started Authentication Started Session Started Username The user name of the client 21 22 Secure Shell Commands 21 Ta
113. is checked Command Attributes Authentication Select the authentication or authentication sequence required Local User authentication is performed only locally by the switch Radius User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only TACACS User authentication is performed using a TACACS server only authentication sequence User authentication is performed by up to three authentication methods in the indicated sequence RADIUS Settings Global Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings Serverlndex Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers The process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user Server IP Address Address of authentication server Default 10 1 0 1 Server Port Number Network UDP port of authentication server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 1812 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters 6 3 6 User Authentication Number of Server Transmits Number of times the switch tries to authenticate logon access via the authentication server Range 1 30 Default 2 Timeout for a reply The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the RADIUS server before it resends the request Range
114. it times out the authentication session Range 1 10 Default 2 Quiet Period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Range 1 65535 seconds Default 60 seconds e Re authentication Period Sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Range 1 65535 seconds Default 3600 seconds TX Period Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Authorized Yes Connected client is authorized No Connected client is not authorized Blank Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port e Supplicant Indicates the MAC address of a connected client e Trunk Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port Web Click Security 802 1X Port Configuration Modify the parameters required and click Apply 802 1X Port Configuration Port Status Operaten Max Coat Mode MaxRe bar B A Tx Period Authorized Supplicant Trunk Mode 1 20 authen 1 Period PP Period 1 Disabled Single Host Force Uneuthonzed 2 Enable 2 60 fas00 30 2 Enabled Single Host 50 fison 30 3 Disabled Single Host 60 s500 30 4 Disabled Singie Host 0 3500 30 5 Disabled Singie Host 60 fason 30 6 Disabled Single Hos 50 s00 30 00 00 00 0
115. jp address Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic from the IP address specified for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting The port type is not defined Immediate leave is disabled No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for multicast filtering e MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a receiver port using the group keyword One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports A source port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has joined through IGMP snooping or which have been statically assigned using the group keyword The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately remove
116. map command to specify the name of the policy map and then use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches criteria defined in a class map e A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the service policy command page 32 7 e You must create a Class Map page 32 4 before assigning it to a Policy Map Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c 32 4 class 3 2 class This command defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act and enters Policy Map Class configuration mode Use the no form to delete a class map and return to Policy Map configuration mode Syntax no class class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Configuration Command Usage Use the policy map command to specify a policy map and en
117. matel com lt lt Add Email Destination Address Figure 4 19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts 4 24 Resetting the System 4 CLI Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server set the syslog severity level to trigger an email message and specify the switch source and up to five recipient destination email addresses Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command to complete the configuration Use the show logging sendmail command to display the current SMTP configuration Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 4 19 34 Console config logging sendmail level 3 19 35 Console config logging sendmail source email big wheels matel com 19 35 Console config logging sendmail destination email chris matel com 19 36 Console config logging sendmail 19 36 Console config exit Console show logging sendmail EO 37 SMTP servers 1 192 168 1 4 SMTP minimum severity level 4 SMTP destination email addresses 1 chris matel com SMTP source email address big wheels matel com SMTP status Enabled Console Resetting the System Web Click System Reset Click the Reset button to restart the switch When prompted confirm that you want reset the switch Reset the switch by selecting Reset Reset le L_ Figure 4 20 Resetting the System CLI Use the reload command to restart the switch Console reload 18 4 System will be restarted continue lt y n gt
118. max response time 10 sec Router port expire time 300 sec Immediate Leave Processing Enabled on VLAN ty IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console 33 5 33 Multicast Filtering Commands show mac address table multicast This command shows known multicast addresses Syntax show mac address table multicast vlan vian id user igmp snooping e vian id VLAN ID 1 to 4093 e user Display only the user configured multicast entries igmp snooping Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Member types displayed include IGMP or USER depending on selected options Example The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for VLAN 1 Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 igmp snooping VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type al 224 1 2 3 Eth1 11 IGMP Console IGMP Query Commands This section describes commands used to configure Layer 2 IGMP query on the switch Table 33 3 IGMP Query Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 33 7 ip igmp snooping Configures the query count GC 33 7 query count ip igmp snooping Configures the query interval GC 33 8 query interval ip igmp snooping Configures the report delay GC 33 8 query max response time ip igmp snooping Configures the query timeo
119. mrouter xvi 31 4 31 4 31 5 31 6 31 6 31 7 31 8 31 8 31 9 31 9 31 10 31 11 31 11 31 12 31 13 31 14 32 1 32 2 32 3 32 4 32 5 32 6 32 6 32 7 32 8 32 8 32 9 33 1 33 1 33 2 33 2 33 3 33 3 33 4 33 5 33 6 33 6 33 7 33 7 33 8 33 8 33 9 33 10 33 10 show ip igmp snooping mrouter Multicast VLAN Registration Commands mvr Global Configuration mvr Interface Configuration show mvr Chapter 34 Domain Name Service Commands ip host clear host ip domain name ip domain list ip name server ip domain lookup show hosts show dns show dns cache clear dns cache Chapter 35 IP Interface Commands Basic IP Configuration ip address ip default gateway ip dhcp restart show ip interface show ip redirects show arp ping Section IV Appendices Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Management Features Standards Management Information Bases Appendix B Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Using System Logs Glossary Index Contents 33 11 33 11 33 12 33 13 33 14 34 1 34 1 34 2 34 3 34 3 34 4 34 5 34 6 34 7 34 7 34 8 35 1 35 1 35 1 35 2 35 3 35 4 35 4 35 4 35 5 A 1 A 1 A 2 A 3 B 1 B 1 xvii Contents xviii Tables Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 4 1 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 9 4 Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Table 11 3 Table 13 1 Table 13 2
120. multicast routing on the switch Table 33 4 Static Multicast Routing Commands Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping vlan Adds a multicast router port GC 33 10 mrouter show ip igmp snooping Shows multicast router ports PE 33 11 mrouter ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter This command statically configures a multicast router port Use the no form to remove the configuration Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id mrouter interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting No static multicast router ports are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your router you can manually configure that interface to join all the current multicast groups Example The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 11 Console config 33 10 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 33 show ip igmp snooping mrouter This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned multicast rout
121. name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN group The VLAN name is only used for management on this system it is not added to the VLAN tag e VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 VLAN Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters Status Web Enables or disables the specified VLAN Enable VLAN is operational Disable VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets State CLI Enables or disables the specified VLAN Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets Add Adds a new VLAN group to the current list Remove Removes a VLAN group from the current list If any port is assigned to this group as untagged it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged 12 6 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs f 2 Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static List To create a new VLAN enter the VLAN ID and VLAN name mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN and then click Add VLAN Static List Current New 1 DefaultVlan Enabled VLAN ID 1 4093 le lt lt Add VLAN Name PRD Remove Status W Enabled Figure 12 4 VLAN Static List Creating VLANs CLI This example creates a new VLAN Console config vlan database 30 6 Console config vlan vlan 2 name R amp D media ethernet state active 30 7 Console config vlan end Console show vlan 30 13 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S
122. no known IGMP Version 1 hosts exist on this LAN segment then no leave message will be forwarded to the local querier or other upstream multicast router Only when the last member requests to leave the group will the switch then flood the leave message as specified in the original mechanism for IGMP snooping e When there is a large number of hosts entering and leaving a multicast group IGMP snooping leave proxy can significantly reduce the amount of multicast messages and number of state changes that have to be processed by devices in the upstream multicast tree IGMP version 1 hosts do not respond to multicast group specific queries If a version 1 host is known by the switch to exist on a LAN segment it will not use the IGMP snooping leave proxy mechanism on that interface but will instead process any group leave requests as specified in the original mechanism for IGMP snooping Example The following shows how to enable leave proxy Console config ip igmp snooping leave proxy Console config ip igmp snooping immediate leave This command immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service if a leave packet is received at that port and immediate leave is enabled for the parent VLAN Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping immediate leave no ip igmp snooping immediate leave Default Setting Disabled 33 4 IGMP Snooping Commands 33 Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN
123. not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied Running status is true as long as MVR Status is enabled and the specified MVR VLAN exists MVR multicast vlan Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic MVR Max Multicast Groups Shows the maximum number of multicast groups which can assigned to the MVR VLAN MVR Current multicast groups Shows the number of multicast groups currently assigned to the MVR VLAN The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Port Type Console show mvr interface eth1 1 SOURCE eth1 2 RECEIVER eth1 5 RECEIVER eth1 6 RECEIVER eth1 7 RECEIVER Status Immediate Leave ACTIVE UP Disable ACTIVE UP Disable INACTIVE DOWN Disable INACTIVE DOWN Disable INACTIVE DOWN Disable Console Table 33 7 show mvr interface display description Field Description Port Shows interfaces attached to the MVR Type Shows the MVR port type Status Shows the MVR status and interface status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled 33 15 33 Multicast Filtering Commands The
124. o Packets Packets Transmit Errors ao Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors O Late Collisions 0 FCS Errors 0 Excessive Collisions 0 nanigi Internal MAC Transmit Single Collision Frames Errors 0 Multiple Collision Frames O Carrier Sense Errors o SQE Test Errors O Frames Too Long o Deferred Transmissions enal MAC Receive o trors RMON Statistics Drop Events DlJabbers 0 Received Bytes 188155 Collisions 0 Received Frames 0 64 Bytes Frames 2249 Broadcast Frames 47 65 127 Bytes Frames 459 Multicast Frames 2672 128 255 Bytes Frames 11 CRC Alignment Errors 0256 511 Bytes Frames 0 Undersize Frames 0512 1023 Bytes Frames 0 Oversize Frames 01024 1518 Bytes Frames 0 Fragments 0 Refresh 9 24 Figure 9 12 Port Statistics Showing Port Statistics 9 CLI This example shows statistics for port 12 Console show interfaces counters ethernet 1 12 24 10 Ethernet 1 12 Iftable stats Octets input 868453 Octets output 3492122 Unicast input 7315 Unitcast output 6658 Discard input 0 Discard output 0 Error input 0 Error output 0 Unknown protos input 0 QLen output 0 Extended iftable stats Multi cast input 0 Multi cast output 17027 Broadcast input 231 Broadcast output 7 Ether like stats Alignment errors 0 FCS errors 0 Single Collision frames 0 Multiple collision frames 0 SQE Test errors 0 Deferred transmissions 0 Late collisions 0
125. of the management features are briefly described below Configuration Backup and Restore You can save the current configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server and later download this file to restore the switch configuration settings Authentication This switch authenticates management access via the console port Telnet or web browser User names and passwords can be configured locally or can be verified via a remote authentication server i e RADIUS or TACACS Port based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802 1X protocol This protocol uses Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to request user credentials from the 802 1X client and then uses the EAP between the switch and the authentication server to verify the client s right to access the network via an authentication server i e RADIUS server Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the web SSH for secure management access over a Telnet equivalent connection SNMP Version 3 IP address filtering for SNMP web Telnet management access MAC address filtering and IP source guard also provide authenticated port access While DHCP snooping is provided to prevent malicious attacks from unsecure ports Description of Software Features A Access Control Lists ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol TCP UDP port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or
126. on IP or MAC addresses 8 1 Mask Configuration Controls the order in which ACL rules are checked 8 9 Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 8 13 IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 6 20 Port 9 1 Port Information Displays port connection status 9 1 Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 9 1 Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 9 3 Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 9 3 Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 9 7 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page LACP 9 8 Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 9 8 Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation group members 9 10 Port Counters Information Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 9 13 Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for the local side 9 14 Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side 9 16 Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 9 17 Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 9 17 Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 9 19 Rate Limit 9 20 Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 9
127. or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address MAC Address Physical address of a device mapped to this interface VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4094 Web Click Address Table Static Addresses Specify the interface the MAC address and VLAN then click Add Static Address Static Addresses Static Address Counts 00 E0 29 94 34 DE VLAN 1 Unit 1 Port 1 Permanent Current Static Address Table Interface Port 1 C Trunk z MAC Address DE OX XX XX XX XX XX VLAN fi Add Static Address Remove Static Address Figure 10 1 Static Addresses 16 Web Only 10 1 4A oO Address Table Settings CLI This example adds an address to the static address table but sets it to be deleted when the switch is reset Console config mac address table static 00 e0 29 94 34 de interface ethernet 1 1 vlan 1 delete on reset 28 1 Console config Displaying the Address Table The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports Command Attributes Interface Indicates a port or trunk MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093
128. other systems Admin Key The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports that belong to the same LAG Range 0 65535 Default 1 Port Priority If a link goes down LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Set Port Partner This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link i e the ports on the attached device The command attributes have the same meaning as those used for the port actor However configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner 9 10 Creating Trunk Groups 9 Web Click Port LACP Aggregation Port Set the System Priority Admin Key and Port Priority for the Port Actor You can optionally configure these settings for the Port Partner Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the partner and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with this device After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters click Apply Aggregation Port Set Port Actor Port System Priority Admin Key Port Priority 0 65535 0 65535 0 65535 B ha he Bimi aj lBb fz fhe 4 B feo he slib ho fize 6 Bp f fe zib fizo fhe s e ha fe olb M me w p f p F Figure 9 5 LACP Aggregation Port 9 11 9 Port C
129. priority name revision max hops spanning tree spanning disabled spanning tree cost spanning tree port priority spanning tree edge port spanning tree portfast xiv 24 11 25 1 25 2 25 2 25 4 25 4 25 5 25 6 25 7 26 1 26 1 26 2 27 1 27 1 27 2 27 3 28 1 28 1 28 2 28 3 28 4 28 4 29 1 29 2 29 2 29 4 29 4 29 5 29 6 29 6 29 7 29 7 29 8 29 9 29 9 29 10 29 11 29 11 29 12 29 13 29 14 29 14 Contents spanning tree link type 29 15 spanning tree mst cost 29 16 spanning tree mst port priority 29 17 spanning tree protocol migration 29 18 show spanning tree 29 18 show spanning tree mst configuration 29 20 Chapter 30 VLAN Commands 30 1 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 30 1 bridge ext gvrp 30 2 show bridge ext 30 2 switchport gvrp 30 3 show gvrp configuration 30 3 garp timer 30 4 show garp timer 30 5 Editing VLAN Groups 30 6 vlan database 30 6 vlan 30 7 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 30 8 interface vlan 30 8 switchport mode 30 9 switchport acceptable frame types 30 9 switchport ingress filtering 30 10 switchport native vlan 30 11 switchport allowed vlan 30 11 switchport forbidden vlan 30 12 Displaying VLAN Information 30 13 show vlan 30 13 Configuring Private VLANs 30 14 pvlan 30 14 show pvlan 30 15 Configuring Protocol based VLANs 30 16 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Groups 30 17 protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces 30 17 show protocol vlan protocol group 30 18 sh
130. reconfiguring ports to STP compliant mode if they detect STP protocol messages from attached devices Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s This protocol is a direct extension of RSTP It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs It simplifies network management provides for even faster convergence than RSTP by limiting the size of each region and prevents VLAN members from being segmented from the rest of the group as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802 1D STP Virtual LANs The switch supports up to 255 VLANs A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network The switch supports tagged VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically learned via GVRP or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been assigned By segmenting your network into VLANs you can e Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network Simplify network management for node changes moves by remotely configuring VLAN membership for any port rather than having to manually change the network connection e Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN e Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink port
131. remove the port Syntax no ip access group acl_name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL Ifa port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config int eth 1 2 Console config if ip access group standard david in Console config if Related Commands show ip access list 23 5 show ip access group This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access group Interface ethernet 1 2 IP standard access list david Console Related Commands ip access group 23 11 23 11 2 3 Access Control List Commands MAC ACLs The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses packet format and Ethernet type To configure MAC ACLs first create an access list containing the required permit or deny rules set a precedence mask to control the filter sequence and then bind the access list to one or more ports Table 23 3 MAC ACL Commands Command Function Mode Page access list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 23 12 pe
132. services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Example The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict Console config Related Commands queue bandwidth 31 4 show queue mode 31 2 show queue mode This command shows the current queue mode Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 31 2 Priority Commands Layer 2 3 4 Example Console sh queue mode Wrr status Enabled Console switchport priority default This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax switchport priority default default priority id no switchport priority default default priority id The priority number for untagged ingress traffic The priority is a number from 0 to 7 Seven is the highest priority Default Setting The priority is not set and the default value for untagged frames received on the interface is zero Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply t
133. set for a specific priority frames of that type are dropped until the rate falls below the limit If the rate exceeds the overall limit set the rate limit output command frames of any priority type may be dropped until the rate falls back below the limit e This switch supports Class of Service by using eight priority queues Eight separate traffic classes are defined in IEEE 802 1p The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard as shown below To maintain line rate throughput when setting rate limits for CoS priorities only four priority classes are supported by the switch and are mapped from the eight default priority classes as shown below Table 27 2 Mapping Default to Per Port CoS Priority Levels Queue 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Priority 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 default CoS Priority 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 per port CoS 27 2 show rate limit cos 2 7 Example This example sets the maximum output rate for CoS traffic of priority level 0 to 50 Mbps on Port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit cos 0 50 Console config if show rate limit cos This command displays the output rate limit for CoS priorities Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If no rate limit is set this command displays a value of 0 for the corresponding interface Example The following example shows that the rate limit set
134. start up configuration use the boot system command and then restart the switch Console config Console config boot system config startup ITG 17 Console config exit Console reload 18 4 Console Port Settings You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the switch s serial console port Management access through the console port is controlled by various parameters including a password timeouts and basic communication settings These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface Command Attributes e Login Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session Range 0 300 seconds Default 0 Exec Timeout Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected If user input is not detected within the timeout interval the current session is terminated Range 0 65535 seconds Default 0 seconds e Password Threshold Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time set by the Silent Time parameter before allowing the next logon attempt Range 0 120 Default 3 attempts Silent Time Sets the amount of time the management console is inac
135. the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch Command Attributes Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router Web Click IGMP Snooping Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Specify the interfaces attached to a multicast router indicate the VLAN which will forward all the corresponding multicast traffic and then click Add After you have finished adding interfaces to the list click Apply Static Multicast Router Port Configuration Current New Viant Unit Port Interface Port VLAN ID 1 lt lt Add f Unit ly em Port fi x Trunk z Figure 15 3 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration CLI This example configures port 1 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1 1 33 10 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 KA eN VLAN M cast Router Port Type T Eth 1 1 Sta
136. the no form to disable it Syntax no switchport gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport gvrp Console config if show gvrp configuration This command shows if GVRP is enabled Syntax show gvrp configuration interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows both global and interface specific configuration Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show gvrp configuration ethernet 1 7 Eth 1 7 GVRP configuration Disabled Console 30 3 30 VLAN Commands garp timer This command sets the values for the join leave and leaveall timers Use the no form to restore the timers default values Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join leave leaveall e join leave leaveall Which timer to set e timer_value Value of timer Ranges join 20 1000 centiseconds leave 60 3000 centiseconds leaveall 500 18000 centiseconds Default Setting e join 20 centiseconds e leave 60 centiseconds e leaveall 1000 centiseconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to regi
137. they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 20 2 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 20 7 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 20 10 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 20 11 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 20 2 2 Allow the switch to send SNMP traps i e notifications page 20 7 3 Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the snmp server host command as described in this section 4 Create a view with the required notification messages page 20 10 5 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 20 11 6 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 20 8 7 Then configure a remote user page 20 14 The switch can send SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP address depending on the SNMP version that the management station snmp server enable traps 20 supports If the snmp server host command does not specify the SNMP version the default is to send SNMP ver
138. to create a single high speed logical link that combines several lower speed physical links Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Quality of Service QoS QoS refers to the capability of a network to provide better service to selected traffic flows using features such as data prioritization queuing congestion avoidance and traffic shaping These features effectively provide preferential treatment to specific flows either by raising the priority of one flow or limiting the priority of another flow Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS compliant devices on the network Remote Monitoring RMON RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities It eliminates the polling required in standard SNMP and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions including specific error types Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10 of that required by the older IEEE 802 1D STP standard Secure Shell SSH A secure replacement for remote access functions including Telnet SSH can authenticate users with a cryptographic key and encrypt data connections between management client
139. to a specified class Command Usage To configure a Class Map follow these steps Open the Class Map page and click Add Class When the Class Configuration page opens fill in the Class Name field and click Add When the Match Class Settings page opens specify type of traffic for this class based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN and click the Add button next to the field for the selected traffic criteria You can only specify one item to match when assigning ingress traffic to a class map The class map uses the Access Control List filtering engine so you must also set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the Class Map See Configuring an IP ACL Mask on page 8 10 or Configuring a MAC ACL Mask on page 8 12 for information on configuring an appropriate ACL mask The class map is used with a policy map page 14 5 to create a service policy page 14 8 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Note that one or more class maps can be assigned to a policy map Command Attributes Class Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a class map Range 1 32 characters for the name 1 256 characters for the description Edit Rules Opens the Match Class Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this
140. to search for specific protocol port s or TCP control code s Then click Add ACL Mask IP Configuration Mask IP Ingress Table Destination Subnet Mask Source Destination Control Port Port Code Remove Bitmask Bitmask Bitmask Protocol TOS A DSCP Source Subnet Mask Mask Mask Mask Mask 192 168 1 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Any 80 Any Remove Remove Ajl Entries Source Address Type Any Source Subnet Mask Destination Address Type Any z Destination Subnet Mask J Protocol Mask I Enabled Service Type Mask le I TOS Enabled o Precedence Enabled r OSCP Enabled Source F Porn Bitmask 0 65535 f a OOO OY Destination Port Bitmask 0 65535 i Control Code Bitmask 0 63 a Figure 8 6 ACL Mask Configuration IP CLI This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip standard A2 23 2 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 23 2 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std ac1l exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in 23 6 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 23 6 Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 an
141. to the Privileged Exec level GC 21 3 32 For other methods of controlling client access see Client Security Commands on page 22 1 21 1 2 4 User Authentication Commands username This command adds named users requires authentication at login specifies or changes a user s password or specify that no password is required or specifies or changes a user s access level Use the no form to remove a user name Syntax username name access level eve nopassword password 0 7 password no username name name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters case sensitive Maximum users 16 access level evel Specifies the user level The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec nopassword No password is required for this user to log in 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password The authentication password for the user Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting e The default access level is Normal Exec e The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are Table 21 3 Default Login Settings username access level password guest 0 guest admin 15 admin Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the con
142. types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip 30 17 Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config 23 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 12 19 A 2 VLAN Configuration Mapping Protocols to VLANs Map a protocol group to a VLAN for each interface that will participate in the group Command Usage e When creating a protocol based VLAN only assign interfaces using this configuration screen If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN menus such as the VLAN Static Table page 7 or VLAN Static Membership by Port menu page 9 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner Ifthe frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier e Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e VLAN ID VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded
143. users Line Username Idle time h m s Remote IP addr 0 console admin 0 14 14 1 VTY 0 admin 0 00 00 192 168 1 19 2 SSH 1 steve 0 00 06 192 168 119 Web online users Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time h m s 1 HTTP 192 168 1 19 admin 0 00 00 Console show version This command displays hardware and software version information for the system Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions on page 4 6 for detailed information on the items displayed by this command 19 7 4 9 System Management Commands Example Console show version Unit 1 Serial Number 0000E8900000 Hardware Version ROL EPLD Version 0 01 Number of Ports 29 Agent Master Unit ID 1 Loader Version p S t a a l Boot ROM Version 1 0 0 7 Operation Code Version 1 0 1 7 Console System Mode Commands This section describes command used to configure the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ mode Table 19 4 System Mode Commands Command Function Mode Page system mode Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ mode GC 19 8 show system mode Displays the switch system mode GC 19 9 system mode This command sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode Use the no form to restore the default setting of normal operating mode Syntax system mode qing no system mode qinq Sets the
144. with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 21 5 RADIUS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page radius server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 21 6 Jradius server port Sets the RADIUSservernetwork pot Jec 21 7 Jradius serverkey Sets the RADIUS encryptonky GC 21 7 radius server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 21 8 radius server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC 21 8 show radius server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 21 8 radius server host This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication parameters that apply to each server Use the no form to restore the default values Syntax no radius server index host host_ip_address host_alias auth port auth_port timeout timeout retransmit retransmit key key index Allows you to specify up to five servers These servers are queried in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires host_ip_address P address of server host_alias Symbolic name of server Maximum length 20 characters port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 timeout Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 retransmit Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS se
145. 0 00 z Figure 6 8 802 1X Port Configuration 6 16 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 6 CLI This example sets the 802 1X parameters on port 2 For a description of the additional fields displayed in this example see show dot1x on page 21 29 Console Console Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 2 config if dot1lx port control auto config if dotlx re authentication config if dotlx max req 5 config if dotlx timeout quiet period 40 config if dotlx timeout re authperiod 5 config if dotlx timeout tx period 40 config if end Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode 1 1 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 2 enabled Single Host Auto 1 27 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 1 28 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 1 2 reauth enabled Disable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Single Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 7 Authenticator State Machine State Authenticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 6 Reauthentication State
146. 0 7 all Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0 3 SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled but no server defined SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled Chapter 2 Initial Configuration Connecting to the Switch Configuration Options The switch includes a built in network management agent The agent offers a variety of management options including SNMP RMON and a web based interface A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a command line interface CLI Note An IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To change this address see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 The switch s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters monitor port connections and display statistics using a standard web browser such as Netscape Navigator version 6 2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5 0 and higher The switch s web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the network The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS 232 serial console port on the switch or remotely by a Telnet or Secure Shell SSH connection over the network The switch s management agent also supports SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from any system in the network using network management software such as Terawave s TMS The switch s web interfa
147. 000 Mbps Web Click Port Rate Limit Input Output Port Trunk Configuration Set the Input Rate Limit Status or Output Rate Limit Status then set the rate limit for the individual interfaces and click Apply a Output Rate Limit Port Configuration Port Output Rate Limit Status Output Rate Limit Mbps Trunk 1 Enabled 60 lt C Enabled C Enabled C Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled _ Enabled OD NO mn amp win C Enabled oO LJ Enabled v Figure 9 41 Rate Limit Configuration 9 20 Showing Port Statistics 9 CLI This example sets the rate limit for input and output traffic passing through port 1 to 60 Mbps Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if rate limit input 60 27 1 Console config if rate limit output 60 Console config if Showing Port Statistics You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and Ethernet like MIBs as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON MIB Interfaces and Ethernet like statistics display errors on the traffic passing through each port This information can be used to identify potential problems with the switch such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading RMON statistics provide access to a broad range of statistics including a total count of different frame types and sizes passing through each port All values displayed have been accumulated s
148. 001 2100 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows how to set the system clock to 15 12 34 February 1st 2002 Console calendar set 15 12 34 1 February 2002 Console 19 41 4 9 System Management Commands show calendar This command displays the system clock Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show calendar 15 12 34 February 1 2002 Console 19 42 Chapter 20 SNMP Commands Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP as well as the error types sent to trap managers SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity authentication and encryption as well as controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree To use SNMPV3 first set an SNMP engine ID or accept the default specify read and write access views for the MIB tree configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy and then assign SNMP users to these groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Table 20 1 SNMP Commands Command Function Mode Page snmp server Enables the SNMP agent GC 20 2 show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE PE 20 2 snmp server community Sets u
149. 00half Console config if capabilities 100full le config if capabilities flowcontrol le config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 21 le config if media type copper forced le config if le config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if description RD SW 13 le config if shutdown 24 1 24 2 24 6 24 4 24 6 9 Port Configuration Creating Trunk Groups You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual aggregate link A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments where bottlenecks exist as well as providing a fault tolerant link between two devices You can create up to 12 trunks The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the link and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard On the other hand LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device You can configure any number of ports on the switch as LACP as long as they are not already configured as part of a static trunk If ports on another device are also configured as LACP the switch and the other device will negotiate a trunk link between them If an LACP trunk consists of more than eight ports all other ports will be placed in a standby mode Should one link in the trunk fail one of the standby ports will autom
150. 1 1 00 e0 29 94 34 de 1 Delete on reset Console 28 3 2 8 Address Table Commands mac address table aging time This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table Use the no form to restore the default aging time Syntax mac address table aging time seconds no mac address table aging time seconds Aging time Range 10 1000000 seconds 0 to disable aging Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information Example Console config mac address table aging time 100 Console config show mac address table aging time This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac address table aging time Aging time 300 sec Console 28 4 Chapter 29 Spanning Tree Commands This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm STA globally for the switch and commands that configure STA for the selected interface Table 29 1 Spanning Tree Commands protocol migration Command Function Mode Page spanning tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 29 2 spanning tree mode Configures STP RSTP or MSTP mode GC 29 2 spanning tree forward time Configures the spanning tree bridge
151. 1 11 11 11 any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console show access list mac mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs Syntax show access list mac mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list mac mask precedence MAC egress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid ethertype Console Related Commands mask MAC ACL 23 15 23 17 2 3 Access Control List Commands mac access group This command binds a port to a MAC ACL Use the no form to remove the port Syntax mac access group ac _name in acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters e in Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage A port can only be bound to one ACL e Ifa portis already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL the switch will replace the old binding with the new one e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Example Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mac access group jerry in Console config if Related Commands show mac access list 23 14 show mac access group This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs Command
152. 1 65535 Default 5 e TACACS Settings Server IP Address Address of the TACACS server Default 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 Secret Text String Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Note The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names and passwords using the CLI See username on page 21 2 Web Click Security Authentication Settings To configure local or remote authentication preferences specify the authentication sequence i e one to three methods fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS authentication if selected and click Apply Authentication Settings Authentication Local RADIUS Settings Global Sererlndex C1 C2 63 4 O5 Server Port Number 1 65535 181 Secret Text String a Number of Server Transmits 1 30 5 Timeout for a reply 1 65535 10 sec TACACS Settings Server IP Address 10 11 12 13 Server Port Number 1 565535 49 Secret Text String Figure 6 2 Authentication Server Settings CLI Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication Console config authentication login radius 21 4 Console config radius server port 181 21 7 Console config radius server key green
153. 1234567 Priority Queue 20134567 Console vlan priority This command sets a fixed priority for all frames entering the specified VLAN through a selected interface Use the no form to restore the default status Syntax vlan vian id priority cos_value no vlan vian id priority e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4094 cos_value A number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority 31 6 Priority Commands Layer 2 3 A Default Setting The original priority value in the VLAN tag of a tagged packet or a VLAN priority tag inserted by another device for an untagged packet Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command can be used to set a high priority for a VLAN carrying mostly low latency traffic such as Voice over IP VoIP or to set a low priority for a VLAN carrying normal data traffic not sensitive to latency The priority can only be fixed for up to four VLANs on this switch Each CoS priority maps to one transmit queue as shown in Table 31 3 Default CoS Priority Levels on page 31 5 Example This example sets the priority for all traffic entering VLAN 1 on port 1 to CoS 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if vlan 1 priority 7 Console config if show vlan based priority This command displays the modified CoS priority for frames entering a VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command only displays interfaces
154. 2 19 13 DSCP enabling 13 7 31 11 mapping priorities 13 10 31 11 dynamic addresses displaying 10 2 28 3 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP E edge port STA 11 12 11 15 29 14 event logging 19 28 Index 1 Index F firmware displaying version 4 6 19 7 upgrading 4 12 19 13 G GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See GVRP gateway default 4 9 35 2 GVRP global setting 12 4 30 2 interface configuration 12 10 30 3 H hardware version displaying 4 6 19 7 HTTPS 6 5 21 12 secure server 6 5 21 12 l IEEE 802 1D 11 1 29 2 IEEE 802 1s 29 2 IEEE 802 1w 11 1 29 2 IEEE 802 1X 6 13 21 24 IGMP groups displaying 15 7 33 6 Layer 2 15 2 33 1 query 15 2 33 7 query Layer 2 15 3 33 6 snooping 15 2 33 2 snooping configuring 15 3 33 1 snooping leave proxy 33 3 snooping setting immediate leave 33 4 snooping suppressing leave messages 33 3 ingress filtering 12 10 30 10 IP address BOOTP DHCP 4 10 35 1 35 3 setting 2 4 35 1 IP port priority enabling 13 11 31 8 mapping priorities 13 11 31 9 IP precedence enabling 13 7 31 9 mapping priorities 13 8 31 10 IP source guard configuring static entries 22 5 setting filter criteria 22 3 Index 2 J jumbo frame 19 10 L LACP configuration 25 1 local parameters 9 14 25 7 partner parameters 9 16 25 7 protocol message statistics 25 7 protocol parameters 9 10 25 1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol See LACP link type STA 11 12 11 15 29 15 l
155. 20 Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 9 20 Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each port 9 20 Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunk 9 20 Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 9 21 Address Table 10 1 Static Addresses Displays entries for interface address or VLAN 10 1 Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 10 2 Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 10 4 Spanning Tree 11 1 STA Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 11 3 Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STP RSTP and MSTP 11 6 Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 11 10 Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 11 10 Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 11 13 Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 11 13 MSTP VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance 11 16 Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST instance 11 19 Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance 11 19 Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 11 20 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page T
156. 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl Configuring an IP ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the IP header Command Usage e Masks that include an entry for a Layer 4 protocol source port or destination port can only be applied to packets with a header length of exactly five bytes Command Attributes e Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to match any address Host to specify a host address not a subnet or IP to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host IP Default Any e Source Destination Subnet Mask Source or destination address of rule must match this bitmask See the description for SubMask on page 3 e Protocol Mask Check the protocol field e Service Type Mask Check the rule for the specified priority type Options Precedence TOS DSCP Default TOS Source Destination Port Bit Mask Protocol port of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 65535 Control Code Bit Mask Control flags of rule must match this bitmask Range 0 63 8 10 Configuring Access Control Lists 8 Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the IP ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a specific host address or an address range Include other criteria to search for in the rules such as a protocol type or one of the service types Or use a bitmask
157. 3 13 8 13 10 17 6 17 8 17 9 17 10 18 1 19 1 19 1 19 2 19 8 19 9 19 12 19 16 19 19 19 28 19 29 19 32 19 33 19 34 19 37 20 1 20 9 20 11 xix Tables Table 20 4 Table 20 5 Table 21 1 Table 21 2 Table 21 3 Table 21 4 Table 21 5 Table 21 6 Table 21 7 Table 21 8 Table 21 9 Table 21 10 Table 21 11 Table 21 12 Table 21 13 Table 22 1 Table 22 2 Table 22 3 Table 22 4 Table 23 1 Table 23 2 Table 23 3 Table 23 4 Table 24 1 Table 24 2 Table 25 1 Table 25 2 Table 25 3 Table 25 4 Table 25 5 Table 26 1 Table 27 1 Table 27 2 Table 28 1 Table 29 1 Table 29 2 Table 29 3 Table 29 4 Table 30 1 Table 30 2 Table 30 3 Table 30 4 Table 30 5 Table 30 6 Table 30 7 XX show snmp group display description show snmp user display description Authentication Commands User Access Commands Default Login Settings Authentication Sequence Commands RADIUS Client Commands TACACS Client Commands Web Server Commands HTTPS System Support Telnet Server Commands Secure Shell Commands show ssh display description 802 1X Port Authentication Commands Management IP Filter Commands Client Security Commands Port Security Commands IP Source Guard Commands DHCP Snooping Commands Access Control List Commands IP ACL Commands MAC ACL Commands ACL Information Commands Interface Commands show interfaces switchport display description Link Aggregation Commands show lacp counters display description
158. 3 5 4A 3 Class of Service Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin WRR algorithm to determine the frequency at which it services each priority queue As described in Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues on page 3 the traffic classes are mapped to one of the eight egress queues provided for each port You can assign a weight to each of these queues and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities This weight sets the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service and subsequently affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value Command Attributes e WRR Setting Table26 Displays a list of weights for each traffic class i e queue e Weight Value Set a new weight for the selected traffic class Range 1 15 Web Click Priority Queue Scheduling Select the interface highlight a traffic class i e output queue enter a weight then click Apply Queue Scheduling Interface Port 7 C Trunk Z Select Traffic Class 0 weight1 amp Traffic Class 1 weight 2 WRR Setting Table Traffic Class 2 weight 4 Traffic Class 3 weight 6 Traffic Class 4 weight8 gt Weight Value El 1 15 Figure 13 4 Queue Scheduling 26 CLI shows Queue ID 13 6 Layer 3 4 Priority Settings 4 3 CLI The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the priority queues Console
159. 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 Current root port 1 Current root cost 200000 Number of topology changes 1 Last topology changes time sec 13380 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long Eth 1 1 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin cost 10000 External oper path cost 10000 Internal oper path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 300000 Designated port 128 1 Designated root Designated bridge Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 0 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to Spanning Tree Status enabled 32768 0O000E8AAAA00 32768 0030F1D473A0 point Note The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not connected to the network 11 5 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Global Settings Global settings apply to the entire switch Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol17 RSTP supports connections to ei
160. 4 61440 Default 32768 e VLANs in MST Instance VLANs assigned this instance e MST ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 VLAN ID VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance Range 1 4093 The other global attributes are described under Displaying Global Settings page 11 3 The attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 11 10 11 16 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP VLAN Configuration Select an instance Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 4 1 identifier from the list set the instance priority and click Apply To add the VLAN members to an MSTI instance enter the instance identifier the VLAN identifier and click Add MSTP VLAN Configuration MST Instance ID 1 7 Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 1 0030F1D47340 Bridge ID 32768 1 0030F 1D473A0 Root Port o Max Age 20 Root Path Cost o Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 1 Forward Delay fi 5 Priority 0 61440 32768 Last Topology Change 0 dO h0 min 1 s MSTP VLAN Configuration VLAN in MST Instance VLAN 1 Remove MST ID 0 4094 VLAN ID Add Figure 11 5 MSTP VLAN Configuration CLI This displays STA settings for instance 1 followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree mst 1 Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enabled dis
161. 55 255 255 0 any config ip mask acl 23 7 2 3 Access Control List Commands This shows that the entries in the mask override the precedence in which the rules are entered into the ACL In the following example packets with the source address 10 1 1 1 are dropped because the deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 rule has the higher precedence according the mask host any entry Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit 10 1 1 0 255 255 255 0 Console config std acl deny 10 1 1 1 255 255 255 255 Console config std acl exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask acl mask 255 255 255 0 any Console config ip mask acl This shows how to create a standard ACL with an ingress mask to deny access to the IP host 171 69 198 102 and permit access to any others Console config access list ip standard A2 Console config std acl permit any Console config std acl deny host 171 69 198 102 Console config std acl end Console show access list IP standard access list A2 deny host 171 69 198 102 permit any Console configure Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask host any Console config ip mask ac1 exit Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A2 in Console config if end Console show access list IP standard access list
162. 6294 1301196195566782 595664 10486957427888146206 519417467729848654686157177393901647 7935594230357 74130980227370877945452 4083971752646358058176716709574804776117 Import Client s Public Key to the Switch Use the copy tftp public key command page 19 13 to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client s granted management access to the switch Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 6 1 The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys The current firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA key 1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880 055536161631051775940838686311092912322268285192543746031009371877211996 963178136627741416898513204911 720483033925432410163799759237144901193800 60902539484084827178194372288402533115952134861022902978982721 3532671316 29432532818915045306393916643 steve 192 168 1 19 Set the Optional Parameters On the SSH Settings page configure the optional parameters including the authentication timeout the number of retries and the server key size Enable SSH Service On the SSH Settings page enable the SSH server on the switch Authentication One of the following authentication methods is employed Password Authentication for SSH v1 5 or V2 Clients a The client sends its password to the server
163. 74 dynamic 1 192 168 0 162 00 12 cf 0c 9a al other 1 Total entry 3 Console ping This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping host count counft size size e host IP address or IP alias of the host count Number of packets to send Range 1 16 default 5 size Number of bytes in a packet Range 32 512 default 32 The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified because the router adds header information Default Setting This command has no default for the host Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached The following are some results of the ping command Normal response The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds depending on network traffic Destination does not respond If the host does not respond a timeout appears in ten seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreachable Network or host unreachable The gateway found no corresponding entry in the route table e Press lt Esc gt to stop pinging 35 5 3 5 IP Interface Commands Example Console ping 10 1 0 9 Type ESC to abort PING to 10 1 0 9 by 5 32 byte payload ICMP packets timeout is 5 seconds response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms response time 10 ms respo
164. 768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted distributing collecting synchronization long timeout Oper State Table 25 4 show lacp neighbors display description distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Field Partner Admin System ID Partner Oper System ID Description LAG partner s system ID assigned by the user LAG partner s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol Partner Admin Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner Port Number Partner Oper Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port s protocol Port Number partner Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner Admin State Administrative values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table Oper State Operational values of the partner s state parameters See preceding table 25 9 2 5 Link Aggregation Commands Console show lacp sysid Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address 1 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 2 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 3 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 4 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 5 32768 00 30 F1 8F 2C A7 6 32768
165. 8 10000 9 Enabled ding 0 128 9 10000 0 D sabled Disabled Dis 10 Enabled Discarding 11 12 Configuring Interface Settings 4 1 CLI This example shows the STA attributes for port 5 Console tshow spanning tree ethernet 1 5 29 18 Eth 1 5 information Admin status enabled Role disable State discarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin cost 10000 External oper path cost 10000 Internal oper path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 10000 Designated port 128 1 Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0 0030F1D473A0 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 2 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Console Configuring Interface Settings You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces including port priority path cost link type and edge port You may use a different priority or path cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path link type to indicate a point to point connection or shared media connection and edge port to indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Command Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Di
166. A Version 1 key type Default Setting Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1 5 clients and DSA Version 2 for SSHv2 clients This command stores the host key pair in memory i e RAM Use the ip ssh save host key command to save the host key pair to flash memory Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known hosts file as part of the configuration process Otherwise you must manually create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it e The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption method with the client trying to connect to it Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console 21 20 Secure Shell Commands 21 Related Commands ip ssh crypto zeroize 21 21 ip ssh save host key 21 21 ip ssh crypto zeroize This command clears the host key from memory i e RAM Syntax ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa rsa e dsa DSA key type rsa RSA key type Default Setting Clears both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command clears the host key from volatile memory RAM Use the no ip ssh save host key command to clear the host key from flash memory The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command Example Console ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa Console Related Commands
167. ASS Switch Int Loopback Test PASS Console ES3528 WDM System Description 24 port WDM Metro Access Switch ES3528 WDM System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 3 Configuring the Switch for Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode The system can be configured to operate in normal mode or IEEE 802 1Q QinQ tunneling mode which is used for passing Layer 2 traffic across a service provider s metropolitan area network Command Attributes System Mode Sets the switch to operate in one of the following modes Normal Mode The switch functions in normal operating mode This is the default operating mode QinQ Mode Sets the switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured For an explanation of QinQ see Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling on page 12 12 Web Click System System Mode Select the required system mode and click Apply System Mode Configuration System Mode QinQ Mode Figure 4 2 System Mode CLI This example sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode Console config system mode ging 19 8 Console config exit Console show system mode 19 9 System mode is QinQ mode Console A Basic Management Tasks Configuring the Maximum Frame Size The maximum transfer unit or frame size for traffic crossing the switch should be set to minimize unnecessary fragmentation and maximize the transfer of large sequential data streams Command Usage
168. Authenticator State Machine State Reauth Count Current state including initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held force_authorized force_unauthorized Number of times connecting state is re entered 802 1X Port Authentication 21 e Backend State Machine State Current state including request response success fail timeout idle initialize Request Count Number of EAP Request packets sent to the Supplicant without receiving a response Identifier Server Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success Failure or Request packet received from the Authentication Server e Reauthentication State Machine State Current state including initialize reauthenticate 21 31 2 4 User Authentication Commands Example Console show dot1x Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode 1 1 disabled Single Host 1 2 disabled Single Host 1 47 disabled Single Host 1 48 enabled Single Host 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is enabled on port 1 1 802 1X is enabled on port 26 reauth enabled Enable reauth period 3600 quiet period 60 tx period 30 supplicant timeout 30 server timeout 10 reauth max 2 max req 2 Status Authorized Operation mode Multi Host Max count 5 Port control Auto Supplicant 00 e0 29 94 34 65 Current Identifier 3 Authenticator State Machine State Authe
169. Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Current root port 1 Current root cost 10000 Number of topology changes 12 Last topology changes time sec 303 Transmission limit 3 Path Cost Method long 11 19 4 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm Admin status enabled Role root State forwarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin path cost 10000 External oper path cost 10000 Internal oper path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 4 Designated root 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Designated bridge 32768 0 0000E8AAAA00 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 2 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages Field Attributes The following attributes are read only and cannot be changed e STA State Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 11 10 for additional information e Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets e Lear
170. C Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error 9 22 Showing Port Statistics 9 Table 9 4 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description RMON Statistics Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network This statistic can be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Received Frames The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRC Alignment Errors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize Frames The total nu
171. Command Usage If immediate leave is not used a multicast router or querier will send a group specific query message when an IGMPv2 v3 group leave message is received The router querier stops forwarding traffic for that group only if no host replies to the query within the specified timeout period Note that the timeout period is determined by the ip igmp snooping query max response time see page 33 8 If immediate leave is enabled the switch assumes that only one host is connected to the interface Therefore immediate leave should only be enabled on an interface if it is connected to only one IGMP enabled device either a service host or a neighbor running IGMP snooping This command is only effective if IGMP snooping is enabled and IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 snooping is used Example The following shows how to enable immediate leave Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip igmp snooping immediate leave Console config if show ip igmp snooping This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 15 3 for a description of the displayed items Example The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration Console show ip igmp snooping Service status Enabled Querier status Disabled Leave proxy status Enabled Query count 2 Query interval 125 sec Query
172. Commands Configuration Commands Command Line Processing Command Groups Chapter 18 General Commands enable disable configure show history reload prompt end exit quit Chapter 19 System Management Commands Device Designation Commands hostname System Status Commands show startup config show running config Contents 15 15 16 1 16 1 16 3 16 5 17 1 17 1 17 1 17 1 17 1 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 3 17 4 17 5 17 5 17 5 17 6 17 6 17 7 17 9 17 10 18 1 18 1 18 2 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 4 18 4 18 5 18 5 19 1 19 1 19 1 19 2 19 2 19 4 Contents show system 19 6 show users 19 7 show version 19 7 System Mode Commands 19 8 system mode 19 8 show system mode 19 9 System MTU Commands 19 9 jumbo frame 19 10 system mtu 19 11 show system mtu 19 11 File Management Commands 19 12 copy 19 13 delete 19 15 dir 19 16 whichboot 19 17 boot system 19 17 Line Commands 19 19 line 19 19 login 19 20 password 19 21 timeout login response 19 22 exec timeout 19 22 password thresh 19 23 silent time 19 24 databits 19 24 parity 19 25 speed 19 25 stopbits 19 26 disconnect 19 26 show line 19 27 Event Logging Commands 19 28 logging on 19 28 logging history 19 29 logging host 19 30 logging facility 19 30 logging trap 19 31 clear log 19 31 show logging 19 32 show log 19 33 SMTP Alert Commands 19 34 logging sendmail host 19 34 logging sendmail level 19 35 logging sendmail source email 19 35 logging sendmail destin
173. Console config if port monitor ethernet 1 6 Console config if end Console show port monitor Port Mirroring Destination port listen port Eth1 1 Source port monitored port Eth1 6 Mode RX TX Console 26 2 Chapter 27 Rate Limit Commands This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on an interface The maximum data rate may also be set for specific Class of Service CoS priorities for traffic transmitted out of an interface Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network Traffic that falls within the rate limit is transmitted while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks When an interface is configured with this feature the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to verify conformity Non conforming traffic is dropped conforming traffic is forwarded without any changes Table 27 1 Rate Limit Commands Command Function Mode Page rate limit Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port IC 27 1 rate limit cos Configures the maximum output rate based on CoS priorities IC 27 2 show rate limit cos Displays the output rate limit for CoS priorities PE 27 3 rate limit This command defines the rate limit for a specific interface Use this command without specifyin
174. Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree edge port Console config if Related Commands spanning tree portfast 29 14 spanning tree portfast This command sets an interface to fast forwarding Use the no form to disable fast forwarding Syntax no spanning tree portfast Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 29 14 spanning tree link type 29 Command Usage e This command is used to enable disable the fast spanning tree mode for the selected port In this mode ports skip the Discarding and Learning states and proceed straight to Forwarding Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can be passed through the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard convergence time Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for end node workstations and servers and also overcome other STA related timeout problems Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for an end node device This command is the same as spanning tree edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products Note that this command may be removed for future software versions Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if bridge group 1 portfast Console config if Related Commands
175. Excessive collisions 0 Internal mac transmit errors 0 Internal mac receive errors 0 Frame too longs 0 Carrier sense errors 0 Symbol errors 0 RMON stats Drop events 0 Octets 4422579 Packets 31552 Broadcast pkts 238 Multi cast pkts 17033 Undersize pkts 0 Oversize pkts 0 Fragments 0 Jabbers 0 CRC align errors 0 Collisions 0 Packet size lt 64 octets 25568 Packet size 65 to 127 octets 1616 Packet size 128 to 255 octets 1249 Packet size 256 to 511 octets 1449 Packet size 512 to 1023 octets 802 Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets 871 Console 9 25 9 Port Configuration 9 26 Chapter 10 Address Table Settings Switches store the addresses for all known devices This information is used to pass traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports All the addresses learned by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table You can also manually configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port Setting Static Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Command Attributes Static Address Counts The number of manually configured addresses e Current Static Address Table Lists all the static addresses Interface Port
176. Fast Ethernet ports are only affected by the System MTU setting e Gigabit Ethernet ports are only affected by the Jumbo frame size setting e The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames on Gigabit Ethernet ports of up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames for Gigabit Ethernet significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields e Frame sizes for Fast Ethernet ports can be extended up to 1546 bytes and are used primarily to allow for additional header fields not to significantly increase the per packet data size These Fast Ethernet extended fames and are more often called baby jumbo frames To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames After setting the jumbo frame size remember to implement the new setting by enabling jumbo frames as described in the next section Command Attributes e System MTU 1500 1548 Specifies the MTU size for Fast Ethernet ports Range 1500 1548 bytes Jumbo 1500 9216 Specifies the jumbo fra
177. For all bitmasks 1 means care and 0 means ignore 23 14 MACACLs lt 3 Related Commands permit deny 23 13 mac access group 23 18 access list mac mask precedence This command changes to MAC Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs out Egress mask for egress ACLs Default Setting Default system mask Filter inbound packets according to specified MAC ACLs Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule A mask can only be used by all ingress ACLs or all egress ACLs The precedence of the ACL rules applied to a packet is not determined by order of the rules but instead by the order of the masks i e the first mask that matches a rule will determine the rule that is applied to a packet Example Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask ac1 Related Commands mask MAC ACL 23 15 mac access group 23 18 mask MAC ACL This command defines a mask for MAC ACLs This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Use the no form to remove a mask Syntax no mask pktformat any host source bitmask any host destination bitmask vid vid bi
178. GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console Setting the Switch s IP Address This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access over the network The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure an address you need to change the switch s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Setting the Switch s IP Address 4 Command Attributes Management VLAN ID of the configured VLAN 1 4093 By default all ports on the stack are members of VLAN 1 However the management station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN as long as that VLAN has been assigned an IP address IP Address Mode Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual configuration Static Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or Boot Protocol BOOTP If DHCP BOOTP is enabled IP will not function until a reply has been received from the server Requests will be broadcast periodically by the switch for an IP address DHCP BOOTP values can
179. Global Setting GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Default Disabled Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN GVRP Status Enable or disable GVRP click Apply GVRP Status GYRP Enable Figure 12 1 Globally Enabling GVRP CLI This example enables GVRP for the switch Console config bridge ext gvrp 30 2 Console config Displaying Basic VLAN Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the switch Field Attributes e VLAN Version Number 1 The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in the IEEE 802 1Q standard Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch Maximum Number of Supported VLANs Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this switch Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Basic Information VLAN Basic Information VLAN Version Number 1 Maximum VLAN ID 4094 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 256 Figure 12 2 VLAN Basic Information 21 Web Only 12 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs f 2 CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 30 2
180. If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password e Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Telnet Specify the connection parameters for Telnet access then click Apply Telnet Telnet Status Enabled Telnet Port Number Bo Login Timeout 0 300 Bo secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 o secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 fe 0 Disabled Figure 4 15 Configuring the Telnet Interface CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current virtual terminal settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line vty 19 19 Console config line login local 19 20 Console config line password 0 secret 19 21 Console config line timeout login response 300 19 22 Console config line exec timeout 600 19 22 Console config line password thresh 3 19 23 Console config line end Console show line vty 19 27 vTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 2 CLI only 4 19 A Basic Management Tasks Configuring Event Logging The switch allows you to control the logging of
181. L for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports Explicit default rule permit any any in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports If no explicit rule is matched the implicit default is permit all Setting the ACL Name and Type Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL Command Attributes Name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Type There are three filtering modes Standard IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address Extended IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP address as well as protocol type and protocol port number If the TCP protocol is specified then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code MAC MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination MAC address and the Ethernet frame type RFC 1060 Configuring Access Control Lists 8 Web Click Security ACL Configuration Enter an ACL name in the Name field select the list type IP Standard IP Extended or MAC and click Add to open the configuration page for the new list ACL Configuration Type Name Remove Edit Name david Type Standard Add Figure 8 1 Selecting ACL Type CLI This example creates a standard IP ACL named bill Console config access list ip standard bill 23 2 Console config std acl Configuring a Standard ACL C
182. LAN Link Status Mark the ports that will serve as uplinks and downlinks for the private VLAN then click Apply Private VLAN Link Status Port Uplink Downlink None Trunk Member 1 C G 2 C C Ce 3 G E 4 G C C E G 6 C e 7 O G zj Figure 12 10 Private VLAN Link Status CLI This configures port 3 as an uplink and port 5 and 6 as downlinks Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 5 30 14 Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 3 down link ethernet 1 6 Console config end Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 3 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Console Configuring Protocol Based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets 12 18 Configuring Protocol Based VLANs 4 2 Command Usage To configur
183. ME 66 218 71 83 298 www yahoo akadns net 4 4 CNAME 66 218 71 81 298 www yahoo akadns net 5 4 CNAME 66 218 71 80 298 www yahoo akadns net 6 4 CNAME 66 218 71 89 298 www yahoo akadns net 7 4 CNAME 66 218 71 86 298 www yahoo akadns net 8 4 ALIAS POINTER TO 7 298 www yahoo com Console Table 34 2 show dns cache display description Field Description NO The entry number for each resource record FLAG The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable TYPE This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server DOMAIN The domain name associated with this record 34 7 34 Domain Name Service Commands clear dns cache This command clears all entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear dns cache Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE IP TTL DOMAIN Console 34 8 Chapter 35 IP Interface Commands An IP address may be used for management access to the switch over your network An IP address is obtained via DHCP by default for VLAN 1 You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the switch to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on You may also need to a
184. Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show mac access group Interface ethernet 1 5 MAC access list M5 in Console Related Commands mac access group 23 18 23 18 ACL Information 2 3 ACL Information This section describes commands used to display ACL information Table 23 4 ACL Information Commands Command Function Mode Page show access list Show all IP ACLs and associated rules PE 23 19 show access group Shows the IP ACLs assigned to each port PE 23 19 show access list This command shows all IP ACLs and associated rules Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Once the ACL is bound to an interface i e the ACL is active the order in which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask Example Console show access list IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 15 0 IP extended access list bob permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 80 permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any protocol tcp control code 2 2 MAC access list jerry permit any host 00 30 29 94 34 de ethertype 800 800 IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access group This command shows the port assignments of IP ACLs Command Mode Privileged Executive Example Console show
185. N IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network TPID 0 65535 Tag Protocol Identifier specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel port Web Click VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Set the mode for the tunnel port to Dot1q Tunnel and set the TPID if the client is using a non standard ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames then click Apply GARP Join GARP Leave CARY y a Port PVID Matt gras pee abi jaks Lear Timer Cend Mode pad AddressMonitorMade Piceo 0 1000 3000 Spo 18009 1 a ALL F Enabled Enabled 20 feo 1000 Hybond Z 33024 F Enabled 2 248 ALL Zj F Enabled 7 ko 60 1000 Dotiq Tunnel 608 F Enabled 3 eas ALL Zj F Enabled F E 20 60 1000 Hybond 3024 F Enabled 4 Ra ALL F Enabled Enabled 20 60 1000 Hybond 3024 F Enabled 5 f2 ALL Z F Enabled Enabled 20 feo 1000 Hybnd EEZ F Enabled 6 a ALL Z F Enabled 7 Enabiea 20 50 1000 Hybond 3024 Enabled zj Figure 12 8 Tunnel Port Configuration 12 16 Configuring Private VLANs 4 2 CLI This example sets port 2 to tunnel mode indicates that the TPID used for 802 1Q tagged frames will be 9100 hexadecimal and enables address monitor mode to pass traffic between the management VLANs and the tunnel port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 24 1 Console config if switchport mode dotiq tunnel 30 21 Console config if
186. NMP on the switch Web Click SNMP Agent Status Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled checkbox and click Apply SNMP Agent Status Snmp Agent Status V Enabled Figure 5 1 Enabling the SNMP Agent CLI The following example enables SNMP on the switch Console config snmp server Console config 20 2 5 2 Setting Community Access Strings 5 Setting Community Access Strings You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table For security reasons you should consider removing the default strings Command Attributes SNMP Community Capability The switch supports up to five community strings e Current Displays a list of the community strings currently configured Community String A community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Default strings public read only access private read write access Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Access Mode Specifies the access rights for the community string Read Only Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects Read Write Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Web Click SNMP Configuration Add new community strings as required select the
187. NoPriv Timeout 0 2147483647 1 100 secs Trap Inform Retry times 0 255 Enable Authentication Traps Vv Enable Link up and Link down Traps Ei Figure 5 3 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers CLI This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 private version 2c udp port 162 20 5 Console config snmp server enable traps authentication 20 7 5 6 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 5 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch follow these steps 1 If you want to change the default engine ID do so before configuring other SNMP parameters 2 Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree 3 Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model i e SNMP v1 v2c or v3 and security level i e authentication and privacy 4 Assign SNMP users to groups along with their specific authentication and privacy passwords Setting a Local Engine ID An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default eng
188. OOTP or DHCP protocol See Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 2 Set user names and passwords using an out of band serial connection Access to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the onboard configuration program See Setting Passwords on page 2 4 3 After you enter a user name and password you will have access to the system configuration program Notes 1 You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password on the third failed attempt the current connection is terminated 2 If you log into the web interface as guest Normal Exec level you can view the configuration settings or change the guest password If you log in as admin Privileged Exec level you can change the settings on any page 3 If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm then you can set the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding i e enable Admin Edge Port to improve the switch s response time to management commands issued through the web interface See Configuring Interface Settings on page 11 13 3 Configuring the Switch Navigating the Web Browser Interface To access the web browser interface you must first enter a user name and password The administrator has Read Write access to all configuration parameters and statistics The default user name and password admin is use
189. P Alerts Resetting the System SNTP Configuration Clock Time Zone Enabling the SNMP Agent Configuring SNMP Community Strings Configuring SNMP Trap Managers Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting an Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Configuring SNMPv3 Views User Accounts Authentication Server Settings HTTPS Settings SSH Host Key Settings SSH Server Settings 802 1X Global Information 802 1X Global Configuration 802 1X Port Configuration 802 1X Port Statistics IP Filter 3 2 3 3 4 3 4 4 4 6 4 8 4 10 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 15 4 15 4 17 4 19 4 21 4 22 4 23 4 24 4 25 4 26 4 27 5 2 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 10 5 12 5 15 5 17 6 2 6 6 6 10 6 12 6 14 6 15 6 16 6 19 6 21 xxiii Figures Figure 7 1 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 9 5 Figure 9 6 Figure 9 7 Figure 9 8 Figure 9 9 Figure 9 10 Figure 9 11 Figure 9 12 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 Figure 10 3 Figure 11 1 Figure 11 2 Figure 11 3 Figure 11 4 Figure 11 5 Figure 11 6 Figure 11 7 Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 Figure 12 6 Figure 12 7 Figure 12 8 Figure 12 9 Figure 12 10 Figure 12 11 Figure 12 12 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 xxiv Port Security Selecting ACL Type ACL Configuration Standard IPv4 ACL Configuration Extended I
190. P Member Port Table Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected 15 7 VLAN MVR 15 9 Configuration Globally enables MVR sets the MVR VLAN adds multicast 15 10 stream addresses Port Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 15 11 status and immediate leave status Trunk Information Displays MVR interface type MVR operational and activity 15 11 status and immediate leave status Group IP Information Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream 15 14 Port Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 15 8 Trunk Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 15 8 Group Member Configuration Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface 15 15 DNS 16 1 General Configuration Enables DNS configures domain name and domain list and 16 1 specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup Static Host Table Configures static entries for domain name to address mapping 16 3 Cache Displays cache entries discovered by designated name servers 16 5 Chapter 4 Basic Management Tasks This chapter describes the basic functions required to set up management access to the switch display or upgrade operating software or reset the system Displaying System Information You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name location and contact information Field Attributes System Name Name assigned to the switch system
191. POST Power On Self Test 2 8 Managing System Files 2 Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files However you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration files as available flash memory space allows The switch has a total of 32 Mbytes of flash memory for system files In the system flash memory one file of each type must be set as the start up file During a system boot the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start up file are run and then the start up configuration file is loaded Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the contents or usage of the file settings If you download directly to the running config the system will reboot and the settings will have to be copied from the running config to a permanent file Saving Configuration Settings Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To save all your configuration changes in nonvolatile storage you must copy the running configuration file to the start up configuration file using the copy command New startup configuration files must have a name specified File names on the switch are case sensitive can be from 1 to 31 characters must not contain slashes or and the leading letter of the file name must not be a period Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _
192. Precedence is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 13 9 4A 3 Class of Service Mapping DSCP Priority The DSCP is six bits wide allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors The DSCP replaces the ToS bits but it retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits so that non DSCP compliant ToS enabled devices will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 13 4 Mapping DSCP Priority IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 SN OD ol BB wl Mm Command Attributes DSCP Priority Table Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map Class of Service Value Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value Note that 0 represents low priority and 7 represent high priority Note IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces Web Click Priority IP DSCP Priority Select an entry from the DSCP table enter a value in the Class of Service Value field then click Apply IP DSCP Priority DSCP 2 CoS 0 DSCP Priority Table DSCP 3 CoS 0 DSCP 4 CoS 0 DSCP 5 CoS 0
193. Pv4 ACL Configuration MAC Selecting ACL Mask Types ACL Mask Configuration IP ACL Mask Configuration MAC ACL Port Binding Port Port Information Port Port Configuration Static Trunk Configuration LACP Trunk Configuration LACP Aggregation Port LACP Port Counters Information LACP Port Internal Information LACP Port Neighbors Information Port Broadcast Control Mirror Port Configuration Rate Limit Configuration Port Statistics Static Addresses Dynamic Addresses Address Aging STA Information STA Global Configuration STA Port Information STA Port Configuration MSTP VLAN Configuration MSTP Port Information MSTP Port Configuration Globally Enabling GVRP VLAN Basic Information VLAN Current Table VLAN Static List Creating VLANs VLAN Static Table Adding Static Members VLAN Static Membership by Port VLAN Port Configuration Tunnel Port Configuration Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Link Status Protocol VLAN Configuration Protocol VLAN Port Configuration Default Port Priority Traffic Classes 7 3 8 3 8 6 8 8 8 9 8 11 8 12 8 14 9 1 9 5 9 9 9 11 9 13 9 15 9 16 9 18 9 19 9 20 9 24 10 1 10 3 10 4 11 4 11 9 11 12 11 15 11 17 11 19 11 21 12 4 12 4 12 5 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 11 12 16 12 17 12 18 12 19 12 20 13 2 13 4 Figure 13 3 Figure 13 4 Figure 13 5 Figure 13 6 Figure 13 7 Figure 13 8 Figure 13 9 Figure 14 1 Figure 14 2 Figure 14 3 Figure 15 1 Fi
194. Router on page 15 6 Using this method the router port is never timed out and will continue to function until explicitly removed The other method relies on the switch to dynamically create multicast routing ports whenever multicast routing protocol packets or IGMP query packets are detected on a port 3 A maximum of up to 255 multicast entries can be maintained for IGMP snooping and 255 entries for Multicast Routing when both of these features are enabled If the table s capacity is exceeded then IGMPv3 snooping will not support multicast source filtering but will forward multicast traffic from all relevant sources to the requesting hosts Static IGMP Router Interface If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier you can manually designate a known IGMP querier i e a multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface on your switch page 15 6 This interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces within the switch 15 2 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 4 5 Static IGMP Host Interface For multicast applications that you need to control more carefully you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on the switch page 15 8 Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently Based on the IGMP
195. S value Range 0 7 new dscp New Differentiated Service Code Point DSCP value Range 0 63 new precedence New IP Precedence value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c police This command defines an policer for classified traffic Use the no form to remove a policer Syntax no police rate kbps burst byte exceed action drop set e rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Range 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower e burst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 1522 bytes drop Drop packet when specified rate or burst are exceeded set Set DSCP service to the specified value Range 0 63 Default Setting Drop out of profile packets Command Mode Policy Map Class Configuration 32 6 service policy 3 2 Command Usage You can configure up to 63 poli
196. SNMP 5 1 Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 5 3 Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP 5 2 3 4 Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page SNMPv3 5 7 Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID 5 7 Remote Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID on a remote device 5 8 Users Configures SNMP v3 users 5 9 Remote Users Configures SNMP v3 users on a remote device 5 11 Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 5 13 Views Configures SNMP v3 views 5 16 Security 6 1 User Accounts Configures user names passwords and access levels 6 1 Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence RADIUS and TACACS 6 2 HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 6 5 SSH 6 7 Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 6 11 Host Key Settings Generates the host key pair public and private 6 9 Port Security Configures per port security including status response for 7 1 security breach and maximum allowed MAC addresses 802 1X Port authentication 6 13 Information Displays global configuration settings 6 14 Configuration Configures global configuration parameters 6 15 Port Configuration Sets the authentication mode for individual ports 6 15 Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 6 18 ACL 8 1 Configuration Configures packet filtering based
197. Setting No VLANs are included in the forbidden list Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 30 12 Displaying VLAN Information 30 Command Usage This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the specified interface via GVRP e Ifa VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface then you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface Example The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 3 Console config if Displaying VLAN Information This section describes commands used to display VLAN information Table 30 5 Commands for Displaying VLAN Information Command Function Mode Page show vlan Shows VLAN information NE PE 30 13 show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE PE 24 9 show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status ofan NE PE 24 11 interface show vlan This command shows VLAN information Syntax show vlan id vian id name vian name e id Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID vian id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters Default Setting Shows all VLANs Command M
198. Setting The default value is no silent time Command Mode Line Configuration console only Example To set the silent time to 60 seconds enter this command Console config line silent time 60 Console config line Related Commands password thresh 19 23 databits This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port Use the no form to restore the default value Syntax databits 7 8 no databits 7 Seven data bits per character 8 Eight data bits per character Default Setting 8 data bits per character Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from devices that generate 7 data bits with parity If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character 19 24 Line Commands 4 9 Example To specify 7 data bits enter this command Console config line databits 7 Console config line Related Commands parity 19 25 parity This command defines the generation of a parity bit Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax parity none even odd no parity none No parity even Even parity odd Odd parity Default Setting No parity Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems often re
199. Table 13 3 Table 13 4 Table 17 1 Table 17 2 Table 17 3 Table 17 4 Table 18 1 Table 19 1 Table 19 2 Table 19 3 Table 19 4 Table 19 5 Table 19 6 Table 19 7 Table 19 8 Table 19 9 Table 19 10 Table 19 11 Table 19 12 Table 19 13 Table 19 14 Table 20 1 Table 20 2 Table 20 3 Key Features System Defaults Web Page Configuration Buttons Switch Main Menu Logging Levels SNMPVv3 Security Models and Levels Supported Notification Messages HTTPS System Support 802 1X Statistics LACP Port Counters LACP Internal Configuration Information LACP Neighbor Configuration Information Port Statistics Recommended STA Path Cost Range Recommended STA Path Costs Default STA Path Costs Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues CoS Priority Levels Mapping IP Precedence Mapping DSCP Priority General Command Modes Configuration Command Modes Keystroke Commands Command Group Index General Commands System Management Commands Device Designation Commands System Status Commands System Mode Commands Frame Size Commands Flash File Commands File Directory Information Line Commands Event Logging Commands Logging Levels show logging flash ram display description show logging trap display description SMTP Alert Commands Time Commands SNMP Commands show snmp engine id display description show snmp view display description 1 1 1 6 3 3 3 4 4 20 5 2 5 13 6 6 6 18 9 13 9 14 9 16 9 21 11 14 11 14 11 14 13 3 13
200. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent 9 21 9 Port Configuration Table 9 4 Port Statistics Continued Parameter Description Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors Etherlike Statistics Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a
201. UTC e Direction Configures the time zone to be before east or after west UTC Web Select SNTP Clock Time Zone Set the offset for your time zone relative to the UTC and click Apply Clock Time Zone Note The maximum value is 13 00 Current Time Jan 1 00 20 15 2001 Name Dhaka Hours 0 13 16 Minutes 0 59 0 Direction C Before UTC After UTC Figure 4 22 Clock Time Zone CLI This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock Console config clock timezone Dhaka hours 6 minute 0 after UTC 19 40 Console 4 27 A Basic Management Tasks 4 28 Chapter 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a network Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches routers and host computers SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper operation in a network environment as well as to monitor them to evaluate performance or detect potential problems Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software which runs locally on the device and is referred to as an agent A defined set of variables known as managed objects is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device These objects are defined in a Management Information Base MIB that provides a standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent SNMP defines both the format of the
202. VLAN tagging ARP RFC 826 DHCP Client RFC 2131 HTTPS ICMP RFC 792 IGMP RFC 1112 IGMPv2 RFC 2236 A 2 Management Information Bases A IPv4 IGMP RFC 3228 RADIUS RFC 2618 RMON RFC 2819 groups 1 2 3 9 SNMP RFC 1157 SNMPv2c RFC 2571 SNMPv3 RFC DRAFT 3414 3410 2273 3411 3415 SNTP RFC 2030 SSH Version 2 0 TELNET RFC 854 855 856 TFTP RFC 1350 Management Information Bases Bridge MIB RFC 1493 DNS Resolver MIB RFC 1612 Differentiated Services MIB RFC 3289 Entity MIB RFC 2737 Ether like MIB RFC 2665 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extensible SNMP Agents MIB RFC 2742 Forwarding Table MIB RFC 2096 IGMP MIB RFC 2933 Interface Group MIB RFC 2233 Interfaces Evolution MIB RFC 2863 IP MIB RFC 2011 IP Multicasting related MIBs MAU MIB RFC 3636 MIB II RFC 1213 Port Access Entity MIB IEEE 802 1X Port Access Entity Equipment MIB Private MIB QnQ Tunneling IEEE 802 1ad Provider Bridges Quality of Service MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIB RFC 2621 RMON MIB RFC 2819 RMON II Probe Configuration Group RFC 2021 partial implementation SNMPv2 IP MIB RFC 2011 SNMP Framework MIB RFC 3411 SNMP MPD MIB RFC 3412 SNMP Target MIB SNMP Notification MIB RFC 3413 SNMP User Based SM MIB RFC 3414 SNMP View Based ACM MIB RFC 3415 SNMP Community MIB RFC 3584 TACACS Authentication Client MIB TCP MIB RFC 2012 Trap RFC 1215 A Softw
203. VR Down Inactive Disabled v Figure 15 7 MVR Port Information CLI This example shows information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr interface 33 14 Port Type Status Immediate Leave eth1 1 SOURCE ACTIVE UP Disable eth1 2 RECEIVER ACTIVE UP Disable Console 27 Port Information only 15 11 4 5 Multicast Filtering Configuring MVR Interface Status Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR source port or receiver port If only one subscriber attached to an interface is receiving multicast services you can enable the immediate leave function Command Usage One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk Receiver ports can belong to different VLANs but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN IGMP snooping can be used to allow a source port or receiver port to dynamically join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN using the standard rules for multicast filtering Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a source port or receiver port see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 15 15 Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports When enabled the receiver port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a
204. You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch All untagged packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority and then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port Command Usage e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It uses Weighted Round Robin to prevent head of queue blockage The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept all frame types i e receives both untagged and tagged frames This priority does not apply to IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used Ifthe output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Command Attributes Default Priority24 The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on the specified interface Range 0 7 Default 0 Number of Egress Traffic Classes The number of queue buffers provided for each port 24 CLI displays this information as Priority for untagged traffic 13 1 A 3 Class of Service Web Click Priority Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority Modify the default priority for any interface then click Apply Default Port Priority Port Default Priority 0 7 Number of Egress Traffic Classes Trunk 8
205. abled Instance VLANs configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time sec Transmission limit Path Cost Method MSTP enabled 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 7 10000 2 285 3 long 29 18 11 17 4 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm Admin status enabled Role master State forwarding External admin path cost 10000 Internal admin path cost 10000 External oper path cost 10000 Internal oper path cost 10000 Priority 128 Designated cost 0 Designated port 128 1 Designated root 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Designated bridge 32768 1 0030F1D473A0 Fast forwarding disabled Forward transitions 1 Admin edge port disabled Oper edge port disabled Admin Link type auto Oper Link type point to point Spanning Tree Status enabled CLI This example sets the priority for MSTI 1 and adds VLANs 1 5 to this MSTI Console config spanning tree mst configuration 29 7 Console config mst mst 1 priority 4096 29 9 Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 1 5 29 8 Console config mst 11 18 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 4 1 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pag
206. access group Interface ethernet 1 2 IP standard access list david MAC access list jerry Console 23 19 2 3 Access Control List Commands 23 20 Chapter 24 Interface Commands These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an Ethernet port aggregated link or VLAN switchport interface Table 24 1 Interface Commands Command Function Mode Page interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC 24 1 mode description Adds a description to an interface configuration Cc 24 2 speed duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC 24 2 when autonegotiation is disabled negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface 0 24 3 capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in Cc 24 4 autonegotiation flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface Cc 24 5 media type Force port type selected for combination ports Cc 24 6 shutdown Disables an interface IC 24 6 switchport packet rate Configures broadcast and multicast storm control thresholds Cc 24 7 switchport block Prevents flooding of unknown unicast or multicast packets Cc 24 8 clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 24 8 show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE PE 24 9 show interfaces Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE PE 24 10 counters show interfaces D
207. ache that have been learned via the designated name servers Field Attributes No The entry number for each resource record Flag The flag is always 4 indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable Type This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the owner and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry IP The IP address associated with this record TTL The time to live reported by the name server Domain The domain name associated with this record Web Select DNS Cache No Flag Type IP TTL Domain Oo f4 CNAME 207 46 134 222 i51 www microsoft akadns net 1 i CNAME 207 468 134 190 51 www microsoft akadns net 2 4 CNAME 207 46 134 155 51 www microsoft akadns net 3 4 CNAME 207 46 249 222 51 www microsoft akadns net 4 a CNAME 207 46 249 27 51 lwww microsoft akadns net 5 4 J AUAS POINTER TO 4 51 www microsoft com 6 4 CNAME 207 46 68 27 71964 msn com tw 7 i ALIAS POINTER TO 6 P1964 www msn com tw 8 f4 CNAME 65 54 131 192 605 passportimages com 9 f ALIAS POINTER TO 8 605 www passportimages com 10 4 CNAME 165 193 72 190 87 global msads net xl Figure 16 3 DNS Cache 16 5 4A 6 Domain Name Service CLI This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated name servers Console show dns cache
208. ad access to the entire MIB tree and a default view for the private community string that provides read write access to the entire MIB tree However you may assign new views to version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements see page 5 16 Community Strings for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and 2c stations as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from the switch You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users and set the access level Basic Configuration 2 The default strings are e public with read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e private with read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients it is recommended that you change the default community strings To configure a community string complete the following steps 1 From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt type snmp server community string mode where string is the community access string and mode is rw read write or ro read only Press lt Enter gt Note that the default mode is read only 2 Toremove an existing string simply type no snmp server community string where string
209. admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Note that when the LAG is no longer used the port channel admin key is reset to 0 Example Console config interface port channel 1 Console config if lacp admin key 3 Console config if lacp port priority This command configures LACP port priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner port priority priority no lacp actor partner port priority actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority LACP port priority is used to select a backup link Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority e If an active port link goes down the backup port with the highest priority is selected to replace the downed link However if two or more ports have the same LACP port priority the port with the lowest physical port number will be selected as the backup port Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative stat
210. age Enter the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Remove Policy Deletes a specified policy Policy Configuration Policy Name Name of policy map Range 1 32 characters Description A brief description of a policy map Range 1 256 characters Add Adds the specified policy Back Returns to previous page with making any changes 14 5 A 4 Quality of Service Policy Rule Settings Class Settings Class Name Name of class map Action Shows the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on page 14 2 Meter The maximum throughput and burst rate Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Burst byte Burst in bytes Exceed Action Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced Remove Class Deletes a class Policy Options Class Name Name of class map Action Configures the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified in Match Class Settings on page 14 2 Range CoS 0 7 DSCP 0 63 IP Precedence 0 7 IPv6 DSCP 0 63 Meter Check this to define the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation Rate kbps Rate in kilobits per second Rang
211. al 12345 Console config snmp server engineID remote 54321 192 168 1 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server host 20 5 show snmp engine id This command shows the SNMP engine ID Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the default engine ID Console show snmp engine id Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 11 19 Console Table 20 2 show snmp engine id display description Field Description Local SNMP enginelD String identifying the engine ID Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has re initialized since the snmp EnginelD was last configured Remote SNMP enginelD String identifying an engine ID on a remote device IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine 20 9 2 Oo SNMP Commands snmp server view This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB Use the no form to remove an SNMP view Syntax snmp server view view name oid tree included excluded no snmp server view view name view name Name of an SNMP view Range 1 64 characters oid tree Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string Refer to the examples included Defines an included view excluded Def
212. al Spanning Tree MSTI 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 58 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 29 9 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree Example Console config mstp mst 1 vlan 2 5 Console config mstp 29 8 mst priority 2 9 mst priority This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance Use the no form to restore the default Syntax mst instance_id priority priority no mst instance_id priority instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 e priority Priority of the a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the specified instance The device with the highest priority i e lowest numerical value becomes the MSTI root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then b
213. all entries in the binding table Use the sip mac option to check these same parameters plus the source MAC address Use the no source guard command to disable this function on the selected port When enabled traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table Table entries include a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Static IP SG Binding Dynamic DHCP Binding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip source guard binding command page 22 5 are automatically configured with an infinite lease time Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping are configured by the DHCP server itself static entries include a manually configured lease time If the IP source guard is enabled an inbound packet s IP address sip option or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address sip mac option will be checked against the binding table If no matching entry is found the packet will be dropped Filtering rules are implemented as follows If the DHCP snooping is disabled see page 22 7 IP source guard will check the VLAN ID source IP address port number and source MAC address for the sip mac option If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type is static IP source guard
214. allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages at or above a specified level Command Attributes e Remote Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the remote logging process Default Disabled e Logging Facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23 The facility type is used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to process messages such as sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database Range 16 23 Default 23 Logging Trap Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server Range 0 7 Default 7 Host IP List Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that will receive syslog messages The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Host IP Address Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List 4 21 A Basic Management Tasks Web
215. ambiguity In the logging history example typing log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to logging Getting Help on Commands You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help command You can also display command syntax by using the character to list keywords or parameters 17 3 4A T Overview of Command Line Interface Showing Commands If you enter a at the command prompt the system will display the first level of keywords for the current command class Normal Exec or Privileged Exec or configuration class Global ACL Interface Line or VLAN Database or MSTP You can also display a list of valid keywords for a specific command For example the command show displays a list of possible show commands Console show access group access list arp bridge ext calendar class map dns dot1lq tunnel dot1x garp gvrp history hosts interfaces ip lacp line log logging mac mac address table management map mvr policy map port protocol vlan public key pvlan queue radius server rate limit running config snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system tacacs server users version vlan Console show Access groups Access lists Information of ARP cache Bridge extend information Date information Display class maps DNS information 802 1Q tunnel ports information Show 802 1x content GARP property Show GARP info
216. ame Type Sets the interface to accept all frame types including tagged or untagged frames or only tagged frames When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Option All Tagged Default All Ingress Filtering Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which the ingress port is not a member Default Disabled Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be flooded to all other ports except for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member these frames will be discarded Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames such as GVRP or STP However they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames such as GMRP GVRP Status Enables disables GVRP for the interface GVRP must be globally enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect See Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 4 7 When disabled any GVRP packets received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be propagated from other ports Default Disabled GARP Join Timer22 The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 1000 centiseconds Default 20
217. an only assign one policy map to an interface e You must first define a class map then define a policy map and finally use the service policy command to bind the policy map to the required interface Example This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if service policy input rd_policy Console config if 32 7 3 2 Quality of Service Commands show class map This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for classifying traffic Syntax show class map class map name class map name Name of the class map Range 1 32 characters Default Setting Displays all class maps Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show class map Class Map match any rd_class 1 Match ip dscp 3 Class Map match any rd_class 2 Match ip precedence 5 Class Map match any rd_class 3 Match vlan 1 Console show policy map This command displays the QoS policy maps which define classification criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations Syntax show policy map policy map name class class map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 32 characters class map name Name of the class map Range 1 32 characters Default Setting Displays all policy maps and all classes Command Mode Privileged Exec 32 8 show policy map interface 32 E
218. anagement Commands jumbo frame This command enables support for extended frame sizes on Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports Use the no form to disable it Syntax no jumbo frame Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames on Gigabit Ethernet ports of up to 9216 bytes Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames for local Gigabit Ethernet connections significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields Frame sizes for Fast Ethernet ports can be extended up to 1546 bytes and are used primarily to allow for additional header fields not to significantly increase the per packet data size These Fast Ethernet extended fames and are more often called baby jumbo frames To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size And for half duplex connections all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo frames After setting the jumbo frame size with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo command page 19 11 remember to use the jumbo frame command to implement the new s
219. and Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see Displaying Connection Status on page 9 1 24 9 24 Interface Commands Example Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 Information of Eth 1 5 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A5 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled LACP Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Media type None Current status Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Console show interfaces status vlan 1 Information of VLAN 1 MAC address Console 00 00 AB CD 00 00 1000full show interfaces counters This command displays interface statistics Syntax show interfaces counters interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows the counters for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage If no interface is specified information on all interfaces is displayed For a description of the items displayed by this command see
220. ands Command Group Function Page Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 30 14 Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802 1X 21 24 Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 22 1 IP Source Guard Filters IP traffic on unsecure ports for which the source address 22 3 cannot be identified via DHCP snooping nor static source bindings DHCP Snooping Filters untrusted DHCP messages on unsecure ports by building 22 7 and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table The priority of execution for these filtering commands is Port Security IP Source Guard and then DHCP Snooping Port Security Commands These commands can be used to enable port security on a port When using port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be authorized to access the network The port will drop any incoming frames with a source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message Table 22 2 Port Security Commands Command Functio
221. ansmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Id The number of EAP Req Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator Tx EAP Req Oth The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator 6 18 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 6 Web Select Security 802 1X Statistics Select the required port and then click Query Click Refresh to update the statistics 802 1X Statistics Pail Query Rx EXPOL Start O Rx EAP LenError 0 Rx EAPOL Logoff O Rx Last EAPOLVer 0 Rx EAPOL Invalid O Rx Last EAPOLSre 00 00 00 00 00 00 Rx EAPOL Total OTxEAPOLTotal 1 Rx EAP Respild O Tx EAP Reg id 0 Rx EAP Resp Oth O Tx EAP Reg Oth 0 Refresh Figure 6 9 802 1X Port Statistics CLI This example displays the dot1x statistics for port 4 Console show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1 4 21 29 Eth 1 4 Rx EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp Id Resp Oth LenError 2 0 0 1007 672 0 0 Last Last EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc 1 00 00 E8 98 73 21 Tx EAPOL EAP EAP Total Req Id Reg Oth 2017 1005 0 Console 6 19 6 User Authentication Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed management access to the switch through the web interface SNMP or Telnet Command Usage The management interface
222. are Specifications UDP MIB RFC 2013 A 4 Appendix B Troubleshooting Problems Accessing the Management Interface Table B 1 Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Cannot connect using Telnet web browser or SNMP software Action Be sure the switch is powered up Check network cabling between the management station and the switch Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the port you are using has not been disabled Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the management station is connected with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as the switch s IP interface to which it is connected e If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged VLAN group your management station and the ports connecting intermediate switches in the network must be configured with the appropriate tag e Ifyou cannot connect using Telnet you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Cannot connect using Secure Shell e If you cannot connect using SSH you may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet SSH sessions permitted Try connecting again at a later time Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured on the switch and that the SSH client software is
223. assword Console config username bob access level 15 21 2 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on specified user E 7 E names and passwords You can Web console manually configure access rights Telnet on the switch or you can use a eA remote access authentication 1 Client attempts management access 2 Switch contacts authentication server server based on RADIUS or RADIUS ome 3 Authentication server challenges client 4 Client responds with proper password or key TACACS protocols TACACS 5 Authentication server approves access SEI 6 Switch grants management access Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS and Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS are logon authentication protocols that use software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware or TACACS aware devices on 6 2 Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 6 the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user that requires management access to the switch RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encr
224. ata 26 1 passing through or the performance of the monitored port Rate Limit Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 27 1 Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses displays 28 1 current entries clears the table or sets the aging time Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 29 1 VLANs Configures VLAN settings and defines port membership for VLAN 30 1 groups also enables or configures private VLANs protocol VLANs and QinQ tunneling Class of Service Sets port priority for untagged frames selects strict priority or weighted 31 1 round robin relative weight for each priority queue also sets priority for TCP UDP traffic types IP precedence and DSCP Quality of Service Configures Differentiated Services 32 1 Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering query parameters and specifies 33 1 ports attached to a multicast router Domain Name Service Configures DNS services 34 1 IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 35 1 Command Groups 4 7 The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations ACL Access Control List Configuration LC Line Configuration CM Class Map Configuration MST Multiple Spanning Tree NE Normal Exec PE Privileged Exec GC Global Configuration PM Policy Map Configuration IC Interface Configuration vc VLAN Database Configuration 17 11 4A T Overview o
225. atically be activated to replace it Command Usage Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk the other ports provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails However before making any physical connections between devices use the web interface or CLI to specify the trunk on the devices at both ends When using a port trunk take note of the following points e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop e You can create up to 12 trunks with up to eight ports per trunk The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports e When configuring static trunks on switches of different types they must be compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed duplex mode and flow control VLAN assignments and CoS settings Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together including ports of different media types All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk Creating Trunk Groups 9 Statically Configuring a Trunk Command Usage When configuring static trunks you may not be able to link switches of different types depending
226. ation Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State e Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is cons
227. ation email 19 36 logging sendmail 19 36 Contents show logging sendmail 19 37 Time Commands 19 37 sntp client 19 38 sntp server 19 39 sntp poll 19 39 show sntp 19 40 clock timezone 19 40 calendar set 19 41 show calendar 19 42 Chapter 20 SNMP Commands 20 1 snmp server 20 2 show snmp 20 2 snmp server community 20 3 snmp server contact 20 4 snmp server location 20 4 snmp server host 20 5 snmp server enable traps 20 7 snmp server engine id 20 8 show snmp engine id 20 9 snmp server view 20 10 show snmp view 20 11 snmp server group 20 11 show snmp group 20 12 snmp server user 20 14 show snmp user 20 15 Chapter 21 User Authentication Commands 21 1 User Account Commands 21 1 username 21 2 enable password 21 3 Authentication Sequence 21 4 authentication login 21 4 authentication enable 21 5 RADIUS Client 21 6 radius server host 21 6 radius server port 21 7 radius server key 21 7 radius server retransmit 21 8 radius server timeout 21 8 show radius server 21 8 TACACS Client 21 9 tacacs server host 21 9 tacacs server port 21 10 tacacs server key 21 10 show tacacs server 21 11 xi Contents Web Server Commands ip http port ip http server ip http secure server ip http secure port Telnet Server Commands ip telnet server Secure Shell Commands ip ssh server ip ssh timeout ip ssh authentication retries ip ssh server key size delete public key ip ssh crypto host key generate ip ssh crypto zeroize ip ssh save host key
228. atistics port 9 21 24 10 STP 11 6 29 2 Index 3 Index STP Also see STA switch settings saving or restoring 19 12 switchport dot1q ethertype 30 22 switchport mode dotiq tunnel 30 21 system clock setting 4 26 19 37 system mode normal or QinQ 4 3 19 8 system mtu 4 4 19 11 system software downloading from server 4 12 19 13 T TACACS logon authentication 6 2 21 9 time setting 4 26 19 37 TPID 12 11 12 16 30 22 traffic class weights 13 6 31 4 trap manager 2 7 5 4 20 5 troubleshooting B 1 trunk configuration 9 6 25 1 LACP 9 8 25 1 25 2 static 9 7 25 2 U unknown multicast packets blocking 24 8 unknown unicast packets blocking 24 8 Index 4 upgrading software 4 12 19 13 user account 6 1 user password 6 1 21 2 21 3 vV VLANs 12 1 12 18 30 1 30 15 802 1Q tunnel mode 12 16 adding static members 12 7 12 9 30 11 creating 12 6 30 7 description 12 1 displaying basic information 12 4 30 2 displaying port members 12 5 30 13 egress mode 12 11 30 9 interface configuration 12 10 30 9 30 12 private 12 17 30 14 protocol 12 18 30 16 Ww Web interface access requirements 3 1 configuration buttons 3 3 home page 3 2 menu list 3 4 panel display 3 3 ES3528 ES3528 WDM E122006 ST RO1 149100033100A
229. ault domain name When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch and a domain name list has been specified the switch will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match When more than one name server is specified the servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response Ifall name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled This is done by disabling the domain lookup status Command Attributes Domain Lookup Status Enables DNS host name to address translation Default Domain Name29 Defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names Range 1 63 alphanumeric characters Domain Name List Defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names Range 1 63 alphanumeric characters 1 5 names Name Server List Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Range 1 6 IP addresses 29 Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name 16 1 A 6 Domain Name Service Web Select DNS General Configuration Set the default domain name or list of domain names specify one or more name servers to use to use for address resolution enable domain lookup status and click Apply
230. be bound to up to four ACLs of the same type Command Usage Up to seven entries can be assigned to an ACL mask e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules are entered First create the required ACLs and the ingress or egress masks before mapping an ACL to an interface e You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule Specifying the Mask Type Use the ACL Mask Configuration page to edit the mask for the Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL Web Click Security ACL Mask Configuration Click Edit for one of the basic mask types to open the configuration page ACL Mask Configuration Mask Type Mask Action Edit lP Ingress _Eait Ip Egress Edit IMac ingress Eai MAC Egress Eai Figure 8 5 Selecting ACL Mask Types 8 Access Control Lists CLI This example creates an IP ingress mask and then adds two rules Each rule is checked in order of precedence to look for a match in the ACL entries The first entry matching a mask is applied to the inbound packet Console config access list ip mask precedence in 23 6 Console config ip mask acl mask host any 23 6 Console config ip mask acl mask
231. below Notification the switchThermalActionFalling Threshold swModulelnsertion 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 60 This trap is sent when a module is inserted Notificaiton swModuleRemoval 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 2 1 0 61 This trap is sent when a module is removed Notificaiton These are legacy notifica SNMP Configuration menu page 5 6 The MIB OID for ES3528 is 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 and for ES3528 WDM is 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 3 ions and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Groups Click New to configure a new group In the New Group page define a name assign a security model and level and then select read write and notify views Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list To delete a group check the box next to the group name then click Delete SNMPv3 Groups Delete noAuthNoPriv defaultview none noAuthNoPriv defaultview none Name Model Level Read View Write View Notify View none none T public y E public Elpa vi E private v2c no E secure users V3 aut Group Name AuthNoPriv defaultview defaultview none Group Properties m Security Model Vi g Security Level noAuthNoPriv z SNMPv3 Views i ce Read View O defaultview x O Write View defaultview gt ae Notify View
232. ble Address Aging Specify the new aging time click Apply Address Aging Aging Status M Enabled Aging Time 10 1000000 Jaoo seconds Figure 10 3 Address Aging CLI This example sets the aging time to 400 seconds Console config mac address table aging time 400 28 4 Console config 10 4 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Algorithm The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w e MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incur
233. ble 21 11 show ssh display description Continued Field Description Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server Options for SSHv1 5 include DES 3DES Options for SSHv2 0 can include different algorithms for the client to server ctos and server to client stoc aes128 cbc hmac sha1 aes192 cbc hmac sha1 aes256 cbc hmac sha1 3des cbc hmac sha 1 blowfish cbc hmac sha1 aes128 cbc hmac md5 aes192 cbc hmac md5 aes256 cbc hmac md5 3des cbc hmac md5 blowfish cbc hmac md5 Terminology DES Data Encryption Standard 56 bit key 3DES Triple DES Uses three iterations of DES 112 bit key aes Advanced Encryption Standard 160 or 224 bit key blowfish Blowfish 32 448 bit key cbc cypher block chaining sha1 Secure Hash Algorithm 1 160 bit hashes md5 Message Digest algorithm number 5 128 bit hashes show public key This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host Syntax show public key user username host username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters Default Setting Shows all public keys Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage If no parameters are entered all keys are displayed If the user keyword is entered but no user name is specified then the public keys for all users are displayed When an RSA key is displayed the first field indicates the size of the h
234. bled All frames 1 0 Disabled 1 u 24 1 24 7 24 11 Configuring Port Mirroring 9 Configuring Port Mirroring You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the Hopes este target port and study the traffic crossing the Source Single source port in a completely unobtrusive manner port s target port Command Usage e Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed otherwise traffic may be dropped from the monitor port All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port When mirroring port traffic the target port must be included in the same VLAN as the source port when using MSTP see Spanning Tree Algorithm on page 11 1 Command Attributes Mirror Sessions Displays a list of current mirror sessions Source Port The port whose traffic will be monitored Range 1 28 Type Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port Rx receive Tx transmit or Both Default Rx Target Port The port that will mirror the traffic from the source port Range 1 28 Web Click Port Mirror Port Configuration Specify the source port the traffic type to be mirrored and the monitor port then click Add Mirror Port Configuration Mirror Sessions New Source 1 1 Both Destination 1 2 Source Port 1 Type Px
235. blocking traffic from end stations or segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill When enabled back pressure is used for half duplex operation and IEEE 802 3x for full duplex operation Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually required to solve a problem Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub Default Autonegotiation enabled Advertised capabilities for RJ 45 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full SFP 1000BASE BX SX LX LH 1000full e Media Type Configures the forced preferred port type to use for the combination ports Ports 25 28 Copper Forced Always uses the built in RJ45 port SFP Forced Always uses the SFP port even if module is not installed SFP Preferred Auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link This is the default Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk To create trunks and select port members see Creating Trunk Groups on page 9 6 Note Auto negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface to use the Speed Duplex Mode or Flow Control options Configuring Interface Connections 9 Web Click Port Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required interface settings and click Apply Por
236. cannot exchange any information except through upper level routing services Multicast Router Multicast Server Layer 2 Switch Source Port y 4 Set top Box Set top Box PC sl iv General Configuration Guidelines for MVR 1 Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN and add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts see Configuring Global MVR Settings on page 15 10 2 Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver ports See Web Click MVR Port Information or Trunk Information on page 15 11 3 Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 15 3 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages 4 For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set of hosts you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces see Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces on page 15 15 15 9 4 5 Multicast Filtering Configuring Global MVR Settings The global settings for Multicast VLAN Registration MVR include enabling or disabling MVR for the switch selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel for common multicast streams supported by the service provider and assigning the multicast group address for each o
237. cation Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control The global setting for 802 1X Web Click Security 802 1X Information 802 1X Information B02 1X System Authentication Control Enabled Figure 6 6 802 1X Global Information CLI This example shows the default global setting for 802 1X Console show dot1x 21 29 Global 802 1X Parameters system auth control enable 802 1X Port Summary Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized LAL disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 1 2 disabled Single Host ForceAuthorized n a 802 1X Port Details 802 1X is disabled on port 1 1 802 1X is disabled on port 26 Console 6 14 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 6 Configuring 802 1X Global Settings The 802 1X protocol provides port authentication The 802 1X protocol must be enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active Command Attributes 802 1X System Authentication Control Sets the global setting for 802 1X Default Disabled Web Select Security 802 1X Configuration Enable 802 1X globally for the switch and click Apply 802 1X Configuration 802 1X System Authentication Control V Enabled Figure 6 7 802 1X Global Configuration CLI This example enables 802 1X globally for the switch Console config dot1lx system auth control 21 25 Console config Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X When 802 1X is enabl
238. ccess mode i e Privileged Exec But when the guest user name and password is entered the CLI displays the Console gt prompt and enters normal access mode i e Normal Exec 2 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 3 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After connecting to the system through the console port the login screen displays User Access Verification Username admin Password CLI session with the Layer 2 Ethernet Metro Access Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console Most of the interface examples in this manual are based on the ES3528 There is no significant difference in the interface provided for the ES3528 and ES3528 WDM Telnet Connection Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol In this environment your management station and any network device you want to manage over the network must have a valid IP address Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Each address consists of a network portion and host portion For example the IP address assigned to this switch 10 1 0 1 consists of a network portion 10 1 0 and a host portion 1 17 1 A T Overview of Command Line Interface Note The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To access the switch through a Telnet session you must first set the IP address for the Master unit and set the defaul
239. ce CLI configuration program and SNMP agent allow you to perform the following management functions e Set user names and passwords Set an IP interface for a management VLAN Configure SNMP parameters e Enable disable any port Set the speed duplex mode for any port Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates Control port access through IEEE 802 1X security or static address filtering e Filter packets using Access Control Lists ACLs e Configure up to 255 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration e Configure IGMP multicast filtering e Upload and download system firmware via TFTP e Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP e Configure Spanning Tree parameters e Configure Class of Service CoS priority queuing 2 Initial Configuration e Configure up to 12 static or LACP trunks e Enable port mirroring Set broadcast storm control on any port e Display system information and statistics Required Connections The switch provides an RS 232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch A null modem console cable is provided with the switch Attach a VT100 compatible terminal or a PC running a terminal emulation program to the switch You can use the console cable provided with this package or use a null modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the Installation Guide To connect a
240. ce due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also disable an interface for security reasons e Speed Duplex Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode i e with auto negotiation disabled Note 100BASE BX ports are fixed at 100 Mbps full duplex The 1000BASE T standard does not support forced mode Always use auto negotiation to establish a connection over any 1000BASE T port or trunk Flow Control Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control e Autonegotiation Port Capabilities Allows auto negotiation to be enabled disabled When auto negotiation is enabled you need to specify the capabilities to be advertised When auto negotiation is disabled you can force the settings for speed duplex mode and flow control The following capabilities are supported 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 9 Port Configuration 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1 Gbps full duplex operation Sym Gigabit only Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames or clear it to auto negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames FC Supports flow control Flow control can eliminate frame loss by
241. ce IP address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address 23 2 Pab 23 Default Setting None Command Mode Standard IP ACL Command Usage e New rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned Example This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a bitmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl Related Commands access list ip 23 2 permit deny Extended ACL This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL The rule sets a filter condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses protocol types source or destination protocol ports or TCP control codes Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny protoco number udp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence pr
242. cers i e class maps for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ingress ports e Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the burst byte field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the rate bps option Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c service policy This command applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to the ingress queue of a particular interface Use the no form to remove the policy map from this interface Syntax no service policy input policy map name input Apply to the input traffic policy map name Name of the policy map for this interface Range 1 32 characters Default Setting No policy map is attached to an interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You c
243. ces Attached to a Multicast Router Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained from IGMP along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet These routers may be dynamically discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this switch attached to a neighboring multicast router switch for each VLAN ID Command Attributes VLAN ID ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 e Multicast Router List Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch Web Click IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port Information Select the required VLAN ID from the scroll down list to display the associated multicast routers Multicast Router Port Information VLAN 1D 1 gt Multicast Router List Unit Portl1 Static Figure 15 2 Multicast Router Port Information CLI This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 33 11 VLAN M cast Router Port Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console 15 5 4 5 Multicast Filtering Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate
244. cessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded Range 0 65535 Default 0 Data Bits Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and generated by the console port If parity is being generated specify 7 data bits per character If no parity is required specify 8 data bits per character Default 8 bits 4 16 Console Port Settings 4 e Parity Defines the generation of a parity bit Communication protocols provided by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting Specify Even Odd or None Default None Speed Sets the terminal line s baud rate for transmit to terminal and receive from terminal Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Range 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud Auto Default Auto Stop Bits Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Range 1 2 Default 1 stop bit Password Specifies a password for the line connection When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt Default No password Login Enables password checking at login You can select authentication by a single global password as configured for the Password parameter or by passwords set up for specific user name accounts Default Local Web Click System Line Console Sp
245. cifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface Use the no form to use the default port Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number The TCP port to be used by the browser interface Range 1 65535 Default Setting 80 Command Mode Global Configuration 21 11 2 4 User Authentication Commands Example Console config ip http port 769 Console config Related Commands ip http server 21 12 ip http server This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip http server Console config Related Commands ip http port 21 11 ip http secure server This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol HTTPS over the Secure Socket Layer SSL providing secure access i e an encrypted connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip http secure server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch However you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same UDP port e If you enable HTTPS you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your browser https device port_number 21 12 Web Ser
246. ckingMac gt phymap 00 12 cf 21 dc e0 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 snmp server community private rw snmp server community public ro username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486f f05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1l 783edd 27d254ca vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree MST configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 IP address DHCP no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP line console line vty end Console Related Commands show startup config 19 2 19 5 4 9 System Management Commands show system This command displays system information Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage e For a description of the items shown by this command refer to Displaying System Information on page 4 1 The POST results should all display PASS If any POST test indicates FAIL contact your distributor for assistance Example Console show system System Description 24 port Ethernet Metro Access Switch System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2t System information 1 hours 23 minutes and 44 61 seconds MAC Address MAC Address Web Server Unit1
247. command and domain lookup is enabled with the ip domain lookup command Table 34 1 DNS Commands Command Function Mode Page ip host Creates a static host name to address mapping GC 34 1 clear host Deletes entries from the host name to address table PE 34 2 ip domain name Defines a default domain name for incomplete host names GC 34 3 ip domain list Defines a list of default domain names for incomplete host names GC 34 3 ip name server Specifies the address of one or more name servers to use for host GC 34 4 name to address translation ip domain lookup Enables DNS based host name to address translation GC 34 5 show hosts Displays the static host name to address mapping table PE 34 6 show dns Displays the configuration for DNS services PE 34 7 show dns cache Displays entries in the DNS cache PE 34 7 clear dns cache Clears all entries from the DNS cache PE 34 8 ip host This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an IP address Use the no form to remove an entry Syntax no ip host name address1 address2 address8 name Name of the host Range 1 127 characters e address1 Corresponding IP address e address2 address8 Additional corresponding IP addresses Default Setting No static entries Command Mode Global Configuration 34 1 34 Domain Name Service Commands Command Usage Servers or other network devices may support
248. commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below Table 17 4 Command Group Index 17 10 Command Group Description Page General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode restarting the 18 1 system or quitting the CLI System Management Display and setting of system information basic modes of operation 19 1 maximum frame size file management console port and telnet settings system logs SMTP alerts and the system clock Simple Network Activates authentication failure traps configures community access 20 1 Management Protocol strings and trap receivers User Authentication Configures user names and passwords logon access using local or 21 1 remote authentication management access through the web server Telnet server and Secure Shell as well as port security IEEE 802 1X port access control and restricted access based on specified IP addresses Access Control List Provides filtering for IPv4 frames based on address protocol TCP 23 1 UDP port number or TCP control code or non IP frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports 24 1 aggregated links and VLANs Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk configures 25 1 Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the d
249. config access list ip extended 6 Switch config ext acl permit any any Switch config ext acl deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Switch config ext acl1 end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 Console configure Switch config access list ip mask precedence in Switch config ip mask acl mask protocol any any control flag 2 Switch config ip mask acl end Console sh access list IP extended access list A6 permit any any deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console configure Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if ip access group A6 in Console config if end Console show access list IP extended access list A6 deny tcp any any control flag 2 2 permit any any IP ingress mask ACL mask protocol any any control flag 2 Console show access list ip mask precedence This command shows the ingress or egress rule masks for IP ACLs Syntax show access list ip mask precedence in out in Ingress mask precedence for ingress ACLs out Egress mask precedence for egress ACLs Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show access list ip mask precedence IP ingress mask ACL mask host any mask 255 255 255 0 any Console 23 10 Pab 23 Related Commands mask IP ACL 23 6 ip access group This command binds a port to an IP ACL Use the no form to
250. control that prevents unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server using EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol Table 21 12 802 1X Port Authentication Commands Command Function Mode Page dot1x system auth control Enables dot1x globally on the switch GC 21 25 dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 21 25 dot1x max req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch IC 21 25 retransmits an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session dot1x port control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 21 26 dot1x operation mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 21 26 dot1x re authenticate Forces re authentication on specific ports PE 21 27 dot1x re authentication Enables re authentication for all ports IC 21 27 dot1x timeout quiet period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max IC 21 28 Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client dot1x timeout re authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must IC 21 28 be re authenticated dot1x timeout tx period Sets the time period during an authentication session that IC 21 29 the switch waits before re transmitting an EAP packet show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 21 29 21 24
251. d Web Click Spanning Tree STA Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Modify the required attributes then click Apply STA Port Configuration Port Saaana STA State 240 in tere em Mirnoe inghet lAdmin Link Type Sree tcl poet Migration Trunk 1 F Enabled Forwarding fize fo Auto z Enabled I Enabled 2 F Enabled Discarding 128 fo Auto z F Enabled I Enabled 3 F Enabled Discarding fize fo Auto Z enabled M Enabled 4 F Enabled Discarding fize fo iw E enabled I Enabled 5 F Enabled Discarding he boo Auto E I Enabled I Enabled 6 F Enabled Discarding he oO Auto sd Enabled T Enabled 7 I Enabled Discarding fo 50 Auto z M Enabled F Enabled xj Figure 11 4 STA Port Configuration CLI This example sets STA attributes for port 7 Console config interface ethernet 1 7 24 1 Console config if no spanning tree spanning disabled 29 11 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 29 13 Console config if spanning tree cost 50 29 12 Console config if spanning tree link type auto 29 15 Console config if no spanning tree edge port 29 14 Console config if spanning tree protocol migration 29 18 Console config if 11 15 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disru
252. d for the administrator Home Page When your web browser connects with the switch s web agent the home page is displayed as shown below The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side of the screen and System Information on the right side The Main Menu links are used to navigate to other menus and display configuration parameters and statistics u 24 port Ethernet Metro Access Switch a System Name Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 a Location a a Contact A System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 25 minutes and 23 24 seconds a EET Connect to textual user interface if Connect to Servi s Technical Support Page Suppor PEE Connect to Customer Website Apply Revert Help Figure 3 1 Home Page Note The examples in this chapter are based on the ES3528B Other than the subscriber port type there are no significant differences between the ES3528 and ES3528 WDM The panel graphics for both switch types are shown on the following page Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3 Configuration Options Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop down list Once a configuration change has been made on a page be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm the new setting The following table summarizes the web page configuration buttons Table 3 1 Web Page Configuration Buttons Button Action Apply Sets specified values to the
253. d from the multicast group identified in the leave message When immediate leave is disabled the switch follows the standard rules by sending a group specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a 33 13 33 Multicast Filtering Commands response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before removing the port from the group list e Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same interface e Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been statically assigned to a port IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 33 2 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages Example The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch enables immediate leave on one of the receiver ports and statically assigns a multicast group to another receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mvr type source Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if mvr type receiver Console config if mvr immediate Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 7 Console config if mvr type receiver Console config if mvr g
254. d interface as trusted Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping trust Default Setting All interfaces are untrusted Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network e When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 22 7 and enabled on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN according to the default status or as specifically configured for an interface with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command e When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed All static bindings are retained but will have no effect unless the port is changed back to the untrusted state e Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted 22 12 DHCP Snooping Commands 22 Example This example sets port 5 to untrusted Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if no ip dhcp snooping trust Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 22 7 ip dhcp
255. d on severity The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level Syntax logging history flash ram evel no logging history flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset level One of the levels listed below Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Table 19 10 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 debugging Debugging messages 6 informational Informational messages only 5 notifications Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 warnings Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 errors Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 alerts Immediate action needed 0 emergencies System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release Default Setting Flash errors level 3 0 RAM warnings level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority i e numerically lower than that specified for RAM Example Console config logging history ram 0 Console config 19 29 4 9 System Management Commands logging hos
256. d the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software Only if re authentication fails is the port blocked e The connected client is re authenticated after the interval specified by the dot1x timeout re authperiod command The default is 3600 seconds Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotix re authentication Console config if Related Commands dot1x timeout re authperiod 21 28 dot1x timeout quiet period This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client Use the no form to reset the default Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 60 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dotlx timeout quiet period 350 Console config if dot1x timeout re authperiod This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be re authenticated Use the no form of this command to reset the default Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 21 28 802 1X Port Authentication 21 Default 3600 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console c
257. dd 1 untagged switchport native vlan 1 interface vlan 1 ip address dhcp no map IP precedence no map IP DSCP line console line VTY end Console Related Commands show running config 19 4 19 3 4 9 System Management Commands show running config This command displays the configuration information currently in use Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show startup config command to compare the information in running memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information MAC address for the switch SNTP server settings SNMP community strings Users names access levels and encrypted passwords VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces IP address Layer 4 precedence settings Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet 19 4 System Status Commands 4 9 Example Console show running config building running config please wait lt stackingDB gt 00 lt stackingDB gt lt stackingMac gt 01_00 12 cf 21 dc e0_01 lt sta
258. de enter the command configure in Privileged Exec mode The system prompt will change to Console config which gives you access privilege to all Global Configuration commands Console configure Console config 17 7 A T Overview of Command Line Interface To enter the other modes at the configuration prompt type one of the following commands Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode Table 17 2 Configuration Command Modes Mode Command Prompt Page Line line console vty Console config line 19 19 Access access list ip standard Console config std acl 23 2 Control List access list ip extended Console config ext acl 23 2 access list ip mask precedence Console config ip mask acl 23 6 access list mac Console config mac acl 23 12 access list mac mask precedence Console config mac mask acl 23 15 Class Map class map Console config cmap 32 2 Interface interface ethernet port port channel id vlan id Console config if 24 1 MSTP spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 29 7 Policy Map policy map Console config pmap 32 4 VLAN vlan database Console config vlan 30 6 For example you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration mode and then return to Privileged Exec mode Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if exit Console config 17 8 Entering Commands 4 7 Command
259. default VLAN ID and Tag Protocol Identifier TPID that is the ether type of the tag This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets The priority of the inner tag is copied to the outer tag if it is a tagged or priority tagged packet 2 After successful source and destination lookup the ingress process sends the packet to the switching process with two tags If the incoming packet is untagged the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag and the inner tag is a dummy tag 8100 0000 If the incoming packet is tagged the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag and the inner tag is a CVLAN tag 3 After packet classification through the switching process the packet is written to memory with one tag an outer tag or with two tags both an outer tag and inner tag 4 The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port 12 13 4A 2 VLAN Configuration 5 Ifthe egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN the outer tag will be stripped If it is a tagged member the outgoing packets will have two tags Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into an Uplink Port An uplink port receives one of the following packets Untagged One tag CVLAN or SPVLAN e Double tag CVLAN SPVLAN The ingress process does source and destination lookups If both lookups are successful the ingress process writes the packet to memory Then the egress process transmits the packet Packets entering a QinQ uplink port are processed in the following manner If incoming
260. den vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 30 12 switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 31 3 interface vlan This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs which is used to configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface Syntax interface vlan vlan id vlan id ID of the configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to VLAN 1 and then assign an IP address to the VLAN Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if Related Commands shutdown 24 6 30 8 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 30 switchport mode This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport mode hybrid trunk dot1q tunnel no switchport mode hybrid Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface The port may transmit tagged or untagged frames e trunk Specifies a port as an end point for a VLAN trunk A trunk is a direct link between two switches so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the source VLAN Note that frames belonging to the port s default VLAN i e associated with the PVID are also transmitted as tagged frames dot1q tunnel For an explanation of this command se
261. dinate UTC UTC is a time scale that couples Greenwich Mean Time based solely on the Earth s rotation rate with highly accurate atomic time The UTC does not have daylight saving time User Datagram Protocol UDP UDP provides a datagram mode for packet switched communications It uses IP as the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP like services UDP packets are delivered just like IP packets connection less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets UDP is useful when TCP would be too complex too slow or just unnecessary Glossary 6 Glossary Virtual LAN VLAN A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers and allows users to share information and resources as though located on the same LAN XModem A protocol used to transfer files between devices Data is grouped in 128 byte blocks and error corrected Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 index Numerics 802 1Q tunnel 12 12 30 20 description 12 12 interface configuration 12 16 30 21 30 22 mode selection 12 16 TPID 12 11 12 16 30 22 802 1X port authentication 6 13 21 24 A acceptable frame type 12 10 30 9 Access Control List See ACL ACL Extended IP 8 1 8 2 8 4 23 1 23 3 MAC 8 1 8 2 23 12 23 12 23 14 Standard IP 8 1 8 2 8 3 23
262. ding Static DHCP Binding VLAN identifier and port identifier e Ifthe DHCP snooping is disabled globally all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table all static bindings are retained in the binding table but will have no effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled e If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and then disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table all static bindings configured for this VLAN are retained in the binding table but will have no effect until snooping is re enabled on the VLAN A static DHCP snooping entry can be added in the binding table under any of the following conditions If there is no binding with same VLAN ID and MAC address 22 10 DHCP Snooping Commands 22 If there is a binding with same VLAN ID and MAC address and the entry type is static IP source guard binding static DHCP snooping binding or dynamic DHCP snooping binding the new entry will replace the old one e When the lease time for a dynamic or static DHCP binding entry expires it is removed from the binding table Example This example configures a static DHCP binding entry on port 5 and sets the lease time to make it a permanent entry Console config ip dhcp snooping binding 11 22 33 44 55 66 vlan 1 192 168 0 99 interface ethernet 1 5 0 Console config if Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 22 7 ip dhcp snooping vlan 22 9 ip dhcp snoo
263. dress stored in the DHCP packet GC 22 11 verify mac address against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header ip dhcp snooping Writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory GC 22 12 database flash ip dhcp snooping Configures the specified interface as trusted IC 22 12 trust show ip dhcp Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings PE 22 13 snooping show ip dhcp Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE 22 12 snooping binding ip dhcp snooping This command enables DHCP snooping globally Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command and enabled on a VLAN interface by the ip dhcp snooping vlan command page 22 9 DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface as specified by the no ip dhcp snooping trust command page 22 12 from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped 22 7 22 Client Security Commands 22 8 e When enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping and static entries configured
264. e SMTP Alert Commands These commands configure SMTP event handling and forwarding of alert messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients Table 19 13 SMTP Alert Commands Command Function Mode Page logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 19 34 logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 19 35 logging sendmai Email address used for From field of alert messages GC 19 35 source email logging sendmai Email recipients of alert messages GC 19 36 destination email logging sendmai Enables SMTP event handling GC 19 36 show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE PE 19 37 logging sendmail host This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages Use the no form to remove an SMTP server Syntax no logging sendmail host ip_address ip_address IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert messages for event handling Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing However you must enter a separate command to specify each server 19 34 SMTP Alert Commands ff 9 To send email alerts the switch first opens a connection sends all the email alerts waiting in the queue one by one and finally closes the connection To open a connection the switch first selects the server that successfu
265. e 1 100000 kbps or maximum port speed whichever is lower Burst byte Burst in bytes Range 64 1522 Exceed Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate or burst will be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced Set Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic Range 0 63 Drop Drops out of conformance traffic Add Adds the specified criteria to the policy map 14 6 Configuring Quality of Service Parameters 4 4 Web Click QoS DiffServ Policy Map to display the list of existing policy maps To add a new policy map click Add Policy To configure the policy rule settings click Edit Classes Policy Map Modify Name amp Description Edit Classes Add Policy Remove Policy Policy Name Description rp RED service for r rd_policy2 R amp D service iii ini a Policy Configuration Policy Name ra_policyas R amp D service for VLAN 1 s Description zi d Back Policy Rule Settings Policy Name rd_policy 3 Meter Class Name Action Rate bps Burst byte Exceed Action Remove Class Class Name rd_class 3 Action Set cs0 H Moo Rate 1 100000 100000 bps Burst 64 1522 i522 byte Exceed set IP DSCP 0 63 bo Meter E Figure 14 2 Configuring Policy Maps 14 7 A 4 Quality of Service CLI This example creates a polic
266. e not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 25 6 show lacp show lacp 2 5 This command displays LACP information Syntax show lacp port channel counters internal neighbors sys id port channel Local identifier for a link aggregation group Range 1 32 counters Statistics for LACP protocol messages e internal Configuration settings and operational state for local side e neighbors Configuration settings and operational state for remote side sys id Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups Default Setting Port Channel all Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Port channel 1 LACPDUs Sent LACPDUs Receive Marker Sent Marker Receive Console show lacp 1 counters LACPDUs Unknown Pkts LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Table 25 2 show lacp counters display description LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Field Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Sl
267. e Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 1s VLAN Support Up to 255 groups port based protocol based or tagged 802 1Q GVRP for automatic VLAN learning private VLANs Class of Service Supports eight levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing which can be configured by VLAN tag or port Layer 3 4 priority mapping IP Port IP Precedence IP DSCP A Software Specifications Quality of Service DiffServ supports class maps policy maps and service policies Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Additional Features BOOTP client SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol RMON Remote Monitoring groups 1 2 3 9 SMTP Email Alerts Management Features In Band Management Telnet web based HTTP or HTTPS SNMP manager or Secure Shell Out of Band Management RS 232 DB 9 console port Software Loading TFTP in band or XModem out of band SNMP Management access via MIB database Trap management to specified hosts RMON Groups 1 2 3 9 Statistics History Alarm Event Standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities IEEE 802 1p Priority tags IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1v Protocol based VLANs IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication IEEE 802 3 2005 Ethernet Fast Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Full duplex flow control ISO IEC 8802 3 IEEE 802 3ac
268. e Unit 1 gt Port 1 amp Trunk E Figure 15 5 IGMP Member Port Table CLI This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1 and then displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 1 1 12 ethernet 1 12 33 2 Console config exit Console show mac address table multicast vlan 1 33 6 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type 1 224 1 1 12 Eth1 12 USER 1 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP 15 8 Multicast VLAN Registration 4 5 Multicast VLAN Registration Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is a protocol that controls access to a single network wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic such as television channels or video on demand across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers This protocol can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN This makes it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network without having to use any multicast routing protocol MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups from the MVR VLAN users in different IEEE 802 1Q or private VLANs
269. e When privacy is selected the DES 56 bit algorithm is used for data encryption e For additional information on the notification messages supported by this switch see Supported Notification Messages on page 5 13 Also note that the authentication link up and link down messages are legacy traps and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command page 20 7 Example Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth write daily Console config show snmp group Four default groups are provided SNMPv1 read only access and read write access and SNMPv2c read only access and read write access Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp group Group Name r amp d Security Model v3 Read View defaultview Write View daily Notify View none Storage Type permanent Row Status active Group Name public Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active 30 No view is defined 31 Maps to the defaultview 20 12 show snmp group 20 Group Name public Security Model v2c Read View defaultview Write View none Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v1 Read View defaultview Write View defaultview Notify View none Storage Type volatile Row Status active Group Name private Security Model v2c
270. e file or image used to start up the system Syntax boot system boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to set as a default includes boot rom Boot ROM config Configuration file opcode Run time operation code filename Name of configuration file or code image 19 17 A 9 System Management Commands Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Ifthe file contains an error it cannot be set as the default file Example Console config boot system config startup Console config Related Commands dir 19 16 whichboot 19 17 19 18 Line Commands 4 9 Line Commands You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100 compatible device to the server s serial port These commands are used to set communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet i e a virtual terminal Table 19 8 Line Commands Command Function Mode Page line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line GC 19 19 configuration mode login Enables password checking at login LC 19 20 password Specifies a password on a line LC 19 21 timeout login Sets the interval that the system waits for a login attempt LC 19 22 response exec timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC 19 22 input is detected password thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of
271. e from a TFTP server to the switch tftp to running config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config tftp to startup config Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify config configuration to copy configuration settings e File Name The configuration file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note The maximum number of user defined configuration files is limited only by 4 14 available flash memory space Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 4 Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Choose tftp to startup config or tftp to file and enter the IP address of the TFTP server Specify the name of the file to download select a file on the switch to overwrite
272. e number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds Retry times The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 Enable Authentication Traps3 Issues a notification message to specified IP trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails Default Enabled Enable Link up and Link down Traps Issues a notification message whenever a port link is established or broken Default Enabled 3 These are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notification View page 5 13 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Web Click SNMP Configuration Enter the IP address and community string for each management station that will receive trap messages specify the UDP port SNMP trap version trap security level for v3 clients trap inform settings for v2c v3 clients and then click Add Select the trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link up down traps and then click Apply Trap Managers Trap Manager Capability 5 Current New Trap Manager IP Address fi 0 1 19 23 Trap Manager Community String private none Trap UDP Port fieo lt lt Add Trap Version 2c Remove Trap Security Level h
273. e page 30 21 Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1 and then set the switchport mode to hybrid Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode hybrid Console config if Related Commands switchport acceptable frame types 30 9 switchport acceptable frame types This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax switchport acceptable frame types all tagged no switchport acceptable frame types all The port accepts all frames tagged or untagged tagged The port only receives tagged frames Default Setting All frame types Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 30 9 30 VLAN Commands Command Usage When set to receive all frame types any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN Example The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged frames Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport acceptable frame types tagged Console config if Related Commands switchport mode 30 9 switchport ingress filtering This command enables ingress filtering for an interface Use the no form to restore the default Syntax
274. e protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use page 6 Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page Configuring Protocol Groups Create a protocol group for one or more protocols Command Attributes Protocol Group ID Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Frame Type23 Frame type used by this protocol Options Ethernet RFC_ 1042 LLC_other Protocol Type The only option for the LLC_other frame type is IPX_raw The options for all other frames types include IP ARP RARP Web Click VLAN Protocol VLAN Configuration Enter a protocol group ID frame type and protocol type then click Apply Protocol VLAN Configuration Current New Protocol Gruop ID 1 2147483647 Group 1 Ethernet 08 00 Group 1 Ethemet 08 06 lt lt Add Frame Type Ethernet ole i Protocol Type User defined type O801 FFFF hexadecimal value Figure 12 11 Protocol VLAN Configuration CLI The following creates protocol group 1 and then specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol
275. e the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp mstp no spanning tree mode stp Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D rstp Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w mstp Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s 29 2 spanning tree mode 29 Default Setting rstp Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Spanning Tree Protocol Uses RSTP for the internal state machine but sends only 802 1D BPDUs This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network If multiple VLANs are implemented on a network the path between specific VLAN members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops thus isolating group members When operating multiple VLANs we recommend selecting the MSTP option e Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To allow multiple spanning trees to ope
276. e to retrieve MIB objects 20 3 2 oO SNMP Commands e private Read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server community alpha rw Console config snmp server contact This command sets the system contact string Use the no form to remove the system contact information Syntax snmp server contact string no snmp server contact string String that describes the system contact information Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server contact Paul Console config Related Commands snmp server location 20 4 snmp server location This command sets the system location string Use the no form to remove the location string Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text String that describes the system location Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None 20 4 snmp server host 2 O Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server location WC 19 Console config Related Commands snmp server contact 20 4 snmp server host This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation Use the no form to remove the specified host Syntax snmp server host host addr info
277. e to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Max hops The max number of hop counts for the MST region e Remaining hops The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance e Transmission limit The minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive RSTP MSTP BPDUs e Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Web Click Spanning Tree STA Information STA Information Spanning Tree Spanning Tree State Enabled Designated Root 32768 0000ABCD0000 Bridge ID 32768 0000ABCDO000 Root Port 0 Max Age 20 Root Path Cost 0 Hello Time 2 Configuration Changes 2 Forward Delay 15 Last Topology Change 0 d 0O h0 min 35 s Figure 11 1 STA Information 11 4 Displaying Global Settings 4 41 CLI This command displays global STA settings followed by settings for each port Console show spanning tree Spanning tree information 29 18 Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enable disable enable Instance 0 Vlans configuration 1 4093 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2 Bridge Max Age sec 20 Bridge Forward Delay sec 15 Root Hello Time sec 2 Root Max Age sec 20 Root Forward Delay sec 15 Max hops 20 Remaining hops 20 Designated Root
278. e used at startup and click Apply To start the new firmware reboot the system via the System Reset menu a ____ Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes O Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 455 startup Config_File Y 4555 startup cfg Config_File N 3675 Y10026 Operation_Code N 3850952 V10028 Operation_Code Y 3862936 Figure 4 10 Setting the Startup Code 4 12 Managing Firmware 4 To delete a file select System File Management Delete Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick box and click Apply Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted Startup Size bytes Delete Name Type C Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N startup Config_File Y C startup1 cfg Config_File N Y10026 Operation_Code N 10028 Operation_Code Y 455 4555 3675 3850952 3862936 Figure 4 11 Deleting Files CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server enter the IP address of the TFTP server select config as the file type then enter the source and destination file names When the file has finished downloading set the new file to start up the system and then restart the switch To start the new firmware enter the reload command or reboot the system Console copy tftp file 19 13 TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode lt 1
279. ecedence tos tos dscp dscp source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask no permit deny tcp any source address bitmask host source any destination address bitmask host destination precedence precedence tos tos dscp dscp source port sport bitmask destination port dport port bitmask control flag control flags flag bitmask protocol number A specific protocol number Range 0 255 e source Source IP address destination Destination IP address e address bitmask Decimal number representing the address bits to match host Keyword followed by a specific IP address 23 3 2 3 Access Control List Commands precedence IP precedence level Range 0 7 e tos Type of Service level Range 0 15 dscp DSCP priority level Range 0 63 sport Protocol 3 source port number Range 0 65535 dport Protocols destination port number Range 0 65535 port bitmask Decimal number representing the port bits to match Range 0 65535 control flags Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 flag bitmask Decimal number representing the code bits to match Default Setting None Command Mode Extended IP ACL Command Usage e All new rules are appended to the end of the list e Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask containing four integ
280. ecifies storm control for broadcast traffic multicast Specifies storm control for multicast traffic e rate Threshold level as a rate i e packets per second Range 500 262143 Default Setting Broadcast Storm Control Enabled for all ports packet rate limit 500 pps Multicast Storm Control Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage When traffic exceeds the threshold specified for broadcast and multicast traffic packets exceeding the threshold are dropped until the rate falls back down beneath the threshold Example The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per second Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport broadcast packet rate 600 Console config if 24 7 24 Interface Commands switchport block This command prevents flooding of unknown unicast or multicast packets to an interface Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no switchport block unicast multicast unicast Specifies unknown unicast packets e multicast Specifies unknown multicast packets Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Default Setting Unknown unicast and multicast packets are not blocked Command Usage By default unknown unicast or multicast traffic is flooded to all ports This occurs if a MAC address has been timed out or not yet learned by the switch If this kind of t
281. ecify the console port connection parameters as required then click Apply Console Login Timeout 0 300 fo J secs 0 Disabled Exec Timeout 0 65535 o secs 0 Disabled Password Threshold 0 120 B 0 Disabled Silent Time 0 65535 fo secs 0 Disabled Data Bits E Parity None Speed Auto E Stop Bits E Figure 4 14 Configuring the Console Port 1 CLI only 4 17 A Basic Management Tasks CLI Enter Line Configuration mode for the console then specify the connection parameters as required To display the current console port settings use the show line command from the Normal Exec level Console config line console 19 19 Console config line login local 19 20 Console config line password 0 secret 19 21 Console config line timeout login response 0 19 22 Console config line exec timeout 0 19 22 Console config line password thresh 5 19 23 Console config line silent time 60 19 24 Console config line databits 8 19 24 Console config line parity none 19 25 Console config line speed auto 19 25 Console config line stopbits 1 19 26 Console config line end Console show line console 19 27 Console configuration Password threshold 5 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time 60 Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Console Telnet Settings You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using
282. ecome the root device e You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority of 0 or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384 Example Console config mstp mst 1 priority 4096 Console config mstp name This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which this switch is located Use the no form to clear the name Syntax name name name Name of the spanning tree Default Setting Switch s MAC address Command Mode MST Configuration 29 9 29 Spanning Tree Commands Command Usage The MST region name and revision number page 29 10 are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch can only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp name R amp D Console config mstp Related Commands revision 29 10 revision This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree configuration of this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax revision number number Revision number of the spanning tree Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage The MST region name page 29 9 and revision number are used to designate a unique MST region A bridge i e spanning tree compliant device such as this switch ca
283. ed you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the switch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section Command Attributes Status Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port Default Disabled Operation Mode Allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Range Single Host Multi Host Default Single Host Max Count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the Multi Host operation mode is selected Range 1 1024 Default 5 Mode Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options Auto Requires a dot1x aware client to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not dot1x aware will be denied access Force Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise This is the default setting Force Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Re authentication Sets the client to be re authenticated after the interval specified by the Re authentication Period Default Disabled 6 15 6 User Authentication Max Request Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an EAP request packet to the client before
284. ed Poo 7 None Enabled Doo 8 None D Enabled Doo 9 None Enabled bo 10 None Z F Enabled eo 11 None Enabled bo 12 None D Enabled bo E Figure 7 4 Port Security CLI This example selects the target port sets the port security action to send a trap and disable the port specifies a maximum address count and then enables port security for the port Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap and shutdown 22 2 Console config if port security max mac count 20 Console config if port security Console config if 7 3 7 Client Security 7 4 Chapter 8 Access Control Lists Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter incoming packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port Configuring Access Control Lists An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress or egress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match
285. ed on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Multicast Filtering Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee real time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN The switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration It also supports Multicast VLAN Registration MVR which allows common multicast traffic such as television channels to be transmitted across a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing in other standard or private VLAN groups while preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ This feature is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A Introduction System Defaults The switch s system defaults are provided in the configuration file Factory_Default_Config cfg To res
286. ed to receive data from that multicast group The IP address range from 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an MVR group see ip igmp snooping on page 33 2 Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages Example The following example enables MVR globally and configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config mvr Console config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 Console config 33 12 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 33 mvr Interface Configuration This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port using the type keyword enables immediate leave capability using the immediate keyword or configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN using the group keyword Use the no form to restore the default settings Syntax no mvr type receiver source immediate group jp address receiver Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive multicast data source Configure the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups immediate Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group e
287. ed to record accurate dates and times for log events Without SNTP the switch only records the time starting from the factory default set at the last bootup i e 00 00 00 Jan 1 2001 e This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the sntp servers command It issues time synchronization requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console config sntp poll 60 Console config sntp client Console config end Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 02 52 44 2002 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console Related Commands sntp server 19 39 sntp poll 19 39 show sntp 19 40 19 38 Time Commands 4 9 sntp server This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are issued Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the current list Syntax sntp server ip1 ip2 ip3 ip IP address of an time server NTP or SNTP Range 1 3 addresses Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time updates when set to SNTP client mode The client will poll the time servers in the order specified until a response is received It issues time synchronization requests ba
288. eee eee eee 5 1 User Authentication 0 0 0 tte nee 6 1 Client Security sororis retinae ee acd eh pee he eee a aas 7 1 Access Control ListS wei 6 ges se neesi ordi ets kiia ionia eiin D eed 8 1 Port Configuration 2 0 2 tte eee 9 1 Address Table Settings 0 000000 cece tee 10 1 Spanning Tree Algorithm 0 cee ete 11 1 VLAN Configuration 0 000 cece 12 1 ClaSs Of Service si shes Foret See el Ah Re he a es 13 1 Quality of Service 0 0 cette 14 1 Multicast Filtering 0 0 a a a h E E ia 15 1 Domain Name Service sieg a a ee ee eee ee 16 1 Switch Management Chapter 3 Configuring the Switch Using the Web Interface This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent Using a web browser you can configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity The web agent can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above Note You can also use the Command Line Interface CLI to manage the switch over a serial connection to the console port or via Telnet For more information on using the CLI refer to Chapter 17 Overview of Command Line Interface Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser be sure you have first performed the following tasks 1 Configure the switch with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using an out of band serial connection B
289. efer to Setting Static Addresses on page 10 1 VLAN Learning This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning IVL where each port maintains its own filtering database Configurable PVID Tagging This switch allows you to override the default Port VLAN ID PVID used in frame tags and egress status VLAN Tagged or Untagged on each port Refer to VLAN Configuration on page 12 1 Local VLAN Capable This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside of the scope of 802 1Q defined VLANs GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP allows network devices to register endstations with multicast groups This switch does not support GMRP it uses the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP to provide automatic multicast filtering A Basic Management Tasks Web Click System Bridge Extension Bridge Extension Configuration Bridge Capability Extended Multicast Filtering Services No Traffic Classes Enabled Static Entry Individual Port Yes VLAN Learning ML Configurable PVID Tagging Yes Local VLAN Capable No GMRP I Enable Figure 4 6 Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration CLI Enter the following command Console show bridge ext 30 2 Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4094 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global
290. efined in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network Generic Attribute Registration Protocol GARP GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN containing registered endstations Formerly called Group Address Registration Protocol Generic Multicast Registration Protocol GMRP GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups GMRP requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802 1p standard Group Attribute Registration Protocol GARP See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol IEEE 802 1D Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges including the Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Tagging Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information It allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs and defines a standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks IEEE 802 1p An IEEE standard for providing quality of service QoS in Ethernet networks The standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value IEEE 802 1s An IEEE standard for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP which provides independen
291. elated Commands ip dhcp restart 35 3 ip default gateway This command specifies the IP default gateway for destinations not found in the local routing tables Use the no form to remove a default gateway Syntax ip default gateway gateway no ip default gateway gateway IP address of the default gateway Default Setting No static route is established Command Mode Global Configuration 35 2 Basic IP Configuration 35 Command Usage A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different IP segment An default gateway can only be successfully set when a network interface that directly connects to the gateway has been configured on the switch Example The following example defines a default gateway for this device Console config ip default gateway 10 1 1 254 Console config Related Commands show ip redirects 35 4 ip dhcp restart This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command DHCP requires the server to reassign the client s last address if available f the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain the network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new domain Example In the following example the dev
292. ember Ports Eth1 1 Eth1 2 Eth1 3 Eth1 4 Eth1 5 Eth1 6 Console 9 Port Configuration Configuring LACP Parameters Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria e Ports must have the same LACP System Priority Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key e However if the port channel Admin Key is set page 4 142 then the port Admin Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group Note If the port channel admin key lacp admin key page 25 5 is not set through the CLI when a channel group is formed i e it has a null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group lacp admin key as described in this section and on page 25 4 Command Attributes Set Port Actor This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link i e the ports on this switch Port Port number Range 1 28 System Priority LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default 32768 Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG System priority is combined with the switch s MAC address to form the LAG identifier This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP negotiations with
293. enabled on a port the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message To use port security specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port and then let the switch dynamically learn the lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table page 10 1 When the port has reached the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning The 5 These functions can only be configured through the Command Line Interface 7 Client Security MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch Command Usage A secure port has the following restrictions It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk It should not be connected to a network interconnection device The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero You mu
294. engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 5 4 and Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users on page 5 11 The engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters If less than 64 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 0123456789 is equivalent to 0123456789 followed by 54 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Remote Engine ID Remote IP Host Action 20000000030004626316 54321 192 168 1 19 Remove Add Figure 5 5 Setting an Engine ID CLI This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engine id remote 54321 192 168 1 19 20 8 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 20 9 Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Remote SNMP engineID IP address 80000000030004e2b316c54321 192 168 1 19 Console Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 5 Configuring SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write or notify view Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters
295. er ports Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan vian id vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 Default Setting Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Multicast router port types displayed include Static Example The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1 VLAN M cast Router Ports Type 1 Eth 1 11 Static Console Multicast VLAN Registration Commands This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration MVR A single network wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic such as television channels across a service provider s network Any multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers This can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN Also note that MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong Table 33 5 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands Command Function Mode Page mvr Globally enables MVR statically configures MVR group GC 33 12 address es or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier mvr Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port IC 33 13 enables immediate leave capability or configures
296. error messages including the type of events that are recorded in switch memory logging to a remote System Log syslog server and displays a list of recent event messages System Log Configuration The system allows you to enable or disable event logging and specify which levels are logged to RAM or flash memory Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems Up to 4096 log entries can be stored in the flash memory with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the available log memory 256 kilobytes has been exceeded The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 7 to be logged to RAM Command Attributes System Log Status Enables disables the logging of debug or error messages to the logging process Default Enabled e Flash Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s permanent flash memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 3 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash Range 0 7 Default 3 Table 4 1 Logging Levels Level Severity Name Description 7 Debug Debugging messages 6 Informational Informational messages only 5 Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start 4 Warn
297. ers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and then compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned e You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule However if DSCP is used then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified e The control code bitmask is a decimal number representing an equivalent bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and 0 means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 18 33 Includes TCP UDP or other protocol types 23 4 Pab 23 Example This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through Co
298. es SSH sets the authentication parameters and displays the current configuration It shows that the administrator has made a connection via SHH and then disables this connection Console config ip ssh server 21 17 Console config ip ssh timeout 100 21 18 Console config ip ssh authentication retries 5 21 19 Console config ip ssh server key size 512 BLA19 Console config end Console show ip ssh 21 22 SSH Enabled version 2 0 Negotiation timeout 120 secs Authentication retries 3 Server key size 768 bits Console show ssh 21 22 Information of secure shell Session Username Version Encrypt method Negotiation state 0 admin 2 0 cipher 3des session started Console disconnect 0 19 26 Console 6 12 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication 6 Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by simply attaching a client PC Although this automatic configuration and access is a desirable feature it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and possibly gain access to sensitive network data The IEEE 802 1X dot1x standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication Access to all switch ports in a network can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from a
299. es display the current status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance Field Attributes MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 The other attributes are described under Displaying Interface Settings page 11 10 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Information or Trunk Information Select the required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values MSTP Port Information MST Instance ID 0 7 fon Sik rremrat Pete a a a Oret Eke a rl 1 Discarding 2 10000 32768 0 0030F10473A0 128 1 10000 Foris Disabled Disabled 2 Discarding 12 10000 32768 0 0030F10473A0 128 2 100000 Panas Disabled Designated 3 Discarding 0 10000 32768 0 0030F10473A0 128 3 10000 Feinde Disabled Disabled 4 Discarding 9 10000 32768 0 0030F1D47340 128 4 100000 jid Disabled Designated 5 Discarding 0 10000 32768 0 0030F1D47340 128 5 10000 Portae Disabled Disabled Figure 11 6 MSTP Port Information CLI This displays STA settings for instance 0 followed by settings for each port The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST page 11 3 the settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree Console show spanning tree mst 0 Spanning tree information 29 18 Spanning tree mode MSTP Spanning tree enabled disabled enabled Instance 0 VLANs configuration 2 4093 Priority 32768 Bridge Hello Time sec 2
300. ess Switch System Name Object ID Location 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2 Contact System Up Time 0 days O hours O minutes and 58 43 seconds IANS Connect to textual user interface Connect to Services Technical Support Page Connect to Customer Website Figure 4 4 System Information CLI Specify the hostname location and contact information Console config hostname R amp D 5 19 1 Console config snmp server location WC 9 20 4 Console config snmp server contact Ted 20 4 Console config exit Console show system 19 6 System Description 24 port Ethernet Metro Access Switch System OID String 1 3 6 1 4 1 259 8 2 2t System Information System Up Time 0 days 0 hours 24 minutes and 7 84 seconds System Name R amp D 5 System Location WC 9 System Contact Ted MAC Address Unit1 00 12 CF 21 DC E0 Web Server Enabled Web Server Port 80 Web Secure Server Enabled Web Secure Server Port 443 Telnet Server Enable Telnet Server Port 23 Jumbo Frame Disabled Power Module A Status UP Power Module B Status Not present Power Module A Type Power Module B Type None Fan 1 OK Fan 2 OK Fan 3 OK Configuring the Switch for Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode 4 POST Result DUMMY TOSE L ona acne ek greta acts PASS UART Loopback Test PASS DRAM TEOSE seco e htudieve apoE RAER PASS Tima TADE pepetis Quechee PASS I2C Bus Initialization P
301. essage before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network Example Console config spanning tree max age 40 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 29 4 spanning tree hello time 29 4 29 5 29 Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree priority This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 65535 Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device Example Console config spanning tree priority 40000 Console config
302. est with the password guest The default administrator name is admin with the password admin Command Attributes e Account List Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access levels Defaults admin and guest e New Account Displays configuration settings for a new account User Name The name of the user Maximum length 8 characters maximum number of users 16 Access Level Specifies the user level Options Normal and Privileged Password Specifies the user password Range 0 8 characters plain text case sensitive e Change Password Sets a new password for the specified user 4 For other methods of controlling client access see Client Security on page 7 1 6 User Authentication Web Click Security User Accounts To configure a new user account enter the user name access level and password then click Add To change the password for a specific user enter the user name and new password confirm the password by entering it again then click Apply User Accounts Account List New Account admin Privileged lUser Name guest Normal i lt lt Add Access Level Normal z Remove Password E Confirm Password Ea mike Change Password lUser Name New Password Confirm Password Change Figure 6 4 User Accounts CLI Assign a user name to access level 15 i e administrator then specify the p
303. et 1 5 Console config if Related Commands ip source guard 22 3 ip dhcp snooping 22 7 ip dhcp snooping vlan 22 9 show ip source guard This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each interface Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip source guard Interface Filter type Eth 1 1 DISABLED Eth 1 2 DISABLED Eth 1 3 DISABLED Eth 1 4 DISABLED Eth 1 5 SIP Eth 1 6 DISABLED show ip source guard binding This command shows the source guard binding table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip source guard binding MacAddress TIpAddress Lease sec Type VLAN Interface 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static IP SG binding 1 Eth 1 5 Console 22 6 DHCP Snooping Commands 22 DHCP Snooping Commands DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port This section describes commands used to configure DHCP snooping Table 22 4 DHCP Snooping Commands Command Function Mode Page ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping globally GC 22 7 ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN GC 22 9 vlan ip dhcp snooping Adds a static address to the DHCP snooping table GC 22 10 binding ip dhcp snooping Verifies the client s hardware ad
304. et the switch defaults this file should be set as the startup configuration file page 4 15 The following table lists some of the basic system defaults Table 1 2 System Defaults Function Parameter Default Console Port Baud Rate auto Connection rere 3 Stop bits 1 Parity none Local Console Timeout 0 disabled Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username admin Password admin Normal Exec Level Username guest Password guest Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Password super Exec Level RADIUS Authentication Disabled TACACS Authentication Disabled 802 1X Port Authentication Disabled HTTPS Enabled SSH Disabled Port Security Disabled DHCP Snooping Disabled IP Source Guard Disabled IP Filtering Disabled Web Management HTTP Server Enabled HTTP Port Number 80 HTTP Secure Server Enabled HTTP Secure Port Number 443 System Defaults 4 Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default SNMP SNMP Agent Enabled Community Strings public read only private read write Traps Authentication traps enabled Link up down events enabled SNMP V3 View defaultview Group public read only private read write Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled Auto negotiation Enabled Flow Control Disabled Rate Limiting Input and output limits Disabled Input limit pe
305. etting by enabling jumbo frames The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system command page 19 6 Example Console config jumbo frame Console config Related Commands show system mtu 19 11 19 10 System MTU Commands 4 9 system mtu This command sets the maximum transfer unit for traffic crossing the switch Use the no form to restore the default settings Syntax system mtu FE size jumbo GE size no system mtu e FE size Specifies the MTU size for Fast Ethernet ports Range 1500 1546 bytes e GE size Specifies the jumbo frame size MTU for Gigabit Ethernet ports Range 1500 9216 bytes Default Setting 1522 bytes Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Gigabit Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu FE size command Fast Ethernet ports are not affected by the system mtu jumbo command After setting the jumbo frame size with the system mtu or system mtu jumbo command remember to use the jumbo frame command page 19 10 to implement the new setting by enabling jumbo frames Example Console config system mtu 1528 Console config Related Commands jumbo frame 19 10 show system mtu 19 11 show system mtu This command shows the maximum transfer unit size for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports Command Mode Global Configuration 19 11 4 9 System Management Commands Example Console sh
306. eturn to the discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result Example Console config spanning tree forward time 20 Console config spanning tree hello time This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree hello time time no spanning tree hello time time Time in seconds Range 1 10 seconds The maximum value is the lower of 10 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 2 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the time interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message 29 4 spanning tree max age 29 Example Console config spanning tree hello time 5 Console config Related Commands spanning tree forward time 29 4 spanning tree max age 29 5 spanning tree max age This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 6 or 2 x hello time 1 The maximum value is the lower of 40 or 2 x forward time 1 Default Setting 20 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration m
307. evel are a limited subset of those available at the Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic utilities To fully configure the switch parameters you must access the CLI at the Privileged Exec level Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords The switch has a default user name and password for each level To log into the CLI at the Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password perform these steps 1 To initiate your console connection press lt Enter gt The User Access Verification procedure starts 2 Atthe Username prompt enter admin At the Password prompt also enter admin The password characters are not displayed on the console screen 4 The session is opened and the CLI displays the Console prompt indicating you have access at the Privileged Exec level 2 Initial Configuration Setting Passwords Note If this is your first time to log into the CLI program you should define new passwords for both default user names using the username command record them and put them in a safe place Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive To prevent unauthorized access to the switch set the passwords as follows 1 Open the console interface with the default user name and password admin to access the Privileged Exec level 2 Type configure and press lt Enter gt 3
308. evice ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Default 20 e Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 e Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 e Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a discarding state otherwise temporary data loops might result e Default 15 e Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1 e Maximum 30 Configuration Settings for RSTP The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP Path Cost Method The path cost is used to determine the best path between devices The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can be assigned to each interface Long Specifies 32 bit based values that range from 1 200 000 000 This is the default Short Specifies 16 bit based values that range from 1 65535 Transmission Limit The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol messages Range 1 10 Default 3 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm Configurat
309. f switchport acceptable frame types tagged 30 9 Console config if switchport ingress filtering 30 10 Console config if switchport native vlan 3 30 11 Console config if switchport gvrp 30 3 Console config if garp timer join 20 30 4 Console config if garp timer leave 90 Console config if garp timer leaveall 2000 Console config if switchport mode hybrid 30 9 Console config if Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 QinQ tunneling uses a single Service Provider
310. f Command Line Interface 17 12 Chapter 18 General Commands These commands are used to control the command access mode configuration mode and other basic functions Table 18 1 General Commands Command Function Mode Page enable Activates privileged mode NE 18 1 disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 18 2 configure Activates global configuration mode PE 18 2 show history Shows the command history buffer NE PE 18 3 reload Restarts the system PE 18 4 prompt Customizes the CLI prompt GC 18 4 end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any 18 4 config mode exit Returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the CLI any 18 5 quit Exits a CLI session NE PE 18 5 help Shows how to use help any NA Shows options for command completion context sensitive any NA enable This command activates Privileged Exec mode In privileged mode additional commands are available and certain commands display additional information See Understanding Command Modes on page 17 6 Syntax enable evel level Privilege level to log into the device The device has two predefined privilege levels 0 Normal Exec 15 Privileged Exec Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode Default Setting Level 15 Command Mode Normal Exec Command Usage e super is the default password required to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec To set this password
311. f duplex operation e 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation flowcontrol Supports flow control symmetric Gigabit only When specified the port transmits and receives pause frames when not specified the port will auto negotiate to determine the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames The current switch ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames Default Setting e 100BASE TX 10half 10full 100half 100full e 1000BASE T 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full e 1000BASE SX LX LH SFP 1000full Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 24 4 flowcontrol 24 Command Usage When auto negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands Example The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half and 100full Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 5 config if capabilities 100half config if capabilities 100full config if Related Commands negotiation 24 3 speed duplex 24 2 flowcontrol 24 5 flowcontrol This command enables flow control Use the no form to disable flow control Syntax no flowcontrol Default Setting Disabled Command Mode
312. f the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password A minimum of eight characters is required priv des56 Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption priv password Privacy password Enter as plain text if the encrypted option is not used Otherwise enter an encrypted password Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication privacy digests 20 14 from the password You should therefore configure the engine ID with the snmp server engine id command before using this configuration command Before you configure a remote user use the snmp server engine id command page 20 8 to specify the engine ID for the remote device where the user resides Then use the snmp server user command to specify the user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides The remote agent s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication privacy digests from the user s password If the remote engine ID is not first configured the snmp server user command specifying a remote user will fail SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore show snmp user 20 need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it Example Console config Console config s
313. f these services to the MVR VLAN Command Attributes MVR Status When MVR is enabled on both the switch any multicast data associated an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group Default Disabled MVR Running Status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment are satisfied Running status is true as long as MVR Status is enabled and the specified MVR VLAN exists MVR VLAN Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming multicast services using MVR Range 1 4094 Default 1 MVR Group IP IP address for an MVR multicast group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 is used for multicast streams MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224 0 0 x Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN Count The number of contiguous MVR group addresses Range 1 255 Default 0 Web Click MVR Configuration Enable MVR globally on the switch select the MVR VLAN add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts and then click Apply MVR Configuration MVR Status M Enabled MYR Running Status False MVR VLAN E MVR Group IP List Current New none lt lt Add lt add MYR Group IP 228 1 23 1 Count 10 Figu
314. face to VLAN groups as a tagged member e Frames are always tagged within the switch The tagged untagged parameter used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress e Ifnone of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs the interface should be added to these VLANs as an untagged member Otherwise it is only necessary to add at most one VLAN as untagged and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the interface e Ifa VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that interface the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that interface Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 1 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list as tagged VLANs for port 1 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 2 5 6 tagged Console config if switchport forbidden vian This command configures forbidden VLANs Use the no form to remove the list of forbidden VLANs Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vian list remove vian list no switchport forbidden vlan add vian list List of VLAN identifiers to add remove vian list List of VLAN identifiers to remove e vian list Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Do not enter leading zeros Range 1 4093 Default
315. fault 3 Notes 1 All systems on the subnet must support the same version 2 Some attributes are only enabled for GMPv2 and v3 including IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Configuration Adjust the IGMP settings as required and then click Apply The default settings are shown below IGMP Configuration IGMP Status Enabled Act as IGMP Querier I Enabled IGMP Query Count 2 10 e IGMP Query Interval 60 125 fies seconds IGMP Report Delay 5 25 fio seconds IGMP Query Timeout 00 500 300 seconds IGMP Yersion 1 2 2 Figure 15 1 IGMP Configuration CLI This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering and then displays the current status Console config ip igmp snooping 33 2 Console config ip igmp snooping querier 33 7 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 33 7 Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 33 8 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 33 8 Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 33 9 Console config ip igmp snooping version 2 3353 Console config exit Console show ip igmp snooping 33 5 Service status Enabled Querier status Enabled Query count 10 Query interval 100 sec Query max response time 20 sec Router port expire time 300 sec IGMP snooping version Version 2 Console 15 4 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 4 5 Displaying Interfa
316. features containing Layer 3 information are not supported on tunnel ports Spanning tree bridge protocol data unit BPDU filtering is automatically disabled on a tunnel port General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ 1 2 Configure the switch to QinQ mode see Configuring the Switch for Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode on page 4 3 Create a Service Provider VLAN also referred to as an SPVLAN see Creating VLANs on page 12 6 Configure the QinQ tunnel port to dot1Q tunnel port mode see Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel on page 12 16 Set the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of the tunnel port This step is required is the attached client is using a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames The standard ethertype value is 0x8100 See Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel on page 12 16 Configure the QinQ tunnel port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged member see Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 12 7 Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel port see Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces on page 12 10 Configure system MTU to 1526 if jumbo frames are not enabled see Configuring the Maximum Frame Size on page 4 4 Configure the QinQ uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member see Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 12 7 12 15 4A 2 VLAN Configuration Adding an Interface t
317. fic and enter the Class Map configuration mode Use the match command to select a specify type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN Set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match command Use the policy map command to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled and enter the Policy Map configuration mode Use the class command to identify the class map and enter Policy Map Class configuration mode A policy map can contain multiple class statements Use the set command to modify the QoS value for matching traffic class and use the policer command to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate Use the service policy command to assign a policy map to a specific interface 32 1 3 2 Quality of Service Commands Notes 1 You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map page 32 2 before creating a Policy Map page 32 4 Otherwise you will not be able to specify a Class Map with the class command page 32 5 after entering Policy Map Configuration mode class map This command creates a class map used for matching packets to the specified class and enters Class Map configuration mode Use the no form to dele
318. figuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config enable password level 15 0 admin Console config Related Commands enable 18 1 authentication enable 21 5 21 3 2 4 User Authentication Commands Authentication Sequence Three authentication methods can be specified to authenticate users logging into the system for management access The commands in this section can be used to define the authentication method and sequence Table 21 4 Authentication Sequence Commands authentication login command mode change Command Function Mode Page authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 21 4 authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for GC 21 5 This command defines the login authentication method and precedence Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication login local radius tacacs no authentication login e local Use local password e radius Use RADIUS server password tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password
319. figuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example This example shows how the set the access level and password for a user Console config username bob access level 15 Console config username bob password 0 smith Console config 21 2 User Account Commands 2 A enable password After initially logging onto the system you should set the Privileged Exec password Remember to record it in a safe place This command controls access to the Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level Use the no form to reset the default password Syntax enable password level eve 0 7 password no enable password level evel e level eve Level 15 for Privileged Exec Levels 0 14 are not used 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password password for this privilege level Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting The default is level 15 The default password is super Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e You cannot set a null password You will have to enter a password to change the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable command page 18 1 The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the con
320. for which the egress frame priority has been fixed on a selected VLAN Example Console show vlan based priority Eth 1 1 Vlan 1 Priority 7 Console 31 7 3 4 Class of Service Commands Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 This section describes commands used to configure Layer 3 and Layer 4 traffic priority on the switch Table 31 4 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 Command Function Mode Page map ip port Enables TCP UDP class of service mapping GC 31 8 map ip port Maps TCP UDP socket to a class of service IC 31 9 map ip precedence Enables IP precedence class of service mapping GC 31 9 map ip precedence Maps IP precedence value to a class of service IC 31 10 map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 31 11 mapipdscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 3111 show map ip port Shows the IP port map PE 31 12 show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map PE 31 13 show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 31 14 map ip port Global Configuration This command enables IP port mapping i e class of service mapping for TCP UDP sockets Use the no form to disable IP port mapping Syntax no map ip port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Example The following example shows how to enable TCP UDP port
321. forward time GC 29 4 spanning tree hello time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 29 4 spanning tree max age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 29 5 spanning tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 29 6 spanning tree Configures the path cost method for RSTP MSTP GC 29 6 path cost method spanning tree Configures the transmission limit for RSTP MSTP GC 29 7 transmission limit spanning tree Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 29 7 mst configuration mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 29 8 mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance MST 29 9 name Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree MST 29 9 revision ee the revision number for the multiple spanning MST 29 10 ree max hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST 29 11 region before a BPDU is discarded spanning tree Disables spanning tree for an interface Cc 29 11 spanning disabled spanning tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface Cc 29 12 spanning tree port priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC 29 13 spanning tree edge port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports Cc 29 14 spanning tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding Cc 29 14 spanning tree link type Configures the link type for RSTP MSTP c 29 15 spanning tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST c 29 16 spanning tree mst Configures the priority
322. fy traffic based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLANs Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2 Layer 3 or Layer 4 information contained in each packet Table 32 1 Quality of Service Commands Command Function Mode Page class map Creates a class map for a type of traffic GC 32 2 match Defines the criteria used to classify traffic CM 32 3 policy map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces GC 32 4 class Defines a traffic classification for the policy toacton PM 325 set T Classifies IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP precedence PM C 32 6 value in a packet police Defines an enforcer for classified traffic PM C 32 6 service policy Applies a policy map defined by the policy map command to C 32 7 the input of a particular interface show class map Displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria PE 32 8 used for classifying traffic show policy map Displays the QoS policy maps which define classification PE 32 8 criteria for incoming traffic and may include policers for bandwidth limitations show policy map interface Displays the configuration of all classes configured for all PE 32 9 service policies on the specified interface To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic follow these steps 1 2 Use the class map command to designate a class name for a specific category of traf
323. g GC 20 4 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 20 4 hostname This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device Use the no form to restore the default host name Syntax hostname name no hostname name The name of this host Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 19 1 A 9 System Management Commands Example Console config hostname RD 1 Console config System Status Commands This section describes commands used to display system information Table 19 3 System Status Commands Command Function Mode Page show startup config Displays the contents of the configuration file stored in flash PE 19 2 memory that is used to start up the system show running config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 19 4 show system Displays system information NE PE 19 6 show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions including user NE PE 19 7 name idle time and IP address of Telnet clients show version Displays version information for the system NE PE 19 7 show startup config This command displays the configuration file stored in non volatile memory that is used to start up the system Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e Use this command in conjunction with the show running config command to compare the information in runni
324. g a rate to restore the default rate Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit input output rate no rate limit input output input Input rate output Output rate e rate Maximum value in Mbps Range Fast Ethernet 1 to 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1 to 1000 Mbps Default Setting e Fast Ethernet 100 Mbps e Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if rate limit input 600 Console config if 27 1 2 T Rate Limit Commands Related Command show interfaces switchport 24 11 rate limit cos This command defines the output rate limit for an interface based on specified CoS priorities Use the no form to restore the default status of disabled Syntax rate limit cos cos_value rate no rate limit cos cos_value A number from 0 to 7 where 7 is the highest priority e rate Maximum value in Mbps Range Fast Ethernet 1 to 100 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet 1 to 1000 Mbps Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e When priority based rate limiting is implemented the combined rate of all traffic matching the specified priority based rate limits cannot exceed the overall output rate limit specified by the rate limit output command see page 27 1 e Ifthe rate exceeds the limit
325. g table Web Click Port LACP Port Neighbors Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Neighbors Information Interface Port zz Trunk ID 1 Partner Admin System ID Partner Admin Port Number Port Admin Priority Admin Key Admin State Expired 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 0 Oper Key 3 Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted 2 Oper State Defaulted Admin State Distributing 2 Oper State Distributing 2 Admin State Collecting 2 Oper State Collecting 4 eel Oper State Synchronization oS Admin State Aggregation Oper State Aggregation 4 Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity Oper State LACP Activity g 9 16 Figure 9 8 LACP Port Neighbors Information Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds 9 CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the remote side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 neighbors 25 7 Port channel 1 neighbors Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32768 Admin Key 0 Oper Key 3 Admin State defaulted distributing collecti
326. g with s Console show s snmp sntp spanning tree ssh startup config system Console sh s Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword no to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value For example the logging command will log system messages to a host server To disable logging specify the no logging command This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Using Command History The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered You can scroll back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key Any command displayed in the history list can be executed again or first modified and then executed Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed commands 17 5 A T Overview of Command Line Interface Understanding Command Modes The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes Exec commands generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters Configuration commands on the other hand modify interface parameters or enable certain switching functions These classes are further divided into different modes Available commands depend on the selected mode You can always enter a question mark at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the current mode The command classes and associated modes are
327. gement Tasks Displaying System Information Configuring the Switch for Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode Configuring the Maximum Frame Size Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames Displaying Switch Hardware Software Versions Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities Setting the Switch s IP Address 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 1 3 1 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 Contents Manual Configuration Using DHCP BOOTP Managing Firmware Downloading System Software from a Server Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server Console Port Settings Telnet Settings Configuring Event Logging System Log Configuration Remote Log Configuration Displaying Log Messages Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts Resetting the System Setting the System Clock Configuring SNTP Setting the Time Zone Chapter 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Enabling the SNMP Agent Setting Community Access Strings Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access Setting a Local Engine ID Specifying a Remote Engine ID Configuring SNMPv3 Users Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Setting SNMPv3 Views Chapter 6 User Authentication vi Configuring User Accounts Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication Configuring HTTPS Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate Configuring the Secure Shell Generating the Host Key Pair Configu
328. gin password CLI session with the Layer 2 Ethernet Metro Access Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Configuration Commands Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch settings These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved when the switch is rebooted To store the running configuration in non volatile storage use the copy running config startup config command The configuration commands are organized into different modes Global Configuration These commands modify the system level configuration and include commands such as hostname and snmp server community e Access Control List Configuration These commands are used for packet filtering e Class Map Configuration Creates a DiffServ class map for a specified traffic type Interface Configuration These commands modify the port configuration such as speed duplex and negotiation Line Configuration These commands modify the console port and Telnet configuration and include command such as parity and databits e Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration These commands configure settings for the selected multiple spanning tree instance e Policy Map Configuration Creates a DiffServ policy map for multiple interfaces e VLAN Configuration Includes the command to create VLAN groups To enter the Global Configuration mo
329. gnated bridge Fast forwarding Forward transitions Admin edge port Oper edge port Admin Link type Oper Link type Spanning Tree Status Role State External admin path cost Internal admin cost External oper path cost Internal oper path cost Priority enable root forwarding 10000 10000 10000 10000 128 200000 128 24 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 32768 0 0030F1552000 disable 1 enable disable auto point to point enable show spanning tree mst configuration This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Configuration name Revision level 0 R amp D Instance Vlans Console Console show spanning tree mst configuration Mstp Configuration Information 29 20 Chapter 30 VLAN Commands A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment This section describes commands used to create VLAN groups add port members specify how VLAN tagging is used and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected interface Table 30 1 VLAN Commands Tunneling customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Groups Function Page GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning 30 1 shows the configura
330. gure 14 3 Service Policy Settings CLI This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface Console config interface ethernet 1 5 24 1 Console config if service policy input rd_policy 3 32 Console config if N 14 8 Chapter 15 Multicast Filtering Multicasting is used to support real time Unicast applications such as videoconferencing or Flow streaming audio A multicast server does not have to establish a separate connection with each a N client It merely broadcasts its service to the C X O network and any hosts that want to receive the multicast register with their local multicast switch L an router Although this approach reduces the J CD w AZ network overhead required by a multicast server the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at _ i every multicast switch router it passes through to Se ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts Mes which subscribed to this service e This switch can use Internet Group Management a Protocol IGMP to filter multicast traffic IGMP j S Snooping can be used to passively monitor or 7 os a Tan N snoop on exchanges between attached hosts C A A AA A and an IGMP enabled device most commonly a multicast router In this way the switch can discover the ports that want to join a multicast group and set its filters accordingly If there is no multicast router attached to the local subnet multicast traffic and q
331. gure 15 2 Figure 15 3 Figure 15 4 Figure 15 5 Figure 15 6 Figure 15 7 Figure 15 8 Figure 15 9 Figure 15 10 Figure 16 1 Figure 16 2 Figure 16 3 Queue Mode Queue Scheduling IP Precedence DSCP Priority Status IP Precedence Priority IP DSCP Priority IP Port Priority Status IP Port Priority Configuring Class Maps Configuring Policy Maps Service Policy Settings IGMP Configuration Multicast Router Port Information Static Multicast Router Port Configuration IP Multicast Registration Table IGMP Member Port Table MVR Global Configuration MVR Port Information MVR Port Configuration MVR Group IP Information MVR Group Member Configuration DNS General Configuration DNS Static Host Table DNS Cache Figures 13 5 13 6 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 13 12 14 4 14 7 14 8 15 4 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 10 15 11 15 13 15 14 15 15 16 2 16 4 16 5 XXV Figures xxvi Section Getting Started This section provides an overview of the switch and introduces some basic concepts about network switches It also describes the basic settings required to access the management interface INTRODUCTION ar on hoe ek A ek ly Mette sh SB tee bed 1 1 Initial Configuration 0 2 eee 2 1 Getting Started Chapter 1 Introduction This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching It includes a management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual The default conf
332. h a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read and a write view To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host See Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types on page 5 4 and Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 5 8 Command Attributes User Name The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Range 1 32 characters Group Name The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned Range 1 32 characters Engine ID The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the remote user resides Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified before you configure a remote user See Specifying a Remote Engine ID on page 5 8 Remote IP The Internet address of the remote device where the user resides Security Model The user security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 e Security Level The security level used for the user noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications This is the default for SNMPv3 AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMP
333. hcp snooping verify mac address command page 22 11 However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped Ifa DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN Ifa DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table all static bindings are retained in the binding table but will have no effect until DHCP snooping is re enabled Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted ip dhcp snooping trust page 22 12 Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped DHCP Snooping Commands 22 Example This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the sw
334. he LACP port channel key matches if configured Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group Once the remote side of a link has been established LACP operational settings are already in use on that side Configuring LACP settings for the partner only applies to its administrative state not its operational state and will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp admin key Port Channel This command configures a port channel s LACP administration key string Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp admin key key no lacp admin key key The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link aggregation group LAG during local LACP setup on this switch Range 0 65535 Default Setting 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Port Channel Command Usage e Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if 1 the LACP system priority matches 2 the LACP port admin key matches and 3 the LACP port channel key matches if configured 25 5 2 5 Link Aggregation Commands e Ifthe port channel
335. he network with mechanisms such as traffic meters shapers droppers packet markers at the boundaries of the network Differentiated Services Code Point Service DSCP DSCP uses a six bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors Based on network policies different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories and then into the output queues Domain Name Service DNS A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses Dynamic Host Control Protocol DHCP Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP IP network DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options Glossary 1 Glossary Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch A user name and password is requested by the switch and then passed to an authentication server e g RADIUS for verification EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication standard GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs d
336. ibes the selections available from this program Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Menu Description Page System 4 1 System Information Provides basic system description including contact information 4 1 System Mode Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ 4 3 tunneling mode System MTU Sets the maximum transfer unit for traffic crossing the switch 4 4 Switch Information Shows the number of ports hardware firmware version 4 6 numbers and power status Bridge Extension Shows the bridge extension parameters 4 7 IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 4 8 Jumbo Frames Enables support for jumbo frames 4 5 File Management 4 11 Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying files 4 12 Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash memory 4 12 Set Startup Sets the startup file 4 12 Line 4 16 Console Sets console port connection parameters 4 16 Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 4 18 Log 4 20 Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 4 23 System Logs Stores and displays error messages 4 20 Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process 4 21 SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server 4 23 Reset Restarts the switch 4 25 SNTP 4 26 Configuration Configures SNTP client settings including a specified list of 4 26 servers Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 4 27
337. icated Authenticating SSH v2 Clients a The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable b Ifthe specified algorithm is supported by the switch it notifies the client to proceed with the authentication process Otherwise it rejects the request c The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch d When the server receives this message it checks whether the supplied key is acceptable for authentication and if so it then checks whether the signature is correct If both checks succeed the client is authenticated Note The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions Generating the Host Key Pair A host public private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an SSH client and the switch After generating this key pair you must provide the host public key to SSH clients and import the client s public key to the switch as described in the preceding section Command Usage Field Attributes Public Key of Host Key The public key for the host RSA The first field indicates the size of the host key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 65537 and the last string is the encoded modulus DSA The first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital S
338. ice is reassigned the same address Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart Console show ip interface Console Related Commands ip address 35 1 35 3 3 5 IP Interface Commands show ip interface This command displays the settings of an IP interface Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show ip interface Console Related Commands show ip redirects 35 4 show ip redirects This command shows the IP default gateway configured for this device Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip redirects ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 Console Related Commands ip default gateway 35 2 show arp Use this command to display entries in the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays information about the ARP cache The first line shows the cache timeout It also shows each cache entry including the corresponding IP address MAC address type statie dynamic other and VLAN interface Note that entry type other indicates local addresses for this switch 35 4 Basic IP Configuration 35 Example This example displays all entries in the ARP cache Console show arp IP Address MAC Address Type Interface 192 168 0 1 00 O0f 3d 12 40 e1 dynamic 1 192 168 0 110 00 10 b5 62 03
339. ick New to configure a new view In the New View page define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included or excluded in the view Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3 Views list For a specific view click on View OID Subtrees to display the current configuration or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings To delete a view check the box next to the view name then click Delete SNMP v3 Views _ _Detete Name OID Subtrees Actions fiew es Edit OID Subtrees E deYaultview ID Subtrees Edit OID Suttress El F Subtrees Edit OID Subtree SNMPv3 Views View writaaccess View OID D a OID Subtrees __ p View readaccess a SNMP v3 View Edit OID Subtree Type 1 3 6 1 2 Included Back View Name Ea Current New OID Subtree lt lt Add _ Senate Type Included z Back Figure 5 9 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 5 17 5 Simple Network Management Protocol CLI Use the snmp server view command to configure a new view This example view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the wildcard mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included 20 10 Console config exit Console show snmp view 20 11 View Name ifEntry a Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row S
340. ifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e frames Frame type used by this protocol Options ethernet rfc_1042 llc_other protocol Protocol type The only option for the Ilc_other frame type is ipx_raw The options for all other frames types include ip arp rarp Default Setting No protocol groups are configured Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following creates protocol group 1 and specifies Ethernet frames with IP and ARP protocol types Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type ip Console config protocol vlan protocol group 1 add frame type ethernet protocol type arp Console config protocol vlan protocol group Configuring Interfaces This command maps a protocol group to a VLAN for the current interface Use the no form to remove the protocol mapping for this interface Syntax protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan vlan id no protocol vlan protocol group group id vlan group id Group identifier of this protocol group Range 1 2147483647 e vian id VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded Range 1 4093 Default Setting No protocol groups are mapped for any interface Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 37 SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations 30 17 30 VLAN Commands Command Usage e When creating a protocol based VLAN only a
341. ignature Standard DSS The last string is the encoded modulus Host Key Type The key type used to generate the host key pair i e public and private keys Range RSA DSA Both Default Both The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption 6 User Authentication Note The switch uses only RSA Version 1 for SSHv1 5 clients and DSA Version 2 for SSHv2 clients Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Saves the host key from RAM i e volatile memory to flash memory Otherwise the host key pair is stored to RAM by default Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host key pair Generate This button is used to generate the host key pair Note that you must first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH Server Settings page e Clear This button clears the host key from both volatile memory RAM and non volatile memory Flash Web Click Security SSH Host Key Settings Select the host key type from the drop down box select the option to save the host key from memory to flash if required prior to generating the key and then click Generate SSH Host Key Settings Public Key of Host Key Host Key Type Both Save Host Key from Memory to Flash Generate Clear Figure 6 4 SSH Hos
342. igns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets However you should use IEEE 802 3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN registration Automatic VLAN Registration GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which each end station should be assigned If an end station or its network adapter supports the IEEE 802 1Q VLAN protocol it can be configured to broadcast a message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join When this switch receives these messages it will automatically place the
343. iguration can be used for most of the features provided by this switch However there are many options that you should configure to maximize the switch s performance for your particular network environment Key Features Table 1 1 Key Features Feature Description Configuration Backup and Restore Backup to TFTP server Authentication Console Telnet web User name password RADIUS TACACS Web HTTPS Telnet SSH SNMP v1 2c Community strings SNMP version 3 MD5 or SHA password Port IEEE 802 1X MAC address filtering Access Control Lists Supports IP or MAC ACLs Fast Ethernet ports 157 rules 4 masks shared by 8 port groups Gigabit Ethernet ports 29 rules 4 masks DHCP Client Supported DNS Client and proxy service Port Configuration Speed and duplex mode and flow control Rate Limiting Input and output rate limiting per port Input rate limiting per port per CoS value Port Mirroring Single session one source port to one analysis port Port Trunking Supports up to 12 trunks per unit using either static or dynamic trunking LACP Storm Control Broadcast and multicast storm control Unknown Packet Blocking Blocks multicast or unicast packets with unknown MAC address Address Table Up to 4K MAC addresses in the forwarding table 1024 static MAC addresses IEEE 802 1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning Store and Forward
344. in response seconds no timeout login response seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 300 seconds 0 disabled Default Setting e CLI Disabled 0 seconds e Telnet 300 seconds Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e Ifa login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval the connection is terminated for the session e This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections e The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled e Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Example To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line timeout login response 120 Console config line exec timeout This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected Use the no form to restore the default Syntax exec timeout seconds no exec timeout seconds Integer that specifies the timeout interval Range 0 65535 seconds 0 no timeout Default Setting CLI No timeout Telnet 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration 19 22 Line Commands 4 9 Command Usage e If user input is detected within the timeout interval the session is kept open otherwise the session is terminated This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting Exa
345. in the Member List on the Trunk Membership menu see page 9 7 9 8 Creating Trunk Groups 9 Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Port e New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Port Port identifier Range 1 28 Web Click Port LACP Configuration Select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply LACP Configuration Member List Current New Unitl Port Uniti Porn Uniti Port3 Unit Port4 Unit Port Remove Unit Port meo Figure 9 4 LACP Trunk Configuration CLI The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6 Just connect these ports to LACP enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if lacp 25 2 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 6 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 24 9 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A2 Configuration Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by LACP Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None M
346. in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet e RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server e You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication login radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked 21 4 Authentication Sequence 21 Example Console config authentication login radius Console config Related Commands username for setting the local user names and passwords 21 2 authentication enable This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the enable command see page 18 1 Use the no form to restore the default Syntax authentication enable local radius tacacs no authentication enable local Use local password only e radius Use RADIUS server password only tacacs Use TACACS server password Default Setting Local Command Mode Global Configurati
347. in the preceding example for CoS priority class 0 affects both priority class 0 and 3 which are now effectively treated as priority class 1 Table 27 2 on page 27 2 illustrates the priority mapping Console show rate limit cos Interface Cos Ratelimit zal ct a Sa AURWNRO 27 3 2 T Rate Limit Commands 27 4 Chapter 28 Address Table Commands These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified addresses displaying current entries clearing the table or setting the aging time Table 28 1 Address Table Commands Command Function Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 28 1 clear mac address table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 28 2 dynamic show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 28 3 mac address table Sets the aging time of the address table GC 28 4 aging time show mac address table Shows the aging time for the address table PE 28 4 aging time mac address table static This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN Use the no form to remove an address Syntax mac address table static mac address interface interface vlan vian id action no mac address table static mac address vlan vian id mac address MAC address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number
348. ince the last system reboot and are shown as counts per second Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default Note RMON groups 2 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management software such as HP OpenView Table 9 4 Port Statistics Parameter Description Interface Statistics Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Received Multicast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer Received Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol Transmit Octets
349. include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway IP Address Address of the VLAN to which the management station is attached Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Default 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets Default 255 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address IP address of the gateway router between the stack and management stations that exist on other network segments Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address The physical layer address for this switch Manual Configuration Web Click System System IP Configuration Select the VLAN through which the management station is attached Enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway then click Apply IP Configuration Management VLAN 1 IP Address Mode Static v IP Address 10 1 0 253 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 10 1 0 254 MAC Address 00 00 8 90 00 00 Restart DHCP Figure 4 7 IP Interface Configuration Manual A Basic Management Tasks CLI Specify the management interface IP address and default gateway Console config Console config interface vlan 1 24 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 253 255 255 255 0 35 1 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 35 2 Console config Using DHCP BOOTP If your network provides DHCP BOOTP services you can configure the stack to be
350. ine ID If the local enginelD is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users A new engine ID can be specified by entering 10 to 64 hexadecimal characters If less than 64 characters are specified trailing zeroes are added to the value For example the value 0123456789 is equivalent to 0123456789 followed by 54 zeroes Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Engine ID Enter an ID of up to 64 hexadecimal characters and then click Save SNMPv3 Engine ID Engine ID 80000034030030f1 b0e 7600000 Default Seve Figure 5 4 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID CLI This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID Console config snmp server engine id local 12345abcdef 20 8 Console config exit Console show snmp engine id 20 9 Local SNMP engineID 8000002a8000000000e8666672 Local SNMP engineBoots 1 Console 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Specifying a Remote Engine ID To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device you must first specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the user resides The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP
351. ines an excluded view Default Setting defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Views are used in the snmp server group command to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree e The predefined view defaultview includes access to the entire MIB tree Examples This view includes MIB 2 Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table ifDescr The wild card is used to select all the index values in this table Console config snmp server view ifEntry 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 included Console config This view includes the MIB 2 interfaces table and the mask selects all index entries Console config snmp server view ifEntry a 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 included Console config 20 10 show snmp view show snmp view This command shows information on the SNMP views Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show snmp view View Name mib 2 Subtree OID 1 2 2 3 6 2 1 View Type included Storage Type permanent Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type volatile Row Status active Console Table 20 3 show snmp view display description Field Description View Name Name of an SNMP view Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree View Type Indicates if the view i
352. ing IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters on page 15 3 For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Command Usage e Static multicast addresses are never aged out e When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN Command Attributes e Interface Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router switch e Multicast IP The IP address for a specific multicast service e Port or Trunk Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router switch Web Click IGMP Snooping IGMP Member Port Table Specify the interface attached to a multicast service via an IGMP enabled switch or multicast router indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service specify the multicast IP address and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply IGMP Member Port Table IGMP Member Port List New Static IGMP Member Port Interf Pon VLAN T 2241112 Unit 1 Pon rterface Pon_z VLAN ID 1 lt lt Add Multicast IP Remov
353. ing Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return 3 Error Error conditions e g invalid input default used 2 Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted 1 Alert Immediate action needed 0 Emergency System unusable There are only Level 2 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release e RAM Level Limits log messages saved to the switch s temporary RAM memory for all levels up to the specified level For example if level 7 is specified all messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM Range 0 7 Default 7 Note The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level 4 20 Configuring Event Logging 4 Web Click System Logs System Logs Specify System Log Status set the level of event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory then click Apply System Logs System Log Status Disabiea Flash Level 0 7 IB Ram Level 0 7 E Figure 4 16 System Logs CLI Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory Use the show logging command to display the current settings Console config logging on 19 28 Console config logging history ram 0 19 29 Console config Console show logging ram 19 32 Syslog logging Disabled History logging in RAM level emergencies Console Remote Log Configuration The Remote Logs page
354. ing defaulted operational partner information administratively configured for the partner Distributing If false distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Collecting Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Synchronization The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC i e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 25 8 showlacp 2 5 Console show lacp 1 neighbors Port channel 1 neighbors Eth 1 1 Partner Admin System ID 32768 00 00 00 00 00 00 Partner Oper System ID 32768 O00 01 F4 78 AE CO Partner Admin Port Number 2 Partner Oper Port Number 2 Port Admin Priority 32768 Port Oper Priority 32
355. ion 11 9 A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm CLI This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol sets the mode to MST and then configures the STA and MSTP parameters Console config spanning tree 29 2 Console config spanning tree mode mstp 29 2 Console config spanning tree priority 40000 29 6 Console config spanning tree hello time 5 29 4 Console config spanning tree max age 38 29 5 Console config spanning tree forward time 20 29 4 Console config spanning tree pathcost method long 29 6 Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 29 7 Console config spanning tree mst configuration 29 7 Console config mstp revision 1 29 10 Console config mstp name R amp D 29 9 Console config mstp max hops 30 29 11 Console config mstp Displaying Interface Settings The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree Field Attributes Spanning Tree Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface STA Status Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues
356. ion 2c config snmp server host 10 1 19 34 barbie version 3 auth config 2 Initial Configuration Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients you need to first create a view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write assign the view to a group and then assign the user to a group The following example creates one view called mib 2 that includes the entire MIB 2 tree branch and then another view that includes the IEEE 802 1d bridge MIB It assigns these respective read and read write views to a group call r amp d and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA In the last step it assigns a v3 user to this group indicating that MD5 will be used for authentication provides the password greenpeace for authentication and the password einstien for encryption Console config snmp server view mib 2 1 3 6 1 2 1 included 20 10 Console config snmp server view 802 1d 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 included Console config snmp server group r amp d v3 auth mib 2 802 1d 20 11 Console config snmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 20 14 Console config For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from SNMP v3 clients refer to Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 or refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 20 1 Managing System Files
357. ion Settings for MSTP Max Instance Numbers The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this switch can be assigned Default 65 Configuration Digest An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST ID mapping table In other words this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST Region Revision 8 The revision for this MSTI Range 0 65535 Default 0 Region Name18 The name for this MSTI Maximum length 32 characters Max Hop Count The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before a BPDU is discarded Range 1 40 Default 20 18 The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region 11 8 Configuring Global Settings 4 A Web Click Spanning Tree STA Configuration Modify the required attributes and click Apply STA Configuration Switch Spanning Tree State M Enabled Spanning Tree Type i MSTP z Priority 0 61440 in steps of 4096 32768 When the Switch Becomes Root Input Format 2 hello time 1 lt max age lt 2 forward delay 1 Maximum Age 6 40 RSTP Configuration Path Cost Method Long z Transmission Limit 1 10 B MSTP Configuration Max Instance Numbers 65 Configuration Digest 0xAC36177F50263CD45683821D8AB26DE62 Region Revision 0 65535 fo foo 00 e8 aa aa 00 Region Name Max Hop Count 1 40 Figure 11 2 STA Global Configurat
358. is buffered in the switch due to congestion This switch supports CoS with eight priority queues for each port Data packets in a port s high priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower priority queues You can set the default priority for each interface the relative weight of each queue and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch s priority queues Table 31 1 Priority Commands service values Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Groups Function Page Priority Layer 2 Configures default priority for untagged frames sets queue weights 31 1 and maps class of service tags to hardware queues Priority Layer 3 and 4 Maps TCP ports IP precedence tags or IP DSCP tags to class of 31 8 This section describes commands used to configure Layer 2 traffic priority on the switch Table 31 2 Priority Commands Layer 2 Command Function Mode Page Global Priority Settings queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted GC 31 2 Round Robin WRR show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 31 2 Port based Priority Settings switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 31 3 queue bandwidth Assigns round robin weights to the priority queues IC 31 4 queue cos map Assigns class of service values to the priority queues IC 31 4 show queue bandwidth Shows round robin weights assigned to the priority queues
359. is switch supports up to 12 trunks For example a trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of 4 Gbps when operating at full duplex Table 25 1 Link Aggregation Commands Command Function Mode Page Manual Configuration Commands interface port channel Configures a trunk and enters interface GC 24 1 configuration mode for the trunk channel group Adds a port to a trunk C Ethernet 25 2 Dynamic Configuration Commands lacp Configures LACP for the current interface C Ethernet 25 2 lacp system priority Configures a port s LACP system priority C Ethernet 25 4 lacp admin key Configures a port s administration key C Ethernet 25 4 lacp admin key Configures an port channel s administration key IC Port Channel 25 5 lacp port priority Configures a port s LACP port priority C Ethernet 25 6 Trunk Status Display Commands show interfaces status Shows trunk information NE PE 24 9 port channel show lacp Shows LACP information PE 25 7 Guidelines for Creating Trunks General Guidelines e Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network cables between switches to avoid creating a loop A trunk can have up to 8 ports The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner including communication mode i e speed and duplex mode VLAN a
360. isplays the administrative and operational status of an NE PE 24 11 interface This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode Use the no form to remove a trunk Syntax interface interface no interface port channel channel id interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting None 24 1 24 Interface Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example To specify port 4 enter the following command Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if description This command adds a description to an interface Use the no form to remove the description Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached to this interface Range 1 64 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Example The following example adds a description to port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 Console config if description RD SW 3 Console config if speed duplex This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when autonegotiation is disabled Use the no form to restore the default Syntax speed duplex 10000full 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half no speed duplex
361. ist sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain name 34 3 ip name server This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for name to address resolution Use the no form to remove a name server from this list Syntax no ip name server server address7 server address2 server address6 server address1 IP address of domain name server server address2 server address6 IP address of additional domain name servers Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a response is received or the end of the list is reached with no response 34 4 Example ip domain lookup 34 This example adds two domain name servers to the list and then displays the list Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 4255 10 1 0 55 Console Console config ip domain server 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Related Commands ip domain name 34 3 ip domain lookup 34 5 ip domain lookup This command enables DNS host name to address translation Use the no form to disable DNS Syntax no ip domain lookup Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Atleast one
362. istent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted Aggregation The system considers this link to be aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation Long timeout Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate LACP Activity Activity control value with regard to this link 0 Passive 1 Active 9 14 Creating Trunk Groups 9 Web Click Port LACP Port Internal Information Select a port channel to display the corresponding information LACP Port Internal Information Interface Port f2 Trunk ID 1 LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key ___3 Oper Key 3 LACPDUS Interval secs 30 seconds Admin State Expired Oper State Expired Admin State Defaulted Oper State Defaulted _ Admin State Distributing _ _ Oper State Distributing v Admin State Collecting Oper State Collecting a Admin Stat 3 yne AioA Cestetats ieyncnronceationy m Admin State Aggregation 2 Oper State Aggregation 2 Admin State Timeout Long Oper State Timeout Long Admin State LACP Activity 2 Oper State LACP Activity 4 Figure 9 7 LACP Port Internal Information CLI The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and operational state for the local side of port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 internal 25 7 Port channel 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2
363. itch Console config ip dhcp snooping Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping vlan 22 9 ip dhcp snooping trust 22 12 ip dhcp snooping binding 22 10 ip dhcp snooping vian This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no ip dhcp snooping vlan vian id vlan id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4093 Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping command page 22 7 and enabled on a VLAN with this command DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as specified by the ip dhcp snooping trust command page 22 12 When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled When DHCP snooping is globally enabled configuration changes for specific VLANs have the following effects If DHCP snooping is disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table all static bindings configured for this VLAN are retained in the binding table but have no effect If DHCP snooping is re enabled on a VLAN any previously configured static bindings stored in the binding table will take effect again Example This example enables DHCP snooping fo
364. itmask Console config std acl permit host 10 1 1 21 Console config std acl permit 168 92 16 0 255 255 240 0 Console config std acl1 Configuring an Extended ACL Command Attributes e Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules e Source Destination Address Type Specifies the source or destination IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any e Source Destination IP Address Source or destination IP address e Source Destination Subnet Mask Subnet mask for source or destination address See the description for SubMask on page 3 e Service Type Packet priority settings based on the following criteria Precedence IP precedence level Range 0 8 where 8 means any TOS Type of Service level Range 0 16 where 16 means any DSCP DSCP priority level Range 0 64 where 64 means any e Protocol Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP UDP or Others where others indicates a specific protocol number 0 255 Options TCP UDP Others Default TCP Configuring Access Control Lists 8 Source Destination Port Source destination port number for the specified protocol type Range 0 65535 Source Destination Port Bit Mask Decimal number representing the p
365. ity that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 0 Related Commands spanning tree cost 29 12 29 13 29 Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree edge port This command specifies an interface as an edge port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax no spanning tree edge port Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device This command has the same effect as the spanning tree portfast
366. ity types will automatically disable the other type 31 9 3 4 Class of Service Commands Example The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally Console config map ip precedence Console config map ip precedence Interface Configuration This command sets IP precedence priority i e IP Type of Service priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip precedence ip precedence value cos cos value no map ip precedence precedence value 3 bit precedence value Range 0 7 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting The list below shows the default priority mapping Table 31 5 Mapping IP Precedence to CoS Values IP Precedence Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CoS Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a one to one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802 1p standard and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip precedence 1 cos 0 Conso
367. l Example This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree spanning disabled Console config if 29 11 29 Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree cost This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface Use the no form to restore the default auto configuration mode Syntax spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The path cost for the port Range 0 for auto configuration 1 65535 for short path cost method35 1 200 000 000 for long path cost method Table 29 2 Recommended STA Path Cost Range Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Fast Ethernet 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 3 10 2 000 200 000 Table 29 3 Recommended STA Path Cost Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 4 10 000 Trunk 3 5 000 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Table 29 4 Default STA Path Costs
368. l based VLANs 30 show interfaces protocol vian protocol group This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs for the selected interfaces Syntax show interfaces protocol vian protocol group interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting The mapping for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows that traffic entering Port 1 that matches the specifications for protocol group 1 will be mapped to VLAN 2 Console show interfaces protocol vlan protocol group Port ProtocolGroup ID Vlan ID Eth 1 1 1 vlan2 Console 30 19 30 VLAN Commands Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ tunneling uses a single Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN for customers who have multiple VLANs Customer VLAN IDs are preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service provider s network even when they use the same customer specific VLAN IDs QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN in VLAN hierarchy preserving the customer s original tagged packets and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame also called double tagging This section describes commands used to configure QinQ tunneling Table 30 8 IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Commands Command Function Mode Page system mode Configures the switch to operate in normal mode o
369. lass map rd_class 1_ match any Console config cmap match ip dscp 3 Console config cmap exit Console config access list ip mask precedence in Console config ip mask acl mask any any dscp Console config ip mask acl1 This example creates a class map call rd_class 2 and sets it to match packets marked for IP Precedence service value 5 Console Console Console Console Console Console config class map rd_class 2 match any config cmap match ip precedence 5 config cmap exit config access list ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask any any precedence config ip mask acl 32 3 3 2 Quality of Service Commands This example creates a class map call rd_class 3 and sets it to match packets marked for VLAN 1 Console Console Console Console Console Console config class map rd_class 3 match any config cmap match vlan 1 config cmap exit config access list mac mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask any any vid 1 config ip mask acl policy map This command creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces and enters Policy Map configuration mode Use the no form to delete a policy map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no policy map policy map name policy map name Name of the policy map Range 1 32 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use the policy
370. lays current snooping and query settings and displays the multicast service and group members IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering 33 6 Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 33 10 Multicast VLAN Registration Configures a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts 33 11 IGMP Snooping Commands This section describes commands used to configure IGMP snooping on the switch Table 33 2 IGMP Snooping Commands multicast Command Function Mode Page ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 33 2 ip igmp snooping vian static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 33 2 ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 33 3 ip igmp snooping Suppresses leave messages unless received from the last GC 33 3 leave proxy member port in the group ip igmp snooping Immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service if IC 33 4 immediate leave a leave packetis received at that port and immediate leave is enabled for the parent VLAN show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 33 5 show mac address table Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 33 6 33 1 33 Multicast Filtering Commands ip igmp snooping This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global C
371. le config if 31 10 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 31 map ip dscp Global Configuration This command enables IP DSCP mapping i e Differentiated Services Code Point mapping Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping Syntax no map ip dscp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these priority types will automatically disable the other type Example The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally Console config map ip dscp Console config map ip dscp Interface Configuration This command sets IP DSCP priority i e Differentiated Services Code Point priority Use the no form to restore the default table Syntax map ip dscp dscp value cos cos value no map ip dscp e dscp value 8 bit DSCP value Range 0 63 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 31 11 3 4 Class of Service Commands Default Setting The DSCP default values are defined in the following table Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0 Table 31 6 Mapping IP DSCP to CoS Values IP DSCP Value CoS Value 0 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 48 46 56 NN OD oy AJ wl NI gt j o
372. le 5 1 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels Model Level Group Read View Write View Notify View Security v1 noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none none Community string only read only v1 noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview none Community string only read write v1 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only v2c noAuthNoPriv public defaultview none none Community string only read only v2c noAuthNoPriv private defaultview defaultview none Community string only read write v2c noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only v3 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined A user name match only v3 AuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms v3 AuthPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user authentication via MD5 or SHA algorithms and data privacy using DES 56 bit encryption Note The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system You can then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access Enabling the SNMP Agent Enables SNMPV3 service for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Command Attributes SNMP Agent Status Enables S
373. le config tacacs server port 181 Console config tacacs server key This command sets the TACACS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server key key_string no tacacs server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server key green Console config 21 10 Web Server Commands 21 show tacacs server This command displays the current settings for the TACACS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show tacacs server Remote TACACS server configuration Server IP address 0 I1 12 13 Communication key with TACACS server Server port number 49 Console Web Server Commands This section describes commands used to configure web browser management access to the switch Table 21 7 Web Server Commands Command Function Mode Page ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 21 11 ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 21 12 ip http secure server Enables HTTPS HTTP SSL for encrypted communications GC 21 12 ip http secure port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 21 13 ip http port This command spe
374. learning addresses The rules defining port status are A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is always forwarding If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other STA device attached to this segment the port with the smaller ID forwards packets and the other is discarding All ports are discarding when the switch is booted then some of them change state to learning and then to forwarding Forward Transitions The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to the Forwarding state Designated Cost The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the current Spanning Tree configuration The slower the media the higher the cost Designated Bridge The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree 11 10 Displaying Interface Settings 4 1 Designated Port The port priority and number of the port on the designated bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Oper Path Cost The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the spanning tree root which include this port Oper Link Type The operational point to point status of the LAN segment attached to this interface This parameter is determined by manual configuration or by auto detection as described for Admin Li
375. led Enabled Enabled tom 3 C Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled 4 C Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled 6 C Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled x Figure 8 8 ACL Port Binding CLI This examples assigns an IP and MAC ingress ACL to port 1 and an IP ingress ACL to port 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if ip access group tom in 23 11 Console config if mac access group jerry in 23 18 Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if ip access group tom in Console config if exit Console config if 8 14 Chapter 9 Port Configuration Displaying Connection Status You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current connection status including link state speed duplex mode flow control and auto negotiation Field Attributes Web Name Interface label Type Indicates port type 100BASE TX 100BASE BX 1000BASE T or SFP Admin Status Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled Oper Status Indicates if the link is Up or Down Speed Duplex Status Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Flow Control Status Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or None Autonegotiation Shows if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled Media Type Shows the forced preferred port ty
376. line disconnect This command terminates an SSH Telnet or console connection Syntax disconnect session id session id The session identifier for an SSH Telnet or console connection Range 0 4 19 26 Line Commands 4 9 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage Specifying session identifier 0 will disconnect the console connection Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or Telnet connection Example Console disconnect 1 Console Related Commands show ssh 21 22 show users 19 7 show line This command displays the terminal line s parameters Syntax show line console vty console Console terminal line e vty Virtual terminal for remote console access i e Telnet Default Setting Shows all lines Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example To show all lines enter this command Console show line Console configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout Disabled Login timeout Disabled Silent time Disabled Baudrate auto Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 VTY configuration Password threshold 3 times Interactive timeout 600 sec Login timeout 300 sec Console 19 27 A 9 System Management Commands Event Logging Commands This section describes commands used to configure event logging on the switch Table 19 9 Event Logging Commands Co
377. lly selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority or disables 13 7 DSCP Priority Status both IP Precedence Priority Sets IP Type of Service priority mapping the precedence tag to 13 8 a Class of service value IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority mapping a 13 10 DSCP tag to a class of service value IP Port Priority Status Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority 13 11 IP Port Priority Sets TCP UDP port priority defining the socket number and 13 8 associated class of service value 3 Configuring the Switch Table 3 2 Switch Main Menu Continued Menu Description Page Qos 14 1 DiffServ Configure QoS classification criteria and service policies 14 1 Class Map Creates a class map for a type of traffic 14 2 Policy Map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces 14 5 Service Policy Applies a policy map defined to an ingress port 14 8 IGMP Snooping 15 2 IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering configures parameters for multicast 15 3 query Multicast Router Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast 15 5 Port Information router for each VLAN ID Static Multicast Router Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 15 6 Port Configuration IP Multicast Registration Displays all multicast groups active on this switch including 15 7 Table multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID IGM
378. lly sent mail during the last connection or the first server configured by this command If it fails to send mail the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to send mail again If it still fails the system will repeat the process at a periodic interval A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a connection Example Console config logging sendmail host 192 168 1 19 Console config logging sendmail level This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages Syntax logging sendmail level evel level One of the system message levels page 19 29 Messages sent include the selected level down to level 0 Range 0 7 Default 7 Default Setting Level 7 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The specified level indicates an event threshold All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Example This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 3 through 0 Console config logging sendmail level 3 Console config logging sendmail source email This command sets the email address used for the From field in alert messages Syntax logging sendmail source email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters 19 35 A 9 System Management Command
379. ltiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s 11 3 A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm e Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree This is always 0 for the CIST e VLANs configuration VLANs assigned to the CIST e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority i e lower numeric value becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device e Root Hello Time Interval in seconds at which this device transmits a configuration message e Root Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds this device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals If the root port ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section means interfaces which includes both ports and trunks Root Forward Delay The maximum time in seconds this device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs tim
380. m transmission rate for BPDUs Example Console config spanning tree transmission limit 4 Console config spanning tree mst configuration This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree MST configuration mode Default Setting No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance The region name is set the switch s MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config spanning tree mst configuration Console config mstp 29 7 29 Spanning Tree Commands Related Commands mst vlan 29 8 mst priority 29 9 name 29 9 revision 29 10 max hops 29 11 mst vian This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance Use the no form to remove the specified VLANs Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all VLANs Syntax no mst instance_id vlan vlan range instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 vian range Range of VLANs Range 1 4093 Default Setting none Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage e Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance This provides multiple pathways across the network thereby balancing the traffic load preventing wide scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Intern
381. mand on page 29 6 to set the path cost method 29 16 spanning tree mst port priority 29 Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 cost 50 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst port priority 29 17 spanning tree mst port priority This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the Multiple Spanning Tree Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree mst instance_id port priority priority no spanning tree mst instance_id port priority e instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes e priority Priority for an interface Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Default Setting 128 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple spanning tree If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same the interface with the highest priority that is lowest value will be configured as an active link in the spanning tree Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority the interface with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Example Console config interface ethernet ethernet 1 5 Console config if spanning tree mst 1 port priority 0 Console config if Related Commands spanning tree mst cost 29 16 29 17 29
382. mand to set the number of addresses and then use the port security command to enable security on the port e Use the no port security max mac count command to disable port security and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default e You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac address table static command e A secure port has the following restrictions Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device Cannot be a trunk port e Ifa portis disabled due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled using the no shutdown command IP Source Guard Commands 22 Example The following example enables port security for port 5 and sets the response to a security violation to issue a trap message Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if port security action trap Related Commands shutdown 24 6 mac address table static 28 1 IP Source Guard Commands IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table or static and dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled see DHCP Snooping Commands on page 22 7 IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard Table 22 3 IP Source Guard Commands Command F
383. mands end 18 4 show history This command shows the contents of the command history buffer Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and 10 Configuration commands Example In this example the show history command lists the contents of the command history buffer Console show history Execution command history 2 config 1 show history Configuration command history 4 interface vlan 1 3 exit 2 interface vlan 1 1 end Console The command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode and commands from the Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration modes In this example the 2 command repeats the second command in the Execution history buffer config Console 2 Consolet tconfig Console config 18 3 4 8 General Commands reload This command restarts the system Note When the system is restarted it will always run the Power On Self Test It will also retain all configuration information stored in non volatile memory by the copy running config startup config command Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage This command resets the entire system Example This example shows how to reset the switch Console reload System will be restarted continue lt y
384. mapping globally Console config map ip port Console config 31 8 Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 31 map ip port Interface Configuration This command sets IP port priority i e TCP UDP port priority Use the no form to remove a specific setting Syntax map ip port port number cos cos value no map ip port port number port number 16 bit TCP UDP port number Range 0 65535 cos value Class of Service value Range 0 7 Default Setting None Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority Up to 8 entries can be specified for IP Port priority mapping This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces Example The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if map ip port 80 cos 0 Console config if map ip precedence Global Configuration This command enables IP precedence mapping i e IP Type of Service Use the no form to disable IP precedence mapping Syntax no map ip precedence Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port IP Precedence or IP DSCP and default switchport priority IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled Enabling one of these prior
385. maximum path cost is 65 535 By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 The recommended range is listed in Table 11 1 on page 11 14 The recommended path cost islisted in Table 11 2 on page 11 14 The default path costs are listed in Table 11 3 on page 11 14 Web Click Spanning Tree MSTP Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration Enter the priority and path cost for an interface and click Apply MSTP Port Configuration MST Instance ID 0 gt Port STA State Priority Admin MST Path Cost Trunk 0 240 in steps of 16 1 200000000 0 Auto 1 Forwarding 128 Ne 2 Forwarding 128 fo 3 Discarding 128 llo 4 Discarding f0 50 5 Discarding 128 10 zi Figure 11 7 MSTP Port Configuration CLI This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4 Console config interface ethernet 1 4 24 1 Console config if spanning tree mst port priority 0 29 17 Console config if spanning tree mst cost 50 29 16 Console config if 11 21 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm 11 22 Chapter 12 VLAN Configuration IEEE 802 1Q VLANs In large networks routers are used to isolate br
386. mber of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error 64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames 1519 1536 Byte Frames The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 9 23 9 Port Configuration Web Click Port Port Statistics Select the required interface and click Query You can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen Port Statistics Interface G Pon 1 gt C Trunk Query Interface Statistics Received Octets 15020 Received Unicast Packets D Received Multicast 177 Received Broadcast 0 Packets Packets Received Discarded g Recewed Unknown 0 Packets Packets _ me Received Errors O Transmit Octets 168087 Transmit Multicast iis Unicast Facken IlPackets i 2420 Transmit Broadcast 47 Transmit Discarded
387. me size MTU for Gigabit Ethernet ports Range 1500 9216 bytes Web Click System System MTU Set the maximum frame size for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports then click Apply System MTU Configuration System MTU 1500 1548 1528 bytes Jumbo 1500 9216 1518 bytes Figure 4 3 System MTU Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames 4 CLI This example sets the MTU for Fast Ethernet ports to 1528 bytes Console config system mtu 1528 19 11 Console config exit Console show system mtu 19 11 System MTU size is 1528 Bytes System Jumbo MTU size is 1518 Bytes Console Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames The switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes for Gigabit Ethernet Compared to standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1 5 KB using jumbo frames significantly reduces the per packet overhead required to process protocol encapsulation fields Frame sizes for Fast Ethernet ports can be extended up to 1546 bytes and are used primarily to allow for additional header fields not to significantly increase the per packet data size Command Usage To use jumbo frames both the source and destination end nodes such as a computer or server must support this feature Also when the connection is operating at full duplex all switches in the network between the two end nodes must be able to accept the extended frame size
388. ment Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the CLI program Note An IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default 2 4 Basic Configuration 2 Before you can assign an IP address to the switch you must obtain the following information from your network administrator IP address for the switch e Network mask for this network Default gateway for the network To assign an IP address to the switch complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 Type ip address jp address netmask where ip address is the switch IP address and netmask is the network mask for the network Press lt Enter gt 3 Type exit to return to the global configuration mode prompt Press lt Enter gt 4 To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch belongs type ip default gateway gateway where gateway is the IP address of the default gateway Press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 24 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 35 1 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 254 35 2 Console config Dynamic Configuration If you select the bootp or dhcp opti
389. mmand Function Mode Page logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 19 28 logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on GC 19 29 severity logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC 19 30 messages logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 19 30 logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on GC 19 31 severity clear log Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 19 31 show logging Displays the state of logging PE 19 32 show log Displays log messages PE 19 33 logging on This command controls logging of error messages sending debug or error messages to a logging process The no form disables the logging process Syntax no logging on Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory or sent to remote syslog servers You can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages that are stored in memory You can use the logging trap command to control the type of error messages that are sent to specified syslog servers Example Console config logging on Console config Related Commands logging history 19 29 logging trap 19 31 clear log 19 31 19 28 Event Logging Commands 4 9 logging history This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory base
390. mmand with no keywords both authentication and link up down notifications are enabled If you enter the command with a keyword only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled The snmp server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp server host command Use the snmp server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications In order to send notifications you must configure at least one snmp server host command The authentication link up and link down traps are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts they must be enabled in 20 7 2 oO SNMP Commands conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the snmp server group command page 20 11 Example Console config snmp server enable traps link up down Console config Related Commands snmp server host 20 5 snmp server engine id This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine Use the no form to restore the default Syntax snmp server engine id local remote ip address engineid string no snmp server engine id local remote ip address local Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch remote Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device jip address The Internet address of the remote device engineid string String identifying the engine ID Range 10 64 hexadecimal characters Default Setting A u
391. mmands show mvr display description show mvr interface display description show mvr members display description DNS Commands show dns cache display description Basic IP Configuration Commands Troubleshooting Chart Tables 30 20 31 1 31 1 31 5 31 8 31 10 31 12 32 1 33 1 33 1 33 6 33 10 33 11 33 15 33 15 33 16 34 1 34 7 35 1 B 1 xxi Tables xxii Figures Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Figure 4 8 Figure 4 9 Figure 4 10 Figure 4 11 Figure 4 12 Figure 4 13 Figure 4 14 Figure 4 15 Figure 4 16 Figure 4 17 Figure 4 18 Figure 4 19 Figure 4 20 Figure 4 21 Figure 4 22 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Home Page Front Panel Indicators System Information System Mode System MTU Configuring Support for Jumbo Frames Switch Information Displaying Bridge Extension Configuration IP Interface Configuration Manual IP Interface Configuration DHCP Copy Firmware Setting the Startup Code Deleting Files Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up Setting the Startup Configuration Settings Configuring the Console Port Configuring the Telnet Interface System Logs Remote Logs Displaying Logs Enabling and Configuring SMT
392. mple To set the timeout to two minutes enter this command Console config line exec timeout 120 Console config line password thresh This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of failed logon attempts Use the no form to remove the threshold value Syntax password thresh threshold no password thresh threshold The number of allowed password attempts Range 1 120 0 no threshold Default Setting The default value is three attempts Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When the logon attempt threshold is reached the system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt Use the silent time command to set this interval When this threshold is reached for Telnet the Telnet logon interface shuts down Example To set the password threshold to five attempts enter this command Console config line password thresh 5 Console config line Related Commands silent time 19 24 19 23 4 9 System Management Commands silent time This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the password thresh command Use the no form to remove the silent time value Syntax silent time seconds no silent time seconds The number of seconds to disable console response Range 0 65535 0 no silent time Default
393. n Mode Page mac address table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 28 1 show mac address table Displays entries in the bridge forwarding database PE 28 3 22 1 22 Client Security Commands port security This command enables or configures port security Use the no form without any keywords to disable port security Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum number of allowed addresses Syntax port security action shutdown trap trap and shutdown max mac count address count no port security action max mac count action Response to take when port security is violated shutdown Disable port only trap Issue SNMP trap message only trap and shutdown Issue SNMP trap message and disable port max mac count address count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Default Setting Status Disabled Action None e Maximum Addresses 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage 22 2 e If you enable port security the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be accepted e First use the port security max mac count com
394. n gt y This example shows how to copy a public key used by SSH from an TFTP server Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured locally on the switch Console copy tftp public key TFTP server IP address 192 168 1 19 Choose public key type 1 RSA 2 DSA lt 1 2 gt 1 Source file name steve pub Username steve TFTP Download Success Write to FLASH Programming Success Console delete This command deletes a file or image Syntax delete filename filename Name of configuration file or code image Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 19 15 4 9 System Management Commands Command Usage If the file type is used for system startup then this file cannot be deleted e Factory_Default_Config cfg cannot be deleted Example This example shows how to delete the test2 cfg configuration file from flash memory Console delete test2 cfg Console Related Commands dir 19 16 delete public key 21 20 dir This command displays a list of files in flash memory Syntax dir boot rom config opcode filename The type of file or image to display includes boot rom Boot ROM or diagnostic image file config Switch configuration file opcode Run time operation code image file filename Name of configuration file or code image If this file exists but contains errors information on this file cann
395. n gt y prompt This command customizes the CLI prompt Use the no form to restore the default prompt Syntax prompt string no prompt string Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt Maximum length 255 characters Default Setting Console Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config prompt RD2 RD2 config end This command returns to Privileged Exec mode Default Setting None 18 4 exit 4 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface Configuration mode Console config if end Console exit This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Any Example This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global Configuration mode and then quit the CLI session Console config exit Console exit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username quit This command exits the configuration program Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program 18 5 4 8 General Commands Example This example shows how to quit a CLI sessi
396. n only belong to one MST region And all bridges in the same region must be configured with the same MST instances Example Console config mstp revision 1 Console config mstp Related Commands name 29 9 29 10 max hops 2 9 max hops This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded Use the no form to restore the default Syntax max hops hop number hop number Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree Range 1 40 Default Setting 20 Command Mode MST Configuration Command Usage An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols Therefore the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never changed However each spanning tree instance within a region and the internal spanning tree IST that connects these instances use a hop count to specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU Each bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU When the hop count reaches zero the message is dropped Example Console config mstp max hops 30 Console config mstp spanning tree spanning disabled This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Use the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface Syntax no spanning tree spanning disabled Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channe
397. name server must be specified before you can enable DNS Ifall name servers are deleted DNS will automatically be disabled 34 5 34 Domain Name Service Commands Example This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration Console config ip domain lookup Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 11 55 1 1055 Related Commands ip domain name 34 3 ip name server 34 4 show hosts This command displays the static host name to address mapping table Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 19 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console 34 6 show dns 34 show dns This command displays the configuration of the DNS service Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS enabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name List sample com jp sample com uk Name Server List 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console show dns cache This command displays entries in the DNS cache Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show dns cache NO FLAG TYPE TP TTL DOMAIN 2 4 CNAME 66 218 71 84 298 www yahoo akadns net 3 4 CNA
398. nfig interface ethernet 1 10 Console config if channel group 1 Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 24 9 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A2 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by User Link status Up Port operation status Up Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 9 Eth1 10 Console Enabling LACP on Selected Ports Command Usage e To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure dynamically you enable LACP before connecting the ports enabled and also disconnect the ports before disabling Z LACP SLO GLP Ifthe target switch has also enabled LACP onthe aclive__7 _Packup connected ports the trunk will be activated automatically MEAE A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned the next available configured trunk ID members If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP enabled the additional ports will be placed in standby mode and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex either by forced mode or auto negotiation e Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown
399. ng copy running config startup config Enter the startup file name and press lt Enter gt Console config interface vlan 1 24 1 Console config if ip address dhcp B57 Console config if end Console ip dhcp restart 35 3 Console show ip interface 35 4 IP address and netmask 192 168 1 54 255 255 255 0 on VLAN 1 and address mode DHCP Console copy running config startup config 19 13 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Enabling SNMP Management Access The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP applications such as HP OpenView You can configure the switch to 1 respond to SNMP requests or 2 generate SNMP traps When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch either to return information or to set a parameter the switch provides the requested data or sets the specified parameter The switch can also be configured to send information to SNMP managers without being requested by the managers through trap messages which inform the manager that certain events have occurred The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1 2c and 3 clients To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients you must specify a community string The switch provides a default MIB View i e an SNMPv3 construct for the default public community string that provides re
400. ng synchronization long timeout Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning or if application programs are not well designed or properly configured If there is too much broadcast traffic on your network performance can be severely degraded or everything can come to complete halt You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for broadcast traffic for each port Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then be dropped Command Usage Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic The resolution is 1 packet per second pps i e any setting between 500 262143 is acceptable Note Multicast and unicast storm thresholds can also be set using the CLI see the switchport packet rate command on page 24 7 Command Attributes Port 2 Port number Trunk 3 Trunk number Type Indicates port type 10OBASE TX14 100BASE BX 5 1000BASE T or SFP Protect Status Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled Default Enabled 12 Port Broadcast Control 13 Trunk Broadcast Control 14 ES3528 15 ES3528 WDM 9 17 9 Port Configuration Threshold Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth Options 500 262143 packets per second Default 500 pps
401. ng Remote SNMPv3 Users CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 20 14 Console config exit Console show snmp user 20 15 No user exist SNMP remote user EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 User Name mark Authentication Protocol none Privacy Protocol none Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console 5 12 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 5 An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users restricting them to specific read write and notify views You can use the pre defined default groups or create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views Command Attributes Group Name The name of the SNMP group Range 1 32 characters Model The group security model SNMP v1 v2c or v3 e Level The security level used for the group noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model e Read View The configured view for read access Range 1 64 characters Write
402. ng has been enabled with the snmp server enable traps command 20 2 Example Console show snmp SNMP Agent enabled SNMP traps Authentication enable Link up down enable SNMP communities 1 private and the privilege is read write 2 public and the privilege is read only 0 SNMP packets input Bad SNMP version errors Unknown community name Illegal operation for community name supplied Encoding errors Number of requested variables Number of altered variables Get request PDUs Get next PDUs Set request PDUs 0 SNMP packets output Too big errors No such name errors Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs oo0o0o000c0 00 oo0oc000 SNMP logging disabled Console snmp server community This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string Use the no form to remove the specified community string Syntax snmp server community string ro rw no snmp server community string e string Community string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Maximum length 32 characters case sensitive Maximum number of strings 5 ro Specifies read only access Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB objects e rw Specifies read write access Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects Default Setting public Read only access Authorized management stations are only abl
403. ng memory to the information stored in non volatile memory e This command displays settings for key command modes Each mode group is separated by symbols and includes the configuration mode command and corresponding commands This command displays the following information MAC address for the switch SNTP server settings SNMP community strings Users names and access levels VLAN database VLAN ID name and state VLAN configuration settings for each interface Multiple spanning tree instances name and interfaces 19 2 System Status Commands IP address Layer 4 precedence settings Spanning tree settings Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet Example Console show startup config building startup config please wait lt stackingDB gt 00 lt stackingDB gt lt stackingMac gt 01_00 12 cf 21 dc e0_01 lt stackingMac gt phymap 00 12 cf 21 dc e0 SNTP server 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 snmp server community public ro snmp server community private rw username admin access level 15 username admin password 7 21232 297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3 username guest access level 0 username guest password 7 084e0343a0486f f05530df6c705c8bb4 enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7alf 783edd 27d254ca vlan database vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active spanning tree MST configuration interface ethernet 1 1 switchport allowed vlan a
404. ngs 10 1 Setting Static Addresses 10 1 Displaying the Address Table 10 2 Changing the Aging Time 10 4 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Algorithm 11 1 Displaying Global Settings 11 3 Configuring Global Settings 11 6 Displaying Interface Settings 11 10 Configuring Interface Settings 11 13 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 11 16 Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 11 19 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 11 20 Chapter 12 VLAN Configuration 12 1 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs 12 1 Enabling or Disabling GVRP Global Setting 12 4 vii Contents Displaying Basic VLAN Information Displaying Current VLANs Creating VLANs Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel Configuring Private VLANs Enabling Private VLANs Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Configuring Protocol Based VLANs Configuring Protocol Groups Mapping Protocols to VLANs Chapter 13 Class of Service Layer 2 Queue Settings Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues Selecting the Queue Mode Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes Layer 3 4 Priority Settings Mapping Layer 3 4 Priorities to CoS Values Selecting IP Precedence DSCP Priority Mapping IP Precedence Mapping DSCP Priority Mapping IP Port Priority Chapter 14 Quality of Service Configuring Quality of Service Parame
405. ning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses e Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Configuration only The following interface attributes can be configured MST Instance ID Instance identifier to configure Range 0 4094 Default 0 e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree 11 20 Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 4 1 Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled e Default 128 e Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Admin MST Path Cost This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority Note that when the Path Cost Method is set to short page 3 63 the
406. nique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC address Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this switch or on a remote device This engine protects against message replay delay and redirection The engine ID is also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets e A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs See snmp server host on page 20 5 The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent For informs the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent You therefore need to configure the remote agent s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests or informs to it e Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID In other words the value 0123456789 is equivalent to 0123456789 followed by 22 zeroes 20 8 show snmp engine id 20 A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch This is referred to as the default engine ID If the local engine ID is deleted or changed all SNMP users will be cleared You will need to reconfigure all existing users page 20 14 Example Console config snmp server engine id loc
407. nk Type in STA Port Configuration on page 11 13 Oper Edge Port This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port in STA Port Configuration on page 11 13 i e true or false but will be set to false if a BPDU is received indicating that another bridge is attached to this port Port Role Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge i e root port connecting a LAN through the bridge to the root bridge i e designated port or is the MSTI regional root i e master port or is an alternate or backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges bridge ports or LANs fail or are removed The role is set to disabled i e disabled port if a port has no role within the spanning tree useful BPDUs from another A Alternate Port bridge and is therefore not D Designated Port selected as the designated B Backup Port port R R Alternate port receives more T R Root Port Al Backup port receives more useful BPDUs from the same bridge and is therefore not selected as the designated ort R R p A D B x yy Trunk Member Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk STA Port Information only 11 11 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI e Admin status Shows if this interface is enabled External
408. nks can be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802 3 2005 formerly IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput across any connection and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk should fail The switch supports up to 12 trunks Storm Control Broadcast and multicast storm suppression prevents traffic from overwhelming the network When enabled on a port the level of traffic passing through the port is restricted If traffic rises above a pre defined threshold it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold Static MAC Addresses A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table Static addresses can be used to provide network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port IP Address Filtering Access to unsecure ports can be controlled using DHCP Snooping and IP Source Guard which filters ingress traffic based on static IP addresses and addresses stored in the DHCP Snooping table IEEE 802 1D Bridge The switch supports IEEE 802 1D transparent bridging The address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses and then filtering or forwarding traffic
409. nmp server user steve group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien Console config snmp server user mark group r amp d remote 192 168 1 19 v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien show snmp user This command shows information on SNMP users Command Mode Privileged Exec Example User Name steve SNMP remote user User Name mark Console show snmp user EngineId 800000ca030030 1d 9ca00000 Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active EngineId 80000000030004e2b316c54321 Authentication Protocol mdt Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console Table 20 5 show snmp user display description Field Description Engineld String identifying the engine ID User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent Authentication Protocol The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3 Privacy Protocol Storage Type The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3 The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device 20 15 2 Oo SNMP Commands 20 16 Chapter 21 User Authentication Commands You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods Port based authentication using IEEE 802
410. no media type mode copper forced Always uses the built in RJ 45 port sfp forced Always uses the SFP port even if module not installed sfp preferred auto Uses SFP port if both combination types are functioning and the SFP port has a valid link Default Setting sfp preferred auto Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Ports 27 28 Example This forces the switch to use the built in RJ 45 port for the combination port 28 Console config interface ethernet 1 28 Console config if media type copper forced Console config if shutdown This command disables an interface To restart a disabled interface use the no form Syntax no shutdown Default Setting All interfaces are enabled 24 6 switchport packet rate 24 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior e g excessive collisions and then reenable it after the problem has been resolved You may also want to disable a port for security reasons Example The following example disables port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if shutdown Console config if switchport packet rate This command configures broadcast and multicast storm control Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport broadcast multicast packet rate rate no switchport broadcast broadcast Sp
411. ns PE 21 22 show public key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 21 23 show users Shows SSH users including privilege level and public key type PE 19 7 Configuration Guidelines The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key authentication If password authentication is specified by the SSH client then the password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS remote authentication server as specified by the authentication login command on page 21 4 If public key authentication is specified by the client then you must configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the following section Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password authentication you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and enable the SSH server 21 15 2 4 User Authentication Commands To use the SSH server complete these steps 1 Generate a Host Key Pair Use the ip ssh crypto host key generate command to create a host public private key pair Provide Host Public Key to Clients Many SSH client programs automatically import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch Otherwise you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management station and place the host public key in it An entry for a public key in the known hosts file would appear similar to the following example
412. nse time 0 ms Ping statistics for 10 1 0 9 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 100 0 packets lost 0 Approximate round trip times Minimum 0 ms Maximum 10 ms Average 8 ms Console Related Commands interface 24 1 35 6 Section IV Appendices This section provides additional information on the following topics Software Specifications 00 000 es Troubleshooting Glossary Index Appendices Appendix A Software Specifications Software Features Authentication Local RADIUS TACACS Port 802 1X HTTPS SSH Port Security Access Control Lists IP MAC Fast Ethernet ports 157 rules 4 masks shared by 8 port groups Gigabit Ethernet ports 29 rules 4 masks DHCP Client DNS Proxy Port Configuration 100BASE BX 100 Mbps at full duplex 100BASE TX 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000BASE T 10 100 Mbps at half full duplex 1000 Mbps at full duplex 1000BASE SX LX LH BX 1000 Mbps at full duplex SFP Flow Control Full Duplex IEEE 802 3x Half Duplex Back pressure Broadcast Storm Control Traffic throttled above a critical threshold Port Mirroring Single session one source port to one destination port Rate Limits Input Limit Output limit Range configured per port Port Trunking Static trunks Cisco EtherChannel compliant Dynamic trunks Link Aggregation Control Protocol Spanning Tree Algorithm Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Rapid Spanning Tre
413. nsole config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any Console config ext acl This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP Console config ext acl permit 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config ext acl Related Commands access list ip 23 2 show ip access list This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs Syntax show ip access list standard extended ac _name e standard Specifies a standard IP ACL extended Specifies an extended IP ACL acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip access list standard IP standard access list david permit host 10 1 1 21 permit 168 92 0 0 255 255 15 0 Console Related Commands permit deny 23 2 ip access group 23 11 23 5 2 3 Access Control List Commands access list ip mask precedence This command changes to the IP Mask mode used to configure access control masks Use the no form to delete the mask table Syntax no access list ip mask precedence in out e in Ingress mask for ingress ACLs
414. nt a number of queries defined by the ip igmp snooping query count but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this command If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client is considered to have left the multicast group Example The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time 20 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 33 3 ip igmp snooping router port expire time This command configures the query timeout Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds no ip igmp snooping router port expire time seconds The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 Default Setting 300 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must use IGMPv2 or v3 snooping for this command to take effect Example The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping router port expire time 300 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping version 33 3 33 9 33 Multicast Filtering Commands Static Multicast Routing Commands This section describes commands used to configure static
415. nter the down state from some other state but not from the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus 5 13 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Table 5 2 Supported Notification Messages Continued Object Label Object ID Description linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity acting in an agent role has detected that the ifOperStatus object for one of its communication links left the down state and transitioned into some other state but not into the notPresent state This other state is indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity acting in an agent role has received a protocol message that is not properly authenticated While all implementations of the SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this trap the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates whether this trap will be generated RMON Events V2 risingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps fallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 0 2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and generates an event that is configured for sending SNMP traps Private Traps swPowerStatus ChangeTrap 1 3
416. nticated Reauth Count 0 Backend State Machine State Idle Request Count 0 Identifier Server 2 Reauthentication State Machine State Initialize Console Mode ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized ForceAuthorized Auto Authorized n a n a yes yes 21 32 Management IP Filter Commands 21 Management IP Filter Commands This section describes commands used to configure IP management access to the switch Table 21 13 Management IP Filter Commands Command Function Mode Page management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 21 33 show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser PE 21 34 management This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax no management all client http client snmp client telnet client start address end address all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group snmp client Adds IP address es to the SNMP group telnet client Adds IP address es to the Telnet group start address A single IP address or the starting address of a range end address The end address of a range Default Setting All addresses Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If anyone tries
417. ny point within the network This switch uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs EAPOL to exchange authentication protocol messages with the client and a remote RADIUS authentication server to verify user identity and access RADIUS rights When a client i e Pepa Supplicant connects to a switch port the switch i e Authenticator responds with an EAPOL identity request The client provides its identity Such as a user name in an EAPOL response to the switch which it forwards to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and sends an access challenge back to the client The EAP packet from the RADIUS server contains not only the challenge but the authentication method to be used The client can reject the authentication method and request another depending on the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server The encryption method used to pass authentication messages can be MD5 Message Digest 5 TLS Transport Layer Security or TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security PEAP will be supported in future releases The client responds to the appropriate method with its credentials such as a password or certificate The RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject packet If authentication is successful the switch allows the client to access the network Otherwise network access is denied and the port remains blocked 802 1x client
418. o 16 rules per Class Map You can also include multiple classes in a Policy Map 2 You should create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map Otherwise you will not be able to select a Class Map from the Policy Rule Settings screen see page 14 7 Configuring Quality of Service Parameters To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic follow these steps 1 Use the Class Map to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic 2 Edit the rules for each class to specify a type of traffic based on an access list a DSCP or IP Precedence value or a VLAN 3 Set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the Class Map See Configuring an IP ACL Mask on page 8 10 or Configuring a MAC ACL Mask on page 8 12 4 Use the Policy Map to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which ingress traffic will be handled 5 Add one or more classes to the Policy Map Assign policy rules to each class by setting the QoS value to be assigned to the matching traffic class The policy rule can also be configured to monitor the average flow and burst rate and drop any traffic that exceeds the specified rate or just reduce the DSCP service level for traffic exceeding the specified rate 14 1 4 4 Quality of Service 6 Use the Service Policy to assign a policy map to a specific interface Configuring a Class Map A class map is used for matching packets
419. o IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frames If the incoming frame is an IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagged frame the IEEE 802 1p User Priority bits will be used e This switch provides eight priority queues for each port It is configured to use Weighted Round Robin which can be viewed with the show queue bandwidth command Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are tagged with the input port s default ingress user priority and then placed in the appropriate priority queue at the output port The default priority for all ingress ports is zero Therefore any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will be placed in queue 0 of the output port Note that if the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN these frames are stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission Example The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 Console config if switchport priority default 5 31 3 3 4 Class of Service Commands Related Commands show interfaces switchport 24 11 queue bandwidth This command assigns weighted round robin WRR weights to the eight class of service CoS priority queues Use the no form to restore the default weights Syntax queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 no queue bandwidth weight1 weight4 The ratio of weights for queues 0 7 determines the weights used by the WRR scheduler Range 1 15 Default Setting Weights 1 2 4 6 8
420. o STP forced compatibility mode RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w RSTP is the default MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s e Priority Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device root port and designated port The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device However if all devices have the same priority the device with the lowest MAC 17 STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames and will cross any VLAN boundaries 11 6 Configuring Global Settings 4 41 address will then become the root device Note that lower numeric values indicate higher priority e Default 32768 e Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 e Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 61440 Root Device Configuration e Hello Time Interval in seconds at which the root device transmits a configuration message e Default 2 e Minimum 1 e Maximum The lower of 10 or Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the d
421. o a QinQ Tunnel Follow the guidelines in the preceding section to set up a QinQ tunnel on the switch Use the VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration screen to set the ingress port on the edge switch to dot1Q tunnel mode Also set the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of the tunnel port if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames Command Usage e Use the System Mode screen to set the switch to QinQ mode before configuring a tunnel port see Configuring the Switch for Normal Operation or Tunneling Mode on page 4 3 e Use the TPID field to set a custom 802 1Q ethertype value on the selected interface This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames For example 0x1234 is set as the custom 802 1Q ethertype on a trunk port incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the ethertype field as they would be with a standard 802 1Q trunk Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged frames and assigned to the native VLAN of that port All members of a VLAN should be set to the same ethertype Command Attributes Mode Set the VLAN membership mode dot1Q Tunnel Default Hybrid Dot1q Tunnel Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ to segregate and preserve customer VLA
422. o parameters to display the spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree CST and for every interface in the tree Use the show spanning tree interface command to display the spanning tree configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree CST Use the show spanning tree mst instance_id command to display the spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree MST For a description of the items displayed under Spanning tree information see Configuring Global Settings on page 11 6 For a description of the items displayed for specific interfaces see Displaying Interface Settings on page 11 10 Example Console tshow spanning tree Spanning tree information Spanning tree mode Spanning tree enable disable Instance Vlans configuration Priority Bridge Hello Time sec Bridge Max Age sec Bridge Forward Delay sec Root Hello Time sec Root Max Age sec Root Forward Delay sec Max hops Remaining hops Designated Root Current root port Current root cost Number of topology changes Last topology changes time Transmission limit Path Cost Method sec MSTP enable 0 1 4093 32768 2 20 15 2 20 15 20 20 32768 0 0000ABCD0000 I 10000 1 22 3 long 29 19 29 Spanning Tree Commands Admin status Designated cost Designated port Designated root Desi
423. oadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This switch supports the following VLAN features Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs End stati
424. ode Normal Exec Privileged Exec 30 13 30 VLAN Commands Example The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1 Console show vlan id 1 VLAN ID 1 Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Console Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN This section describes commands used to configure private VIANs Table 30 6 Private VLAN Commands Command Function Mode Page pvlan Enables and configured private VLANS GC 30 14 show pvlan Displays the configured private VLANS PE 30 15 pvlan This command enables or configures a private VLAN Use the no form to disable the private VLAN Syntax pvlan up link interface list down link interface list no pvian e up link Specifies an uplink interface e down link Specifies a downlink interface Default Setting No private VLANs are defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A private VLAN provides port based security and isolation between ports within the VLAN Data traffic on the downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from the
425. of an instance in the MST Cc 29 17 port priority spanning tree Re checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 29 18 29 1 29 Spanning Tree Commands Table 29 1 Spanning Tree Commands Continued Command Function Mode Page show spanning tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common PE 29 18 spanning tree i e overall bridge a selected interface or an instance within the multiple spanning tree show spanning tree mst Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration PE 29 20 configuration spanning tree This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no spanning tree Default Setting Spanning tree is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The Spanning Tree Algorithm STA can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STA compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down Example This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch Console config spanning tree Console config spanning tree mode This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch Us
426. ogging syslog traps 19 31 to syslog servers 19 30 log in Web interface 3 2 logon authentication 6 1 21 1 22 1 RADIUS client 6 2 21 6 RADIUS server 6 2 21 6 TACACS client 6 2 21 9 TACACS server 6 2 21 9 logon authentication sequence 6 3 21 4 21 5 M main menu 3 4 Management Information Bases MIBs A 3 media type 9 4 mirror port configuring 9 19 26 1 MSTP 29 2 global settings 11 16 29 1 interface settings 11 13 29 1 multicast filtering 15 1 33 1 multicast groups 15 7 33 6 displaying 33 6 static 15 7 33 2 33 6 multicast services configuring 15 8 33 2 displaying 15 7 33 6 multicast storm threshold 24 7 Multicast VLAN Registration See MVR multicast static router port 15 6 33 10 MVR assigning static multicast groups 15 15 setting interface type 15 12 33 13 setting multicast groups 15 10 33 12 specifying a VLAN 15 10 33 12 using immediate leave 15 12 33 13 P password line 19 21 passwords 2 4 administrator setting 6 1 21 2 path cost 11 3 11 12 method 11 7 29 6 STA 11 3 11 12 29 6 port authentication 6 13 21 24 port priority configuring 13 1 31 1 32 1 default ingress 13 1 31 3 STA 11 12 29 13 port security configuring 7 1 22 1 port statistics 9 21 24 10 ports autonegotiation 9 3 24 3 broadcast storm threshold 9 17 24 7 capabilities 9 3 24 4 duplex mode 9 3 24 2 flow control 9 3 forced selectiononcombo ports 9 4 24 6 multicast storm threshold 24 7 speed 9 3
427. ogin This command enables password checking at login Use the no form to disable password checking and allow connections without a password Syntax login local no login local Selects local password checking Authentication is based on the user name specified with the username command Default Setting login local Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage e There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the password line configuration command When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode login local selects authentication via the user name and password specified by the username command i e default setting When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE or Privileged Exec PE mode depending on the user s privilege level 0 or 15 respectively no login selects no authentication When using this method the management interface starts in Normal Exec NE mode e This command controls login authentication via the switch itself To configure user names and passwords for remote authentication servers you must use the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers 19 20 Line Commands 4 9 Example Console config line login local Console config line Related Commands username 21 2 password 19 21 password Thi
428. ole config if Related Commands negotiation 24 3 capabilities 24 4 negotiation This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface Use the no form to disable autonegotiation Syntax no negotiation Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel 24 3 24 Interface Commands Command Usage e When auto negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilities command When auto negotiation is disabled you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed duplex and flowcontrol commands e If autonegotiation is disabled auto MDI MDI X pin signal configuration will also be disabled for the RJ 45 ports Example The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation Console config interface ethernet 1 11 Console config if negotiation Console config if Related Commands capabilities 24 4 speed duplex 24 2 capabilities This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during autonegotiation Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised capability or the no form without parameters to restore the default values Syntax no capabilities 1000full 100full 100half 10full 10half flowcontrol symmetric 1000full Supports 1 Gbps full duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 100half Supports 100 Mbps hal
429. ommand Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Address Type Specifies the source IP address Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to specify a specific host address in the Address field or IP to specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields Options Any Host IP Default Any IP Address Source IP address Subnet Mask A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255 each separated by a period The mask uses 1 bits to indicate match and 0 bits to indicate ignore The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port s to which this ACL has been assigned 8 Access Control Lists Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Then click Add Standard ACL Name david Action IP Address Subnet Mask Remove Permit 10 1 1 21 255 255 255 255 Remove Action Permit x Address Type Pe z IP Address 16892160 Subnet Mask 255 255 2400 Aad Figure 8 2 ACL Configuration Standard IPv4 CLI This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10 1 1 21 and another rule for the address range 168 92 16 x 168 92 31 x using a b
430. on Console quit Press ENTER to start session User Access Verification Username 18 6 Chapter 19 System Management Commands These commands are used to control system logs passwords user names management options and display or configure a variety of other system information Table 19 1 System Management Commands Command Group Function Page Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 19 1 System Status Displays system configuration active managers and version information 19 2 System Mode Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ mode 19 8 System MTU Enables support for jumbo frames sets the maximum transfer unit size 19 9 File Management Manages code image or ECN330 switch configuration files 19 10 Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port including baud rate and 19 19 console time out Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 19 28 SMTP Alerts Configures SMTP email alerts 19 34 Time System Clock Sets the system clock automatically via NTP SNTP server or manually 19 37 Device Designation Commands This section describes commands used to configure information that uniquely identifies the switch Table 19 2 Device Designation Commands Command Function Mode Page hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 19 1 snmp server contact Sets the system contact strin
431. on Command Usage e RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS uses TCP UDP only offers best effort delivery while TCP offers a connection oriented transport Also note that RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level for each user name and password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you enter authentication enable radius tacacs local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted on the TACACS server If the TACACS server is not available the local user name and password is checked Example Console config authentication enable radius Console config Related Commands enable password sets the password for changing command modes 21 3 21 5 21 User Authentication Commands RADIUS Client Remote Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to RADIUS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs
432. on IP will be enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received You therefore need to use the ip dhcp restart command to start broadcasting service requests Requests will be sent periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address subnet mask and default gateway If the bootp or dhcp option is saved to the startup config file step 6 then the switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP address allocation servers on the network complete the following steps 1 From the Global Configuration mode prompt type interface vlan 1 to access the interface configuration mode Press lt Enter gt 2 At the interface configuration mode prompt use one of the following commands To obtain IP settings via DHCP type ip address dhcp and press lt Enter gt To obtain IP settings via BOOTP type ip address bootp and press lt Enter gt 3 Type end to return to the Privileged Exec mode Press lt Enter gt 4 Type ip dhcp restart to begin broadcasting service requests Press lt Enter gt 2 5 2 Initial Configuration 5 Wait a few minutes and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the show ip interface command Press lt Enter gt 6 Then save your configuration changes by typi
433. on MVR Enabled Figure 15 8 MVR Port Configuration CLI This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port and then enables immediate leave on the receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if mvr type source 33 13 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if mvr type receiver Console config if mvr immediate Console config if 15 13 A 5 Multicast Filtering Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through IGMP snooping or static configuration Field Attributes Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN e Group Port List Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR VLAN Web Click MVR Group IP Information MVR Group IP Table Group IP 226 1 23 1 Y Group Port List Unit1 Port 1 Unit 1 Port 2 Figure 15 9 MVR Group IP Information CLI This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Console show mvr members 33 14 MVR Group IP Status Members 225 001 ACTIVE eth1 1 d eth1 2 s 2250 92 INACTIVE None 2250 03 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 4 INACTIVE None 229 0 0 5 INACTIVE None 225 006 INACTIVE None 22500 7 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 8 INACTIVE None 225 0 0 9 INACTIVE None 225 0
434. on attempts permitted after which the interface is reset Range 1 5 Default Setting 3 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip ssh authentication retires 2 Console config Related Commands show ip ssh 21 22 ip ssh server key size This command sets the SSH server key size Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh server key size key size no ip ssh server key size key size The size of server key Range 512 896 bits Default Setting 768 bits Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits Example Console config ip ssh server key size 512 Console config 21 19 2 4 User Authentication Commands delete public key This command deletes the specified user s public key Syntax delete public key username dsa rsa username Name of an SSH user Range 1 8 characters e dsa DSA public key type e rsa RSA public key type Default Setting Deletes both the DSA and RSA key Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console delete public key admin dsa Console ip ssh crypto host key generate This command generates the host key pair i e public and private Syntax ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa rsa e dsa DSA Version 2 key type rsa RS
435. on the manufacturer s implementation However note that the static trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel compatible To avoid creating a loop in the network be sure you add a static trunk via the configuration interface before connecting the ports and also disconnect the ports before removing a static trunk via the configuration interface statically configured active links Command Attributes Member List Current Shows configured trunks Trunk ID Unit Port New Includes entry fields for creating new trunks Trunk Trunk identifier Range 1 32 Port Port identifier Range 1 28 Web Click Port Trunk Membership Enter a trunk ID of 1 32 in the Trunk field select any of the switch ports from the scroll down port list and click Add After you have completed adding ports to the member list click Apply Trunk Membership Member List Current New Trunk Unit Port Trunk1 Unit Porti0 Trunk 1 32 Figure 9 3 Static Trunk Configuration 9 Port Configuration CLI This example creates trunk 1 with ports 9 and 10 Just connect these ports to two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk Console config interface port channel 1 24 1 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 9 24 1 Console config if channel group 1 25 2 Console config if exit Console co
436. one or more connections via multiple IP addresses If more than one IP address is associated with a host name using this command a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Example This example maps two address to a host name Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 Console config end Console show hosts Hostname rd5 Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias Console clear host This command deletes entries from the DNS table Syntax clear host name name Name of the host Range 1 127 characters e Removes all entries Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example clears all static entries from the DNS table Console config clear host Console config 34 2 ip domain name 34 ip domain name This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove the current domain name Syntax ip domain name name no ip domain name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 63 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip domain name sample com Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Defaul
437. onfig if dot1x timeout re authperiod 300 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an authentication session before re transmitting an EAP packet Use the no form to reset to the default value Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds The number of seconds Range 1 65535 Default 30 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period 300 Console config if show dot1x This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a specific interface Syntax show dot1x statistics interface interface e statistics Displays dot1x status for each port e interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 Command Mode Privileged Exec 21 29 2 4 User Authentication Commands Command Usage This command displays the following information Global 802 1X Parameters Shows whether or not 802 1X port authentication is globally enabled on the switch 21 30 802 1X Port Summary Displays the port access control parameters for each interface that has enabled 802 1X including the following items Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized Administrative state for port access control Allows single or multiple hosts page 21 26 Dot1x
438. onfiguration CLI The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1 10 Ports 1 8 are used as active members of the LAG ports 9 and 10 are set to backup mode Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 25 4 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 25 4 Console config if lacp actor port priority 128 25 6 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 10 Console config if lacp actor system priority 3 Console config if lacp actor admin key 120 Console config if lacp actor port priority 512 Console config if end Console show lacp sysid 25 7 Channel Group System Priority System MAC Address 1 3 00 00 E9 31 31 31 2 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 3 32768 00 00 E9 31 31 31 Console show lacp 1 internal 25 7 Port channel 1 Oper Key 120 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 1 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 3 LACP Port Priority 128 Admin Key 120 Oper Key 120 Admin State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity Oper State distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity 9 12 Creating Trunk Groups 9 Displaying LACP Port Counters You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages Table 9 1 LACP Port Counters Parameter Description LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received by thi
439. onfiguration Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping Console config ip igmp snooping vlan static This command adds a port to a multicast group Use the no form to remove the port Syntax no ip igmp snooping vlan vian id static ip address interface e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 jp address IP address for multicast group interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port Console config ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224 0 0 12 ethernet 1 5 Console config 33 2 IGMP Snooping Commands 33 ip igmp snooping version This command configures the IGMP snooping version Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping version 1 2 3 no ip igmp snooping version 1 IGMP Version 1 2 IGMP Version 2 3 IGMP Version 3 Default Setting IGMP Version 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage All systems on the subnet must support the same version If there are legacy devices in your network that only support Version 1 you will also have to configure this switch to use Version 1 Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 and v3 snooping including ip igmp snooping query max re
440. ons can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port 12 1 4A 2 VLAN Configuration Note VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging J ia tagged frames k E VA VA VA VLAN Aware VU VLAN Unaware tagged untagged frames frames re VA VA VU VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch ass
441. or file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Note Up to two copies of the system software i e the runtime firmware can be stored in the file directory on the switch The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted 4 11 A Basic Management Tasks Downloading System Software from a Server When downloading runtime code you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image or first download the file using a different name from the current runtime code file and then set the new file as the startup file Web Click System File Management Copy Operation Select tftp to file as the file transfer method enter the IP address of the TFTP server set the file type to opcode enter the file name of the software to download select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name then click Apply If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code reboot the system via the System Reset menu Copy tftp to file he TFTP Server IP Address 192 168 0 140 File Type opcode Source File Name Vi 0 0 28 BIX vi0026 Destination File Name v10028 Figure 4 9 Copy Firmware If you download to a new destination file go to the File Management Set Start Up menu mark the operation code fil
442. or specify a new file name and then click Apply Copy tte to startup config x TFTP Server IP Address 192 168119 Source File Name config startup seup Startup File Name Figure 4 12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Start Up If you download to a new file name using tftp to startup config or tftp to file the file is automatically set as the start up configuration file To use the new settings reboot the system via the System Reset menu You can also select any configuration file as the start up configuration by using the System File Management Set Start Up page Set Start Up Note You can only change one file type at a time Name Type Startup Size bytes Factory_Default_Config cfg Config_File N 455 startup Config_File Y 3661 startup1 cfg Config_File N 3675 V10025 Operation_Code N 3842560 V10026 Operation_Code Y 3850952 Figure 4 13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings 4 15 A Basic Management Tasks CLI Enter the IP address of the TFTP server specify the source file on the server set the startup file name on the switch and then restart the switch Console tcopy tftp startup config 19 13 TFTP server ip address 192 168 1 19 Source configuration file name config 1 Startup configuration file name startup Write to FLASH Programming Write to FLASH finish Success Console reload To select another configuration file as the
443. ork Region 1 Region 1 CIST Y CST IST Region 4 Region 4 Region 2 Region 3 Region 2 NS Region 3 MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree algorithm between switches that support the STP RSTP MSTP protocols 11 2 Displaying Global Settings 4 1 Displaying Global Settings You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the entire switch using the STA Information screen Field Attributes Spanning Tree State Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an STA compliant network Bridge ID A unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority the MST Instance ID 0 for the Common Spanning Tree when spanning tree mode is set to MSTP page 11 6 and MAC address where the address is taken from the switch system Max Age The maximum time in seconds a device can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure All device ports except for designated ports should receive configuration messages at regular intervals Any port that ages out STA information provided in the last configuration message becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network References to ports in this section mean interfaces
444. ort unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 31 13 3 4 Class of Service Commands Example Console show map ip precedence ethernet 1 5 Precedence mapping status disabled Port Precedence COS Eth 1 5 0 0 Eth 1 5 1 1 Eth 1 5 2 2 Eth 1 5 3 3 Eth 1 5 4 4 Eth 1 5 5 5 Eth 1 5 6 6 Eth 1 5 7 7 Console Related Commands map ip precedence Global Configuration 31 9 map ip precedence Interface Configuration 31 10 show map ip dscp This command shows the IP DSCP priority map Syntax show map ip dscp interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 31 14 Example Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 3 4 Eth Eth Eth 1 Console DSCP COS 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 Console show map ip dscp ethernet 1 1 DSCP mapping status disabled Related Commands map ip dscp Global Configuration 31 11 map ip dscp Interface Configuration 31 11 31 15 3 4 Class of Service Commands 31 16 Chapter 32 Quality of Service Commands The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ classification criteria and service policies You can classi
445. ort based authentication which can be configured for network client access by specifying a fixed set of MAC addresses either by freezing a set of dynamically learned entries or through static configuration or by statically configured MAC IP address pairs The addresses assigned to DHCP clients can also be carefully controlled using static or dynamic bindings with the IP Source Guard and DHCP Snooping commands This switch provides client security using the following options e Private VLANs Provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN See Configuring Private VLANs on page 12 17 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports See Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication on page 6 13 e Port Security Configure secure addresses for individual ports IP Source Guard5 Filters untrusted DHCP messages on unsecure ports by building and maintaining a DHCP snooping binding table See IP Source Guard Commands on page 22 3 e DHCP SnoopingS Filters IP traffic on unsecure ports for which the source address cannot be identified via DHCP snooping nor static source bindings See DHCP Snooping Commands on page 22 7 Configuring Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is
446. ort bits to match Range 0 65535 Control Code Decimal number representing a bit string that specifies flag bits in byte 14 of the TCP header Range 0 63 Control Code Bit Mask Decimal number representing the code bits to match The control bitmask is a decimal number for an equivalent binary bit mask that is applied to the control code Enter a decimal number where the equivalent binary bit 1 means to match a bit and O means to ignore a bit The following bits may be specified 1 fin Finish 2 syn Synchronize 4 rst Reset 8 psh Push 16 ack Acknowledgement 32 urg Urgent pointer For example use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following flags set SYN flag valid use control code 2 control bitmask 2 Both SYN and ACK valid use control code 18 control bitmask 18 SYN valid and ACK invalid use control code 2 control bitmask 18 3 Access Control Lists Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or IP If you select Host enter a specific address If you select IP enter a subnet address and the mask for an address range Set any other required criteria such as service type protocol type or TCP control code Then click Add Extended ACL Name mike p p Destination p Source Destination Control gt Dosti Action Spa
447. orts The primary enhancement provided by IGMPv3 snooping is in keeping track of information about the specific multicast sources which downstream IGMPv3 hosts have requested or refused The switch maintains information about both multicast groups and channels where a group indicates a multicast flow for which the hosts have not requested a specific source the only option for GMPv1 and v2 hosts unless statically configured on the switch and a channel indicates a flow for which the hosts have requested service from a specific source Only IGMPv3 hosts can request service from a specific multicast source When downstream hosts request service from a specific source for a multicast service these sources are all placed in the Include list and traffic is forwarded to the hosts from each of these sources IGMPv3 hosts may also request that service be forwarded from all sources except for those specified In this case traffic is filtered from sources in the Exclude list and forwarded from all other available sources Notes 1 When the switch is configured to use IGMPv3 snooping the snooping version may be downgraded to version 2 or version 1 depending on the version of the IGMP query packets detected on each VLAN 2 IGMP snooping will not function unless a multicast router port is enabled on the switch This can accomplished in one of two ways A static router port can be manually configured see Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast
448. ory e ram Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset sendmail Displays settings for the SMTP event handler page 19 37 trap Displays settings for the trap function Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example The following example shows that system logging is enabled the message level for flash memory is errors i e default level 3 0 and the message level for RAM is debugging i e default level 7 0 Console show logging flash Syslog logging Enabled History logging in FLASH level errors Console show logging ram Syslog logging Enabled History logging in RAM level debugging Console Table 19 11 show logging flash ram display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command History logging in FLASH The message level s reported based on the logging history command History logging in RAM The message level s reported based on the logging history command 19 32 Event Logging Commands 4 9 The following example displays settings for the trap function Console show logging trap Syslog logging Enable REMOTELOG status disable REMOTELOG facility type local use 7 REMOTELOG level type Debugging messages REMOTELOG server IP address 1 2 3 4 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP add
449. ost key e g 1024 the second field is the encoded public exponent e g 35 and the last string is the encoded modulus When a DSA key is displayed the first field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard DSS and the last string is the encoded modulus 21 23 2 4 User Authentication Commands Example Console show public key host Host RSA 1024 65537 13236940658254764031382795526536375927835525327972629521130241 0719421061655759424590939236096954050362775257556251003866130989393834523 1033280214988866192159556859887989191950588394018138744046890877916030583 7768185490002831341625008348718449522087429212255691665655296328163516964 0408315547660664151657116381 DSA ssh dss AAAB3NzaClkc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3 dyV yrDbKStI1nzD Dg0h2Hxc YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6 P8bvuiyacWbUW a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XF fAKx15 fwF fv J1Pd0kFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE8 5 PWxDZMaCNBPj BrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAATEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRJ5kh47wY4i8cZvH p9cnrfwFTMU01VFD1y3IR 2G3 95NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9MCOFT yyEfbobMJZi 80GCst SNOxrZZVnMqwrTY fdrKX7YKBw Kjw6Bm iFq70 jAhf1Dg4510Ac27s6TLdtny1lwRq ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAUJ 8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7Ej Oy Dbs1loBf PuSAb4oAsyj KXKVYNLQkKTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2 o dVzxX4Gg yqdT1YmGA7 fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0 fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7 wOW Console 802 1X Port Authentication The switch supports IEEE 802 1X dot1x port based access
450. ot be shown Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage e If you enter the command dir without any parameters the system displays all files e File information is shown below Table 19 7 File Directory Information Column Heading Description file name The name of the file file type File types Boot Rom Operation Code and Config file startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started size The length of the file in bytes 19 16 File Management Commands 4 9 Example The following example shows how to display all file information Console dir File name File type Startup Size byte Unitl D1 0 0 7 bix Boot Rom Image Y 1159752 V1 0 1 7 bix Operation Code Y 3542608 Factory_Default_Config cfg Config File N 526 startupl cfg Config File Y 3256 Total free space 10223616 Console whichboot This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up Syntax whichboot Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command See the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by this command Console whichboot File name File type Startup Size byte Unitl D1 0 0 7 bix Boot Rom Image Y 1159752 V1 0 1 7 bix Operation Code Y 3542608 startupl cfg Config File Y 3256 Console boot system This command specifies th
451. our browser https device port_number When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x or above and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above 6 User Authentication The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 6 1 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 e To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 6 6 Command Attributes e HTTPS Status Allows you to enable disable the HTTPS server feature on the switch Default Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS SSL connection to the switch s web interface Default Port 443 Web Click Security HTTPS Settings Enable HTTPS and specify the port number then click Apply HTTPS Settings HTTPS Statu
452. ow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype 25 7 2 5 Link Aggregation Commands Console show lacp 1 internal Port channel 1 Oper Key 3 Admin Key 0 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Internal 30 sec LACP System Priority 32768 LACP Port Priority 32768 Admin Key 3 Oper Key 3 Admin State Oper State defaulted aggregation long timeout LACP activity distributing collecting synchronization aggregation long timeout LACP activity Table 25 3 show lacp internal display description Field Description Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group Admin State Administrative or operational values of the actor s state parameters Oper State Expired The actor s receive machine is in the expired state Defaulted The actor s receive machine is us
453. ow interfaces protocol vlan protocol group 30 19 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling 30 20 switchport mode dot1q tunnel 30 21 show dot1q tunnel 30 21 switchport dot1q ethertype 30 22 Chapter 31 Class of Service Commands 31 1 Priority Commands Layer 2 31 1 queue mode 31 2 show queue mode 31 2 switchport priority default 31 3 XV Contents queue bandwidth queue cos map show queue bandwidth show queue cos map vlan priority show vlan based priority Priority Commands Layer 3 and 4 map ip port Global Configuration map ip port Interface Configuration map ip precedence Global Configuration map ip precedence Interface Configuration map ip dscp Global Configuration map ip dscp Interface Configuration show map ip port show map ip precedence show map ip dscp Chapter 32 Quality of Service Commands class map match policy map class set police service policy show class map show policy map show policy map interface Chapter 33 Multicast Filtering Commands IGMP Snooping Commands ip igmp snooping ip igmp snooping vlan static ip igmp snooping version ip igmp snooping leave proxy ip igmp snooping immediate leave show ip igmp snooping show mac address table multicast IGMP Query Commands ip igmp snooping querier ip igmp snooping query count ip igmp snooping query interval ip igmp snooping query max response time ip igmp snooping router port expire time Static Multicast Routing Commands ip igmp snooping vlan
454. ow system mtu System MTU size is 1500 bytes System Jumbo MTU size is 1500 bytes Console File Management Commands Managing Firmware Firmware can be uploaded and downloaded to or from a TFTP server By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation The switch can also be set to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version When downloading runtime code the destination file name can be specified to replace the current image or the file can be first downloaded using a different name from the current runtime code file and then the new file set as the startup file Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings Configuration settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and from a TFTP server The configuration file can be later downloaded to restore switch settings The configuration file can be downloaded under a new file name and then set as the startup file or the current startup configuration file can be specified as the destination file to directly replace it Note that the file Factory_Default_Config cfg can be copied to the TFTP server but cannot be used as the destination on the switch Table 19 6 Flash File Commands Command Function Mode Page copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE 19 13 memory or a TFTP server delete Deletes a file or code image PE 19 15 dir Displays a list of file
455. ows you to enable disable the SSH server on the switch Default Disabled Version The Secure Shell version number Version 2 0 is displayed but the switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1 5 or 2 0 clients SSH Authentication Timeout Specifies the time interval in seconds that the SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt Range 1 to 120 seconds Default 120 seconds SSH Authentication Retries Specifies the number of authentication attempts that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the authentication process Range 1 5 times Default 3 SSH Server Key Size Specifies the SSH server key size Range 512 896 bits Default 768 The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch The host key is shared with the SSH client and is fixed at 1024 bits 6 11 6 User Authentication Web Click Security SSH Settings Enable SSH and adjust the authentication parameters as required then click Apply Note that you must first generate the host key pair on the SSH Host Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server SSH Server Settings SSH Server Status M Enabled Version 2 0 SSH Authentication Timeout 1 120 100 seconds SSH Authentication Retries 1 5 B i SSH Server Key Size 512 896 BE Figure 6 5 SSH Server Settings CLI This example enabl
456. p the community access string to permit access to GC 20 3 SNMP commands snmp server contact Sets the system contact string GC 20 4 snmp server location Sets the system location string GC 20 4 snmp server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 20 5 snmp server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps i e SNMP GC 20 7 notifications snmp server engine id Sets the SNMP engine ID GC 20 8 show snmp engine id Shows the SNMP engine ID PE 20 9 snmp server view Adds an SNMP view GC 20 10 show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE 20 11 snmp server group Adds an SNMP group mapping users to views GC 20 11 show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE 20 12 snmp server user Adds a user to an SNMP group GC 20 14 show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE 20 15 20 1 2 oO SNMP Commands snmp server This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients i e versions 1 2c 3 Use the no form to disable the server Syntax no snmp server Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config snmp server Console config show snmp This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications Default Setting None Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command provides information on the community access strings counter information for SNMP input and output protocol data units and whether or not SNMP loggi
457. packet FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count does not include frames received with frame too long or frame too short error Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in full duplex mode Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame SQE Test Errors Account of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the PLS sublayer for a particular interface Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy Internal MA
458. packets are untagged the PVID VLAN native tag is added 2 If the ether type of an incoming packet single or double tagged is not equal to the TPID of the uplink port the VLAN tag is determined to be a Customer VLAN CVLAN tag The uplink port s PVID VLAN native tag is added to the packet This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets within the service provider s network The TPID must be configured on a per port basis and the verification cannot be disabled 3 If the ether type of an incoming packet single or double tagged is equal to the TPID of the uplink port no new VLAN tag is added If the uplink port is not the member of the outer VLAN of the incoming packets the packet will be dropped when ingress filtering is enabled If ingress filtering is not enabled the packet will still be forwarded If the VLAN is not listed in the VLAN table the packet will be dropped 4 After successful source and destination lookup the packet is double tagged The switch uses the TPID of 0x8100 to indicate that an incoming packet is double tagged If the outer tag of an incoming double tagged packet is equal to the port TPID and the inner tag is 0x8100 it is treated as a double tagged packet If a single tagged packet has 0x8100 as its TPID and port TPID is not 0x8100 a new VLAN tag is added and it is also treated as double tagged packet 5 If the destination address lookup fails the packet is sent to all member ports of the ou
459. page Add Class Opens the Class Configuration page Enter a class name and description on this page and click Add to open the Match Class Settings page Enter the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page Remove Class Removes the selected class Class Configuration Class Name Name of the class map Range 1 32 characters Type Only one match command is permitted per class map so the match any field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command Description A brief description of a class map Range 1 256 characters Add Adds the specified class Back Returns to previous page with making any changes 14 2 Configuring Quality of Service Parameters 4 4 Match Class Settings Class Name List of class maps ACL List Name of an access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 16 characters IP DSCP A DSCP value Range 0 63 IP Precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 VLAN A VLAN Range 1 4093 Add Adds specified criteria to the class Up to 16 items are permitted per class Remove Deletes the selected criteria from the class 14 3 A 4 Quality of Service Web Click QoS DiffServ then click Add Class to create a new class or Edit Rules to change the rules of an existing class Class Map Modify Name amp Description Class Name Type Vv
460. path cost The path cost for the IST This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media Path cost takes precedence over port priority e Internal path cost The path cost for the MST See the preceding item e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm If the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Algorithm is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Designated root The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device Fast forwarding This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products e Admin Edge Port You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker
461. pe attached to this interface e Point to Point A connection to exactly one other bridge e Shared A connection to two or more bridges e Auto The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a point to point link or to shared media This is the default setting Admin Edge Port Fast Forwarding You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops they can pass directly through to the spanning tree forwarding state Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices such as workstations or servers retains the current forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during reconfiguration events does not cause the spanning tree to initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state and also overcomes other STA related timeout problems However remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to an end node device Default Disabled e Migration If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disable
462. pe to use for combination ports 25 28 Copper Forced SFP Forced SFP Preferred Auto Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member Creation Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP Web Click Port Port Information or Trunk Information Port Information Speed Flow Admin Oper a Status Status Duplex Control Autonegotiation T Status Status 100Base TX Enabled Up 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100full None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100full None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab 100Base TX Enabled Down 100ful None Enab Trunk Port Name Type Member 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 9 1 Port Port Information ES3528 ES3528 WDM Port Information only Trunk Information only 9 Port Configuration Field Attributes CLI Basic information Port type Indicates port type 1OOBASE TX19 100BASE BX 1 1000BASE T or SFP MAC address The physical layer address for this port To access this item on the web see Setting the Switch s IP Address on page 4 8 Configuration Name Interface label Port admin Shows if the inte
463. ping trust 22 12 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address This command verifies the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no ip dhcp binding verify mac address Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage If MAC address verification is enabled and the source MAC address in the Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client s hardware address in the DHCP packet the packet is dropped Example This example enables MAC address verification Console config ip dhcp snooping verify mac address Console config Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 22 7 ip dhcp snooping vlan 22 9 ip dhcp snooping trust 22 12 22 11 22 Client Security Commands ip dhcp snooping database flash This command writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command can be used to store the currently learned dynamic DHCP snooping entries to flash memory These entries will be restored to the snooping table when the switch is reset However note that the lease time shown for a dynamic entry that has been restored from flash memory will no longer be valid Example Console config ip dhcp snooping database flash Console config ip dhcp snooping trust This command configures the specifie
464. port control mode page 21 26 Authorization status yes or n a not authorized 802 1X Port Details Displays the port access control parameters for each interface including the following items reauth enabled reauth period quiet period tx period supplicant timeout server timeout reauth max max req Status Operation Mode Max Count Port control Supplicant Current Identifier Periodic re authentication page 21 27 Time after which a connected client must be re authenticated page 21 28 Time a port waits after Max Request Count is exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client page 21 28 Time a port waits during authentication session before re transmitting EAP packet page 21 29 Supplicant timeout Server timeout Maximum number of reauthentication attempts Maximum number of times a port will retransmit an EAP request identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication session page 21 25 Authorization status authorized or not Shows if single or multiple hosts clients can connect to an 802 1X authorized port The maximum number of hosts allowed to access this port page 21 26 Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto force authorized or force unauthorized page 21 26 MAC address of authorized client The integer 0 255 used by the Authenticator to identify the current authentication session
465. pping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration command but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch 13 4 Layer 2 Queue Settings 4 3 Selecting the Queue Mode You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are serviced or use Weighted Round Robin WRR queuing that specifies a relative weight of each queue WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue This prevents the head of line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing Command Attributes WRR Weighted Round Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using scheduling weights 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 for queues 0 through 7 respectively This is the default selection Strict Services the egress queues in sequential order transmitting all traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues Web Click Priority Queue Mode Select Strict or WRR then click Apply Queue Mode Queue Mode WRR 7 Figure 13 3 Queue Mode CLI The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode Console config queue mode strict 31 2 Console config exit Console tshow queue mode 31 2 Queue mode strict Console 1
466. precedence bits defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control packets to lowest priority for routine traffic The eight values are mapped one to one to the Class of Service categories by default but may be configured differently to suit the requirements for specific network applications Layer 2 Data Link layer in the ISO 7 Layer Data Communications Protocol This is related directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses Glossary 3 Glossary Link Aggregation See Port Trunk Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP configured ports on another device Management Information Base MIB An acronym for Management Information Base It is a set of database objects that contains information about a specific device MD5 Message Digest Algorithm An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures It is intended for use with 32 bit machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm which has been broken MD5 is a one way hash function meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits also called a message digest Multicast Switching A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for which no attached host has registered or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast VLAN group Multicast
467. properly configured on the management station Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch and exported this key to the SSH client Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user including user name authentication level and password Be sure you have imported the client s public key to the switch if public key authentication is used Cannot access the on board configuration program via a serial port connection Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and the baud rate set to any of the following 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps Check that the null modem serial cable conforms to the pin out connections provided in the Installation Guide Forgot or lost the password Contact your local distributor B Troubleshooting Using System Logs If a fault does occur refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you encountered is actually caused by the switch If the problem appears to be caused by the switch follow these steps Enable logging Set the error messages reported to include all categories Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error Op ON gt Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault Also make a list of any error messages displayed 6 Contact your dist
468. ption when a bridge node in a single instance fails and allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree MST Instance 0 that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region This switch supports up to 65 instances You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of your network However remember that you must configure all bridges within the same MSTI Region page 11 8 with the same set of instances and the same instance on each bridge with the same set of VLANs Also note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node connecting all regions to the Common Spanning Tree To use multiple spanning trees 1 Set the spanning tree type to MSTP STA Configuration page 11 6 2 Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance MSTP VLAN Configuration 3 Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI MSTP VLAN Configuration Note All VLANs are automatically added to the IST Instance 0 To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings Command Attributes MST Instance Instance identifier of this spanning tree Default 0 e Priority The priority of a spanning tree instance Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Options 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 5734
469. query and report messages the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request multicast traffic This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly disrupting network performance Command Usage IGMP Snooping This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast host groups to identify the IP multicast group members It simply monitors the IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures the multicast filters accordingly Note Unknown multicast traffic is flooded to all ports in the VLAN for several seconds when first received If a multicast router port exists on the VLAN the traffic will be filtered by subjecting it to IGMP snooping If no router port exists on the VLAN or the multicast filtering table is already full the switch will continue flooding the traffic into the VLAN IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Note Multicast routers use this informa
470. quire a specific parity bit setting Example To specify no parity enter this command Console config line parity none Console config line speed This command sets the terminal line s baud rate This command sets both the transmit to terminal and receive from terminal speeds Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax speed bps no speed bps Baud rate in bits per second Options 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 bps or auto 19 25 A 9 System Management Commands Default Setting auto Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial port Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be supported The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported If you select the auto option the switch will automatically detect the baud rate configured on the attached terminal and adjust the speed accordingly Example To specify 57600 bps enter this command Console config line speed 57600 Console config line stopbits This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax stopbits 1 2 1 One stop bit e 2 Two stop bits Default Setting 1 stop bit Command Mode Line Configuration Example To specify 2 stop bits enter this command Console config line stopbits 2 Console config
471. r MAC to specify an address range with the Address and Bitmask fields Options Any Host MAC Default Any Source Destination MAC Address Source or destination MAC address Source Destination MAC Bit Mask Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC address VID VLAN ID Range 1 4093 VID Bit Mask VLAN bitmask Range 1 4093 Ethernet Type This option can only be used to filter Ethernet I formatted packets Range 600 fff hex A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060 A few of the more common types include 0800 IP 0806 ARP 8137 IPX Ethernet Type Bit Mask Protocol bitmask Range 600 fff hex Packet Format This attribute includes the following packet types Any Any Ethernet packet type Untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet II packets Untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets Tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets Command Usage Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets 3 Access Control Lists Web Specify the action i e Permit or Deny Specify the source and or destination addresses Select the address type Any Host or MAC If you select Host enter a specific address e g 11 22 33 44 55 66 If you select MAC enter a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an addres
472. r Editing VLAN Groups Command Function Mode Page vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add change and delete GC 30 6 VLANs vlan Configures a VLAN including VID name and state VC 30 7 vlan database This command enters VLAN database mode All commands in this mode will take effect immediately Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Use the VLAN database command mode to add change and delete VLANs After finishing configuration changes you can display the VLAN settings by entering the show vlan command Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode and add or remove ports from a VLAN The results of these commands are written to the running configuration file and you can display this file by entering the show running config command Example Console config vlan database Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 30 13 30 6 Editing VLAN Groups lt 3 O vlan This command configures a VLAN Use the no form to restore the default settings or delete a VLAN Syntax vlan vlan id name vlan name media ethernet state active suspend no vlan vlan id name state vian id ID of configured VLAN Range 1 4093 no leading zeroes name Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name vian name ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters media ethernet Ethernet media type state Keyword
473. r Port 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config ip telnet server Console config ip telnet port 123 Console config 21 14 Secure Shell Commands 21 Secure Shell Commands This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server Note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when using this protocol to configure the switch Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and 2 0 clients Table 21 10 Secure Shell Commands Command Function Mode Page ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 21 17 ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 21 18 ip ssh Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 21 19 authentication retries ip ssh server key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 21 19 copy tftp public key Copies the user s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 19 13 delete public key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 21 20 ip ssh crypto host key Generates the host key PE 21 20 generate ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 21 21 ip ssh save host key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 21 21 disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 19 26 show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE 21 22 for authentication timeout and retries show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessio
474. r QinQ GC 19 8 mode show system mode Displays the switch s system mode GC 19 9 switchport mode Configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port IC 30 21 dot1q tunnel show dot1q tunnel Displays information about QinQ tunnel ports PE 30 21 switchport dot1q ethertype Sets the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of a tunnel port IC 30 22 system mtu Sets the maximum transfer unit for the switch GC 19 11 show system mtu Shows the maximum transfer unit size for Fast Ethernet GC 19 11 and Gigabit Ethernet ports General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ 1 2 3 Configure the switch to QinQ mode system mode page 19 8 Create a SPVLAN vlan page 30 7 Configure the QinQ tunnel port to dot1Q tunnel port mode switchport mode dot1q tunnel page 30 21 Set the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of the tunnel port This step is required if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames The standard ethertype value is 0x8100 See switchport dot1q ethertype page 30 22 Configure the QinQ tunnel port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged member switchport allowed vlan page 30 11 Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel port switchport native vlan page 30 11 Configure system MTU to 1526 if jumbo frames are not enabled see System MTU Commands on page 19 9 Configure the QinQ uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member switchport allowed
475. r VLAN 1 Console config ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 Console config 22 9 22 Client Security Commands Related Commands ip dhcp snooping 22 7 ip dhcp snooping trust 22 12 ip dhcp snooping binding 22 10 ip dhcp snooping binding This command adds a static address to the DHCP snooping binding table Use the no form to remove an entry from the binding table Syntax ip dhcp binding mac address vlan vian id ip address interface ethernet unit port lease time no ip dhcp binding mac address vlan vian id mac address A valid unicast MAC address vian id ID of a configured VLAN Range 1 4093 jp address A valid unicast IP address including classful types A B or C e unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 lease time The time after which an entry is removed from the table Range 0 4294967295 where 0 indicates a permanent entry Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received on a trusted port a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is added to the binding table An entry is added or removed dynamically whenever a client has gotten or released an IP address from a DHCP server e Table entries can also be statically configured using the ip dhcp binding command Table entries includes a MAC address IP address lease time entry type Dynamic DHCP Bin
476. r port per CoS value Disabled Port Trunking Static Trunks None LACP all ports Disabled Storm Protection Status Broadcast enabled all ports Multicast disabled Rate Limit Broadcast 500 packets per second Unknown Packet Status Multicast disabled Blocking Unicast disabled Spanning Tree Status Enabled RSTP Algorithm Defaults All values based on IEEE 802 1w Fast Forwarding Edge Port Disabled Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1 PVID 1 Acceptable Frame Type All Ingress Filtering Disabled Switchport Mode Egress Mode Hybrid tagged untagged frames GVRP global Disabled GVRP port interface Disabled 4 Introduction Table 1 2 System Defaults Continued Function Parameter Default Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0 Queue Mode WRR Weighted Round Robin Queue 01234 5 6 7 Weight 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 IP Precedence Priority Disabled IP DSCP Priority Disabled IP Port Priority Disabled VLAN based Priority Disabled IP Settings Management VLAN Any VLAN configured with an IP address IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 DHCP Client Enabled DNS Service Disabled BOOTP Disabled Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping Enabled Querier Disabled Multicast VLAN Registration Disabled System Log Status Enabled Messages Logged Levels
477. r responsible for the switch Severity Sets the syslog severity threshold level see table on page 4 20 used to trigger alert messages All events at this level or higher will be sent to the configured email recipients For example using Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0 Default Level 7 4 23 A Basic Management Tasks e SMTP Server List Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers The switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails Use the New SMTP Server text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list e Email Destination Address List Specifies the email recipients of alert messages You can specify up to five recipients Use the New Email Destination Address text field and the Add Remove buttons to configure the list Web Click System Log SMTP Enable SMTP specify a source email address and select the minimum severity level To add an IP address to the SMTP Server List type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add To delete an IP address click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove Specify up to five email addresses to receive the alert messages and click Apply SMTP Admin Status Enabled Email Source Address big wheels matel com Severity 4 Waring x SMTP Server List New 192 168 1 4 lt lt Add i 192 168 1 5 e SMTP Server Remove l Email Destination Address List New chris
478. raffic is flooded to an isolated port on a private VLAN there could be security issues Example The following example blocks unknown multicast traffic on port 5 Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if switchport switchport block multicast Console config if clear counters This command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 24 8 show interfaces status 24 Command Usage Statistics are only initialized for a power reset This command sets the base value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session However if you log out and back into the management interface the statistics displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset Example The following example clears statistics on port 5 Console clear counters ethernet 1 5 Console show interfaces status This command displays the status for an interface Syntax show interfaces status interface interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vlan vian id Range 1 4093 Default Setting Shows the status for all interfaces Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Comm
479. rate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Becareful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Example The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree Console config spanning tree mode rstp Console config 29 3 29 Spanning Tree Commands spanning tree forward time This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this switch Use the no form to restore the default Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 seconds The minimum value is the higher of 4 or max age 2 1 Default Setting 15 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage This command sets the maximum time in seconds the root device will wait before changing states i e discarding to learning to forwarding This delay is required because every device must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it r
480. re 15 6 MVR Global Configuration 15 10 Multicast VLAN Registration 4 5 CLI This example first enables IGMP snooping enables MVR globally and then configures a range of MVR group addresses Console config ip igmp snooping 33 2 Console config mvr 33 12 Console config mvr group 228 1 23 1 10 Console config Displaying MVR Interface Status You can display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Field Attributes Type Shows the MVR port type Oper Status Shows the link status e MVR Status Shows the MVR status MVR status for source ports is ACTIVE if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR status for receiver ports is ACTIVE only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled Trunk Member Shows if port is a trunk member Web Click MVR Port Information or Trunk Information a Port Information Port Type Oper Status MVR Status Immediate Leave Trunk Member 1 Source Up Active Disabled 2 Receiver Up Active Disabled 3 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 4 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 5 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 6 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 7 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 8 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 9 Non MVR Down Inactive Disabled 10 Non M
481. re not dotix aware will be denied access force authorized Configures the port to grant access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise force unauthorized Configures the port to deny access to all clients either dot1x aware or otherwise Default force authorized Command Mode Interface Configuration Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1x port control auto Console config if dot1x operation mode This command allows single or multiple hosts clients to connect to an 802 1X authorized port Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to single host Use the no form with the multi host max count keywords to restore the default maximum count Syntax dot1x operation mode single host multi host max count count no dot1x operation mode multi host max count e single host Allows only a single host to connect to this port multi host Allows multiple host to connect to this port max count Keyword for the maximum number of hosts count The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port Range 1 1024 Default 5 Default Single host Command Mode Interface Configuration 21 26 802 1X Port Authentication 21 Command Usage The max count parameter specified by this command is only effective if the dotix mode is set to auto by the dot1x port control command page 4 105 In multi host mode only one host connected
482. receiving port in the specified VLANs and then forward the message to all other ports When the message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP it will also place the receiving port in the specified VLANs and pass the message on to all other ports VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network This allows GVRP compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based solely on endstation requests To implement GVRP in a network first add the host devices to the required VLANs using the operating system or other application software so that these VLANs can be propagated onto the network For both the edge switches attached directly to 12 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs f 2 these hosts and core switches in the network enable GVRP on the links between these devices You should also determine security boundaries in the network and disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being propagated or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs Note If you have host devices that do not support GVRP you should configure static or untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices as described in Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index on page 12 7 But you can still enable GVRP on these edge switches as well as on the core switches in the
483. ren IP Source Subnet Aen Subnet TOS Precedence SCP Protacol Spure poston Pon Comval Code Remove Mask Bitmask Bitmask 4 Bitmask Port 107 10 255 AS MS MS Any Any Any Any Any 6 Any Any Any Any Ary Any Remove Porst 192 168 1 0255 255 255 255 Any Any Any Any Any B Any lany E BES Any Any Remove Coscrpsy Figure 8 3 ACL Configuration Extended IPv4 CLI This example adds three rules 1 Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10 7 1 x For example if the rule is matched i e the rule 10 7 1 0 amp 255 255 255 0 equals the masked address 10 7 1 2 amp 255 255 255 0 the packet passes through 2 Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 to any destination address when set for destination TCP port 80 i e HTTP 3 Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192 168 1 0 with the TCP control code set to SYN Console config ext acl permit 10 7 1 1 255 255 255 0 any 23 3 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any destination port 80 Console config ext acl permit tcp 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 0 any control flag 2 2 Console config std acl Configuring Access Control Lists 8 Configuring a MAC ACL Command Attributes Action An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Source Destination Address Type Use Any to include all possible addresses Host to indicate a specific MAC address o
484. ress 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 REMOTELOG server IP address 0 0 0 0 Console Table 19 12 show logging trap display description Field Description Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command REMOTELOG The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the facility type logging facility command REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in the logging trap command REMOTELOG The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command server IP address Related Commands show logging sendmail 19 37 show log This command displays the log messages stored in local memory Syntax show log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 19 33 4 9 System Management Commands Example The following example shows the event message stored in RAM Console show log ram 1 00 01 30 2001 01 01 VLAN 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 0 00 01 30 2001 01 01 Unit 1 Port 1 link up notification level 6 module 5 function 1 and event no 1 Consol
485. rface is enabled or disabled i e up or down Speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Auto or fixed choice Capabilities Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during auto negotiation To access this item on the web see Configuring Interface Connections on page 3 48 The following capabilities are supported e 10half Supports 10 Mbps half duplex operation e 10full Supports 10 Mbps full duplex operation e 100half Supports 100 Mbps half duplex operation 100full Supports 100 Mbps full duplex operation 1000full Supports 1000 Mbps full duplex operation Sym Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control e FC Supports flow control Broadcast storm Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled Broadcast storm limit Shows the broadcast storm threshold 500 262143 packets per second Flow control Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled LACP Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled Port security Shows if port security is enabled or disabled Max MAC count Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be learned by a port 0 1024 addresses Port security action Shows the response to take when a security violation is detected shutdown trap trap and shutdown Media Type Shows the forced or preferred port type to use for combination ports 25 28 copper forced SFP forced SFP preferred auto Current status Link s
486. ributor s service engineer For example Console config logging on Console config logging history flash 7 Console config snmp server host 192 168 1 23 Glossary Access Control List ACL ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each packet for certain IP or MAC i e Layer 2 information Boot Protocol BOOTP BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices including IP address information the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files and the name of the boot file Class of Service CoS CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service and then placing them in the appropriate output queue Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted round robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower level queues Priority may be set according to the port default the packet s priority bit in the VLAN tag TCP UDP port number IP Precedence bit or DSCP priority bit Differentiated Services DiffServ DiffServ provides quality of service on large networks by employing a well defined set of building blocks from which a variety of aggregate forwarding behaviors may be built Each packet carries information DS byte used by each hop to give it a particular forwarding treatment or per hop behavior at each network node DiffServ allocates different levels of service to users on t
487. ring the SSH Server Configuring 802 1X Port Authentication Displaying 802 1X Global Settings Configuring 802 1X Global Settings Configuring Port Settings for 802 1X Displaying 802 1X Statistics Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 14 4 15 4 16 4 18 4 20 4 20 4 21 4 23 4 23 4 25 4 26 4 26 4 27 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 7 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 11 5 13 5 16 6 1 6 1 6 2 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 9 6 11 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 15 6 18 6 20 Contents Chapter 7 Client Security 7 1 Configuring Port Security 7 1 Chapter 8 Access Control Lists 8 1 Configuring Access Control Lists 8 1 Setting the ACL Name and Type 8 2 Configuring a Standard ACL 8 3 Configuring an Extended ACL 8 4 Configuring a MAC ACL 8 7 Configuring ACL Masks 8 9 Specifying the Mask Type 8 9 Configuring an IP ACL Mask 8 10 Configuring a MAC ACL Mask 8 12 Binding a Port to an Access Control List 8 13 Chapter 9 Port Configuration 9 1 Displaying Connection Status 9 1 Configuring Interface Connections 9 3 Creating Trunk Groups 9 6 Statically Configuring a Trunk 9 7 Enabling LACP on Selected Ports 9 8 Configuring LACP Parameters 9 10 Displaying LACP Port Counters 9 13 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 9 14 Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 9 16 Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds 9 17 Configuring Port Mirroring 9 19 Configuring Rate Limits 9 20 Showing Port Statistics 9 21 Chapter 10 Address Table Setti
488. rm retry retries timeout seconds community string version 1 2c 3 auth noauth priv udp port port no snmp server host host addr host adar Internet address of the host the targeted recipient Maximum host addresses 5 trap destination IP address entries inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default traps are used retries The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if the recipient does not acknowledge receipt Range 0 255 Default 3 seconds The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before resending an inform message Range 0 2147483647 centiseconds Default 1500 centiseconds community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts Although you can set this string using the snmp server host command by itself we recommend that you define this string using the snmp server community command prior to using the snmp server host command Maximum length 32 characters version Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1 2c or 3 traps Range 1 2c 3 Default 1 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e port Ho
489. rmation of interface Information of history Host information Information of interfaces IP information Show LACP statistic TTY line information Login records Show the contents of logging buffers MAC access lists Set configuration of the address table Show management IP filter Map priority Show mvr interface information Display policy maps Characteristics of the port Protocol VLAN information Show information of public key Information of private VLAN Information of priority queue RADIUS server information Display rate limit for CoS priorities The system configuration of running SNMP statistics SNTP Specify spanning tree Secure shell The system configuration of starting up Information of system Login by TACACS server Display information about terminal lines System hardware and software status Switch VLAN Virtual Interface 17 4 Entering Commands 4 7 The command show interfaces will display the following information Console show interfaces counters Information of interfaces counters protocol vlan Protocol vlan information status Information of interfaces status switchport Information of interfaces switchport Console Partial Keyword Lookup If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark alternatives that match the initial letters are provided Remember not to leave a space between the command and question mark For example s shows all the keywords startin
490. rmit deny Filters packets matching a specified source and MAC ACL 23 13 destination address packet format and Ethernet type show mac access list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 23 14 access list mac Changes to the mode for configuring access control masks GC 23 15 mask precedence mask Sets a precedence mask for the ACL rules MAC Mask 23 15 show access list mac Shows the ingress or egress rule masks for MAC ACLs PE 23 17 mask precedence mac access group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 23 18 show mac access group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 23 18 access list mac This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode Use the no form to remove the specified ACL Syntax no access list mac acl_name acl_name Name of the ACL Maximum length 16 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list To create an ACL you must add at least one rule to the list To remove a rule use the no permit or no deny command followed by the exact text of a previously configured rule e An ACL can contain up to 32 rules 23 12 MAC ACLs 23 Example Console config access list mac jerry Console config mac acl1 Related Commands permit deny 23 13 mac access group 23 18
491. rol System TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS aware devices on the network An authentication server contains a database of multiple user name password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch Table 21 6 TACACS Client Commands Command Function Mode Page tacacs server host Specifies the TACACS server GC 21 9 tacacs server port Specifies the TACACS server network port GC 21 10 tacacs server key Sets the TACACS encryption key GC 21 10 show tacacs server Shows the current TACACS settings GC 21 11 tacacs server host This command specifies the TACACS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server host host_ip_address no tacacs server host host_ip_address P address of a TACACS server Default Setting 10 11 12 13 21 9 2 4 User Authentication Commands Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config tacacs server host 192 168 1 25 Console config tacacs server port This command specifies the TACACS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax tacacs server port port_number no tacacs server port port_number TACACS server TCP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 49 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Conso
492. roup 225 0 0 5 e Conso config if show mvr This command shows information about the global MVR configuration settings when entered without any keywords the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN using the interface keyword or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN using the members keyword Syntax show mvr interface interface members p address interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 jp address IP address for an MVR multicast group Range 224 0 1 0 239 255 255 255 Default Setting Displays global configuration settings for MVR when no keywords are used Command Mode Privileged Exec 33 14 Command Usage Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 33 Enter this command without any keywords to display the global settings for MVR Use the interface keyword to display information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN Or use the members keyword to display information about multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN Example The following shows the global MVR settings Console show mvr MVR Status enable MVR running status TRUE MVR multicast vlan 1 MVR Max Multicast Groups 255 MVR Current multicast groups 10 Console Table 33 6 show mvr display description Field Description MVR Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch MVR running status Indicates whether or
493. rp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 30 4 show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE PE 30 5 30 1 30 VLAN Commands bridge ext gvrp This command enables GVRP globally for the switch Use the no form to disable it Syntax no bridge ext gvrp Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network This function should be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch Example Console config bridge ext gvrp Console config show bridge ext This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage See Displaying Basic VLAN Information on page 12 4 and Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities on page 4 7 for a description of the displayed items Example Console show bridge ext Max support VLAN numbers 256 Max support VLAN ID 4093 Extended multicast filtering services No Static entry individual port Yes VLAN learning IVL Configurable PVID tagging Yes Local VLAN capable No Traffic classes Enabled Global GVRP status Disabled GMRP Disabled Console 30 2 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 30 switchport gvrp This command enables GVRP for a port Use
494. rt e This switch supports ACLs for both ingress and egress filtering However you can only bind one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for ingress filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Command Attributes Port Fixed port or SFP module Range 1 28 e IP Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port MAC Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port e IN ACL for ingress packets e OUT ACL for egress packets Egress filtering is not supported ACL Name Name of the ACL 8 13 8 Access Control Lists Web Click Security ACL Port Binding Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for ingress traffic select the required ACL from the drop down list then click Apply Port IP MAC IPv6 IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT 1 Z Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enabled tom jery 2 M Enabled Enabled C Enabled Enab
495. rt9 xf Figure 12 3 VLAN Current Table 12 5 A 2 VLAN Configuration Command Attributes CLI e VLAN ID of configured VLAN 1 4093 no leading zeroes Type Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch Dynamic Automatically learned via GVRP Static Added as a static entry Name Name of the VLAN 1 to 32 characters e Status Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled Active VLAN is operational Suspend VLAN is suspended i e does not pass packets e Ports Channel groups Shows the VLAN interface members CLI Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command Console show vlan id 1 30 13 VLAN ID HE Type Static Name DefaultVlan Status Active Ports Port Channels Eth1 1 S Eth1 2 S Eth1 3 S Eth1 4 S Eth1 5 S Eth1 6 S Eth1 7 S Eth1 8 S Eth1 9 S Eth1 10 S Eth1 11 S Eth1 12 S Eth1 13 S Eth1 14 S Eth1 15 S Eth1 16 S Eth1 17 S Eth1 18 S Eth1 19 S Eth1 20 S Eth1 21 S Eth1 22 S Eth1 23 S Eth1 24 S Console Creating VLANs Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups To propagate information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices you must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups Command Attributes e Current Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system Up to 255 VLAN groups can be defined VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN e New Allows you to specify the
496. runk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance 11 20 VLAN 12 1 802 1Q VLAN 12 1 GVRP Status Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol 12 4 Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 12 4 Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or 12 5 not the port is tagged or untagged Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 12 6 Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 12 7 Static Membership by Port Configures membership type for interfaces including tagged 12 9 untagged or forbidden Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 12 10 Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 12 10 Private VLAN 12 17 Status Enables or disables the private VLAN 12 17 Link Status Configures the private VLAN 12 18 Protocol VLAN 12 18 Configuration Creates a protocol group specifying the supported protocols 12 19 Port Configuration Maps a protocol group to a VLAN 12 20 Priority 13 1 Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 13 1 Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 13 1 Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802 1p priority tags to output queues 13 3 Traffic Classes Status Enables disables traffic class priorities not implemented NA Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round Robin 13 5 Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 13 6 IP Precedence Globa
497. rver Range 1 30 key Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Default Setting auth port 1812 timeout 5 seconds retransmit 2 Command Mode Global Configuration 21 6 RADIUS Client 21 Example Console config radius server 1 host 192 168 1 20 port 181 timeout 10 retransmit 5 key green Console config radius server port This command sets the RADIUS server network port Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server port port_number no radius server port port_number RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default Setting 1812 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server port 181 Console config radius server key This command sets the RADIUS encryption key Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server key key_string no radius server key key_string Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client Do not use blank spaces in the string Maximum length 48 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server key green Console config 21 7 2 4 User Authentication Commands radius server retransmit This command sets the number of retries Use the no form to restore the defaul
498. s Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch or the address of an administrator responsible for the switch Example Console config logging sendmail source email bill this company com Console config logging sendmail destination email This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages Use the no form to remove a recipient Syntax no logging sendmail destination email email address email address The source email address used in alert messages Range 1 41 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages However you must enter a separate command to specify each recipient Example Console config logging sendmail destination email ted this company com Console config logging sendmail This command enables SMTP event handling Use the no form to disable this function Syntax no logging sendmail Default Setting Enabled 19 36 Time Commands 4 9 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config logging sendmail Console config show logging sendmail This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show logging sendmail SMTP servers 192 168 119 SMTP minimum severi
499. s command without a specified level to enable remote logging Use the no form to disable remote logging Syntax logging trap evel no logging trap level One of the syslog severity levels listed in the table on page 19 29 Messages sent include the selected level up through level 0 Default Setting Disabled e Level 7 0 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets the minimum severity level to be saved Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging but restores the minimum severity level to the default Example Console config logging trap 4 Console config clear log This command clears messages from the log buffer Syntax clear log flash ram e flash Event history stored in flash memory i e permanent memory ram Event history stored in temporary RAM i e memory flushed on power reset Default Setting Flash and RAM Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console clear log Console 19 31 4 9 System Management Commands Related Commands show log 19 33 show logging This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local switch memory to an SMTP event handler or to a remote syslog server Syntax show logging flash ram sendmail trap e flash Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory i e permanent mem
500. s thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN and allowing you to limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type Traffic Prioritization This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required level of service using eight priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin 1 4 Description of Software Features A Queuing It uses IEEE 802 1p and 802 1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on input from the end station application These functions can be used to provide independent priorities for delay sensitive data and best effort data This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3 4 traffic to meet application requirements Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in the IP frame s Type of Service ToS octet or the number of the TCP UDP port When these services are enabled the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by the switch and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue Quality of Service Differentiated Services DiffServ provides policy based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists IP Precedence or DSCP values or VLAN lists Using access lists allows you select traffic bas
501. s M Enabled Change HTTPS Port Number 1 65535 441 Figure 6 3 HTTPS Settings CLI This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number Console config ip http secure server 21 12 Console config ip http secure port 441 21 13 Console config Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS for secure access a Secure Sockets Layer SSL certificate appears for the switch By default the certificate that Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the site is not recognized as a secure site This is because the certificate has not been signed by an approved certification authority If you want this warning to be replaced by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure you must obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized certification authority Note For maximum security we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity This is because the default certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased Configuring the Secure Shell 6 When you have obtained these place them on your TFTP server and use the following command at the switch s command line interface to replace the default unrecognized certificate with an authorized one Console tcopy tftp https certificate 19 13 TFTP server ip address l
502. s Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port and removes Port 3 from VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 3 24 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 30 11 Console config if switchport allowed vlan remove 2 Console config if 12 9 4A 2 VLAN Configuration Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces including the default VLAN identifier PVID accepted frame types ingress filtering GVRP status and GARP timers Command Usage GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network GARP Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GVRP registration deregistration Command Attributes PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface Default 1 If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member For all other VLANs an interface must first be configured as an untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group Acceptable Fr
503. s and the switch Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP A standard host to host mail transport protocol that operates over TCP port 25 Glossary 5 Glossary Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management services Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol NTP server Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers Spanning Tree Algorithm STA A technology that checks your network for any loops A loop can often occur in complicated or backup linked network systems Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest available path maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network Telnet Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCPIIP Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS TACACS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to TACACS compliant devices on the network Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol and IP as the network layer protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP A TCP IP protocol commonly used for software downloads Universal Time Coor
504. s are open to all IP addresses by default Once you add an entry to a filter list access to that interface is restricted to the specified addresses If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address Command Attributes Web IP Filter Configures IP address es for the web group SNMP IP Filter Configures IP address es for the SNMP group Telnet IP Filter Configures IP address es for the Telnet group IP Filter List IP address which are allowed management access to this interface Start IP Address A single IP address or the starting address of a range End IP Address The end address of a range 6
505. s channel group Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group Marker Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either 1 Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or 2 are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype Web Click Port LACP Port Counters Information Select a member port to display the corresponding information LACP Port Counters Information Interface Port 2 Trunk ID 1 LACPDUs Sent 19 LACPDUs Receive 10 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 Marker Unknown Pkts 0 Marker Illegal Pkts 0 Figure 9 6 LACP Port Counters Information CLI The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1 Console show lacp 1 counters 25 7 Port channel 1 Eth 1 2 LACPDUs Sent 19 LACPDUs Receive 10 Marker Sent 0 Marker Receive 0 LACPDUs Unknown Pkts 0 LACPDUs Illegal Pkts 0 9 13 9 Port Configuration Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of an link aggregation Table 9 2 LACP Internal Configuration Inform
506. s command specifies the password for a line Use the no form to remove the password Syntax password 0 7 password no password 0 7 0 means plain password 7 means encrypted password password Character string that specifies the line password Maximum length 8 characters plain text 32 encrypted case sensitive Default Setting No password is specified Command Mode Line Configuration Command Usage When a connection is started on a line with password protection the system prompts for the password If you enter the correct password the system shows a prompt You can use the password thresh command to set the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password settings i e plain text or encrypted when reading the configuration file during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords Example Console config line password 0 secret Console config line Related Commands login 19 20 password thresh 19 23 19 21 4 9 System Management Commands timeout login response This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax timeout log
507. s considered to have left the multicast group 33 7 33 Multicast Filtering Commands Example The following shows how to configure the query count to 10 Console config ip igmp snooping query count 10 Console config Related Commands ip igmp snooping query max response time 33 8 ip igmp snooping query interval This command configures the query interval Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query interval seconds no ip igmp snooping query interval seconds The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 Default Setting 125 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Example The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds Console config ip igmp snooping query interval 100 Console config ip igmp snooping query max response time This command configures the query report delay Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds no ip igmp snooping query max response time seconds The report delay advertised in IGMP queries Range 5 25 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The switch must be using IGMPv2 or v3 snooping for this command to take effect 33 8 IGMP Query Commands 33 This command defines the time after a query during which a response is expected from a multicast client If a querier has se
508. s filtering and one IP ACL and one MAC ACL to any port for egress filtering In other words only four ACLs can be bound to an interface Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL and Egress MAC ACL e When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter all entries in the ACL must be deny rules Otherwise the bind operation will fail The maximum number of ACLs is Fast Ethernet ports 157 rules 4 masks shared by 8 port groups Gigabit Ethernet ports 29 rules 4 masks 8 Access Control Lists Each ACL can have up to 32 rules However due to resource restrictions the average number of rules bound to the ports should not exceed 20 You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port or set the queue or frame priorities associated with the rule The switch does not support the explicit deny any any rule for the egress IP ACL or the egress MAC ACLs If these rules are included in an ACL and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface for egress checking the bind operation will fail Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination mac known packets not for multicast broadcast or destination mac unknown packets The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows DO O e pN User defined rules in the Egress MAC ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports User defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports User defined rules in the Ingress IP AC
509. s in flash memory PE 19 16 whichboot Displays the files booted PE 19 17 boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 19 17 19 12 File Management Commands 4 9 copy This command moves upload download a code image or configuration file between the switch s flash memory and a TFTP server When you save the system code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore system operation The success of the file transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the network connection Syntax copy file file running config startup config tftp copy running config file startup config tftp copy startup config file running config tftp copy tftp file running config startup config https certificate public key e file Keyword that allows you to copy to from a file running config Keyword that allows you to copy to from the current running configuration startup config The configuration used for system initialization tftp Keyword that allows you to copy to from a TFTP server https certificate Keyword that allows you to copy the HTTPS secure site certificate e public key Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP server See Secure Shell Commands on page 21 15 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The sys
510. s included or excluded Storage Type The storage type for this entry Row Status The row status of this entry snmp server group This command adds an SNMP group mapping SNMP users to SNMP views Use the no form to remove an SNMP group Syntax snmp server group groupname v1 v2c v3 auth noauth priv read readview write writeview notify notifyview no snmp server group groupname groupname Name of an SNMP group Range 1 32 characters v1 v2c v3 Use SNMP version 1 2c or 3 auth noauth priv This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication no authentication or with authentication and privacy See Simple Network Management Protocol on page 5 1 for further information about these authentication and encryption options e readview Defines the view for read access 1 64 characters e writeview Defines the view for write access 1 64 characters e notifyview Defines the view for notifications 1 64 characters 20 11 2 oO SNMP Commands Default Setting Default groups public read only private31 read write e readview Every object belonging to the Internet OID space 1 3 6 1 e writeview Nothing is defined e notifyview Nothing is defined Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage A group sets the access policy for the assigned users e When authentication is selected the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as specified in the snmp server user command
511. s range Set any other required criteria such as VID Ethernet type or packet format Then click Add MAC ACL Name bob ee ng Ed ea ead ke a Permit Any Any 00 00 29 94 34 de ERRETEN any Any 2048 E5535 Any _ Remove Action Permit Permit Source Address Type Any Source MAC Address f00 0 00 00 00 00 _ Source Bitmask Destination Address Type Any Destination MAC Address Destination Bitmask vio VID Bitmask mz Ethemet Type L a Ethemet Type Bitmask Packet Format Any Aa Figure 8 4 ACL Configuration MAC CLI This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address 00 e0 29 94 34 de where the Ethernet type is 0800 Console config mac acl permit any host 00 e0 29 94 34 de ethertype 0800 23 13 Console config mac ac1 Configuring Access Control Lists 8 Configuring ACL Masks You must specify masks that control the order in which ACL rules are checked ACL rules matching the first entry in the mask are checked first Rules matching subsequent entries in the mask are then checked in the specified order The switch includes two system default masks that pass filter packets matching the permit deny rules specified in an ingress ACL You can also configure up to seven user defined masks for an ingress or egress ACL A mask must be bound exclusively to one of the basic ACL types i e Ingress IP ACL Egress IP ACL Ingress MAC ACL or Egress MAC ACL but a mask can
512. s the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating any possible network loops _ Designated _ Root fe ma x K B X Designated X Root AN ON i Port rN ee _ Designated COX J ji pye gas X Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology RSTP RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower legacy STP RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration i e around 1 to 3 seconds compared to 30 seconds or more for STP by reducing the number of state changes before active ports start learning predefining an alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails and retaining the forwarding database for ports insen
513. s to this device to gain management access over the network or to connect the switch to existing IP subnets You can manually configure a specific IP address or direct the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers 0 to 255 separated by periods Anything outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program e If you select the bootp or dhcp option IP is enabled but will not function until a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received Requests will be broadcast periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address BOOTP and DHCP values can include the IP address default gateway and subnet mask e You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp restart command or by rebooting the switch Notes 1 Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address the default is VLAN 1 This defines the management VLAN the only VLAN through which you can gain management access to the switch If you assign an IP address to any other VLAN the new IP address overrides the original IP address and this becomes the new management VLAN 2 Before you can change the IP address you must first clear the current address with the no form of this command Example In the following example the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 192 168 1 5 255 255 255 0 Console config if R
514. sed on the interval set via the sntp poll command Example Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 Console Related Commands sntp client 19 38 sntp poll 19 39 show sntp 19 40 sntp poll This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is set to SNTP client mode Use the no form to restore to the default Syntax sntp poll seconds no sntp poll seconds Interval between time requests Range 16 16384 seconds Default Setting 16 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration 19 39 4 9 System Management Commands Example Console config sntp poll 60 Console Related Commands sntp client 19 38 show sntp This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP client and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Command Usage This command displays the current time the poll interval used for sending time synchronization requests and the current SNTP mode i e unicast Example Console show sntp Current time Dec 23 05 13 28 2002 Poll interval 16 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 137 92 140 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Current server 137 92 140 80 Console clock timezone This command sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock Syntax clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes before utc after utc name Name of
515. see the enable password command on page 21 3 18 1 4 8 General Commands e The character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in privileged access mode Example Console gt enable Password privileged level password Console Related Commands disable 18 2 enable password 21 3 disable This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode In normal access mode you can only display basic information on the switch s configuration or Ethernet statistics To gain access to all commands you must use the privileged mode See Understanding Command Modes on page 17 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The gt character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the system is in normal access mode Example Console disable Console gt Related Commands enable 18 1 configure This command activates Global Configuration mode You must enter this mode to modify any settings on the switch You must also enter Global Configuration mode prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes including Interface Configuration Line Configuration VLAN Database Configuration and Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration See Understanding Command Modes on page 17 6 Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 18 2 Example Console configure Console config Related Com
516. show ip ssh show ssh show public key 802 1X Port Authentication dot1x system auth control dot1x default dot1x max req dot1x port control dot1x operation mode dot1x re authenticate dot1x re authentication dot1x timeout quiet period dot1x timeout re authperiod dot1x timeout tx period show dot1x Management IP Filter Commands management show management Chapter 22 Client Security Commands Port Security Commands port security IP Source Guard Commands ip source guard ip source guard binding show ip source guard show ip source guard binding DHCP Snooping Commands ip dhcp snooping xii 21 11 21 11 21 12 21 12 21 13 21 14 21 14 21 15 21 17 21 18 21 19 21 19 21 20 21 20 21 21 21 21 21 22 21 22 21 23 21 24 21 25 21 25 21 25 21 26 21 26 21 27 21 27 21 28 21 28 21 29 21 29 21 33 21 33 21 34 22 1 22 1 22 2 22 3 22 3 22 5 22 6 22 6 22 7 22 7 Contents ip dhcp snooping vlan 22 9 ip dhcp snooping binding 22 10 ip dhcp snooping verify mac address 22 11 ip dhcp snooping database flash 22 12 ip dhcp snooping trust 22 12 show ip dhcp snooping 22 13 show ip dhcp snooping binding 22 13 Chapter 23 Access Control List Commands 23 1 IP ACLs 23 1 access list ip 23 2 permit deny Standard ACL 23 2 permit deny Extended ACL 23 3 show ip access list 23 5 access list ip mask precedence 23 6 mask IP ACL 23 6 show access list ip mask precedence 23 10 ip access group 23 11 show ip access group 23
517. show mac access list 23 14 permit deny MAC ACL This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL The rule filters packets matching a specified MAC source or destination address i e physical layer address or Ethernet protocol type Use the no form to remove a rule Syntax no permit deny any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask Note The default is for Ethernet II packets no permit deny tagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny untagged eth2 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask ethertype protocol protocol bitmask no permit deny tagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask vid vid vid bitmask no permit deny untagged 802 3 any host source source address bitmask any host destination destination address bitmask tagged eth2 Tagged Ethernet II packets untagged eth2 Untagged Ethernet Il packets tagged 802 3 Tagged Ethernet 802 3 packets untagged 802 3 Untagged Ethernet 802 3 packets any Any MAC source or destination address host A specific MAC
518. sion 1 notifications e If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host then the community string is interpreted as an SNMP user name If you use the V3 auth or priv options the user name must first be defined with the snmp server user command Otherwise the authentication password and or privacy password will not exist and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host However if you specify a V3 host with the noauth option an SNMP user account will be generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host Example Console config snmp server host 10 1 19 23 batman Console config Related Commands snmp server enable traps 20 7 snmp server enable traps This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps or informs i e SNMP notifications Use the no form to disable SNMP notifications Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication link up down authentication Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications link up down Keyword to issue link up or link down notifications Default Setting Issue authentication and link up down traps Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e If you do not enter an snmp server enable traps command no notifications controlled by this command are sent In order to configure this device to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server enable traps command If you enter the co
519. sitive to changes in the tree structure when reconfiguration occurs 11 1 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm MSTP When using STP or RSTP it may be difficult to maintain a stable path between all VLAN members Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily isolate some of the group members MSTP which is based on RSTP for fast convergence is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN groups Using multiple spanning trees can provide multiple forwarding paths and enable load balancing One or more VLANs can be grouped into a Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTP builds a separate Multiple Spanning Tree MST for each instance to maintain connectivity among each of the assigned VLAN groups MSTP then builds a Internal Spanning Tree IST for the Region containing all commonly configured MSTP bridges T C DIST MST1 D for this Region Region R N wee A s a X d D An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same MST Configuration Identifiers including the Region Name Revision Level and Configuration Digest see Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees on page 16 An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP Instances An Internal Spanning Tree IST is used to connect all the MSTP switches within an MST region A Common Spanning Tree CST interconnects all adjacent MST Regions and acts as a virtual bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global netw
520. snooping vlan 22 9 ip dhcp snooping binding 22 10 show ip dhcp snooping This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping Global DHCP Snooping status disable DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs at Verify Source Mac Address enable Interface Trusted Eth 1 1 No Eth 1 2 No Eth 1 3 No Eth 1 4 No Eth 1 5 Yes show ip dhcp snooping binding This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show ip dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease sec Type 11 22 33 44 55 66 192 168 0 99 0 Static DHCPSNP Console VLAN Interface 1 Eth 1 5 22 13 22 Client Security Commands 22 14 Chapter 23 Access Control List Commands Access Control Lists ACL provide packet filtering for IP frames based on address protocol Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code or any frames based on MAC address or Ethernet type To filter packets first create an access list add the required rules specify a mask to modify the precedence in which the rules are checked and then bind the list to a specific port This section describes the Access Control List commands Table 23 1 Access Control List Commands Command Groups Function Page IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses TCP UDP port number 23 1 protocol type and TCP control
521. splays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree See Displaying Interface Settings on page 11 10 for additional information e Discarding Port receives STA configuration messages but does not forward packets e Learning Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information Port address table is cleared and the port begins learning addresses e Forwarding Port forwards packets and continues learning addresses Trunk Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk 19 STA Port Configuration only 11 13 4A 4 Spanning Tree Algorithm The following interface attributes can be configured Spanning Tree Enables disables STA on this interface Default Enabled e Priority Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same the port with the highest priority i e lowest value will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree This makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree Protocol is detecting network loops Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled Default 128 e Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Admin Path Cost This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be
522. sponse time ip igmp snooping query interval and ip igmp snooping immediate leave Example The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping version 1 Console config ip igmp snooping leave proxy This command suppresses leave messages unless received from the last member port in the group Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping leave proxy no ip igmp snooping leave proxy Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration 33 3 33 Multicast Filtering Commands Command Usage This command setting is only effective if IGMP snooping is enabled Any port can be designated as a multicast router port through dynamic or static configuration including ports on Layer 2 or 3 switches If there is more than one multicast router on a LAN segment performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the local segment for group members It propagates service requests on to any upstream multicast router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast router ports not serving as an IGMP querier also forward group leave messages on to the local querier When a non querier port receives an unsolicited leave message it first checks whether this port is the last dynamic member port in the group If this is 1 not the last member port 2 not a multicast router port and 3
523. ssign interfaces via this command If you assign interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands such as vlan on page 30 7 these interfaces will admit traffic of any protocol type into the associated VLAN e When a frame enters a port that has been assigned to a protocol VLAN it is processed in the following manner If the frame is tagged it will be processed according to the standard rules applied to tagged frames If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches the frame is forwarded to the appropriate VLAN Ifthe frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match the frame is forwarded to the default VLAN for this interface Example The following example maps the traffic entering Port 1 which matches the protocol type specified in protocol group 1 to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if protocol vlan protocol group 1 vlan 2 Console config if show protocol vian protocol group This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups Syntax show protocol vlan protocol group group id group id Group identifier for a protocol group Range 1 2147483647 Default Setting All protocol groups are displayed Command Mode Privileged Exec Example This shows protocol group 1 configured for IP over Ethernet Console show protocol vlan protocol group ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type Console 30 18 Configuring Protoco
524. ssignments and CoS settings Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together including ports of different media types All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port channel STP VLAN and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the specified port channel 25 1 2 5 Link Aggregation Commands Dynamically Creating a Port Channel Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria Ports must have the same LACP system priority e Ports must have the same port admin key Ethernet Interface e Ifthe port channel admin key lacp admin key Port Channel is not set when a channel group is formed i e it has the null value of 0 this key is set to the same value as the port admin key lacp admin key Ethernet Interface used by the interfaces that joined the group e However if the port channel admin key is set then the port admin key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group e Ifa link goes down LACP port priority is used to select the backup link channel group This command adds a port to a trunk Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk Syntax channel group channel id no channel group channel id Trunk index Range 1 32 Default Setting The current port will be added to this trunk Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet
525. st no spanning tree mst instance_id cost instance_id Instance identifier of the spanning tree Range 0 4094 no leading zeroes cost Path cost for an interface Range 0 for auto configuration 1 65535 for short path cost method 6 1 200 000 000 for long path cost method The recommended path cost range is listed in Table 29 2 on page 29 12 The recommended path cost is listed in Table 29 3 on page 29 12 Default Setting By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 The default path costs are listed in Table 29 4 on page 29 12 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage e Each spanning tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs e This command is used by the multiple spanning tree algorithm to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to interfaces attached to faster media and higher values assigned to interfaces with slower media e Use the no spanning tree mst cost command to specify auto configuration mode e Path cost takes precedence over interface priority 36 Use the spanning tree pathcost method com
526. st UDP port to use Range 1 65535 Default 162 Default Setting e Host Address None Notification Type Traps 20 5 2 Oo SNMP Commands e SNMP Version 1 UDP Port 162 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage 20 6 e If you do not enter an snmp server host command no notifications are sent In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications you must enter at least one snmp server host command In order to enable multiple hosts you must issue a separate snmp server host command for each host The snmp server host command is used in conjunction with the snmp server enable traps command Use the snmp server enable traps command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally For a host to receive notifications at least one snmp server enable traps command and the snmp server host command for that host must be enabled Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp server enable traps command For example some notification types are always enabled Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because
527. st configure a maximum address count from 1 1024 for the port to allow access e Ifa port is disabled shut down due to a security violation it must be manually re enabled from the Port Port Configuration page page 9 3 Command Attributes Port Port number e Name Descriptive text page 24 2 e Action Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected None No action should be taken This is the default Trap Send an SNMP trap message Shutdown Disable the port Trap and Shutdown Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port e Security Status Enables or disables port security on the port Default Disabled Max MAC Count The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on a port Range 0 1024 where 0 means disabled Trunk Trunk number if port is a member page 9 7 and 9 8 Configuring Port Security 7 Web Click Security Port Security Set the action to take when an invalid address is detected on a port mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a port set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port and click Apply Port Security Configuration Port Name Action Security Status Max MAC Count 0 1024 Trunk al MN a I Enabled Po 2 None a Cenaa Poo 3 Noe gt I Enabled ob 4 Noe a I Enabled bo 5 Trap end Shutdown M Enabled fo 6 None Enabl
528. st ip mask precedence in config ip mask acl mask any any dscp config ip mask acl Related Commands show class map 32 8 32 2 match 3 2 match This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic Use the no form to delete the matching criteria Syntax no match access list ac name ip dscp dscp ip precedence ip precedence vlan vlan acl name Name of the access control list Any type of ACL can be specified including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs Range 1 32 characters e dscp ADSCP value Range 0 63 jp precedence An IP Precedence value Range 0 7 vlan A VLAN Range 1 4093 Default Setting None Command Mode Class Map Configuration Command Usage First enter the class map command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command to specify the fields within ingress packets that must match to qualify for this class map Only one match command can be entered per class map The class map uses the Access Control List filtering engine so you must also set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match command See mask IP ACL on page 23 6 and mask MAC ACL on page 23 15 for information on configuring an appropriate ACL mask Example This example creates a class map called rd_class 1 and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console config c
529. ster or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN The default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data rate These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration deregistration e Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs Timer values must meet the following restrictions leave gt 2 x join leaveall gt leave Note Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to the same values Otherwise GVRP may not operate successfully Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if garp timer join 100 Console config if Related Commands show garp timer 30 5 30 4 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 30 show garp timer This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface Syntax show garp timer interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Default Setting Shows all GARP timers Command Mode Normal Exec Privileged Exec Example Console show garp timer ethernet 1 1 Eth 1 1 GARP timer status Join timer 20 centiseconds Leave timer 60 centiseconds Leaveall timer 1000 centiseconds Console Related Commands garp timer 30 4 30 5 30 VLAN Commands Editing VLAN Groups Table 30 3 Commands fo
530. string it sent If the two checksums match this means that the client s private key corresponds to an authorized public key and the client is authenticated Authenticating SSH v2 Clients a The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable b Ifthe specified algorithm is supported by the switch it notifies the client to proceed with the authentication process Otherwise it rejects the request c The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch d When the server receives this message it checks whether the supplied key is acceptable for authentication and if so it then checks whether the signature is correct If both checks succeed the client is authenticated Note The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions ip ssh server This command enables the Secure Shell SSH server on this switch Use the no form to disable this service Syntax no ip ssh server Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The SSH server supports up to four client sessions The maximum number of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions e The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first establishes a connection with the switch and then negotiates with the client
531. switch to QinQ mode and allows the dotiq tunnel port to be configured For an explanation of QinQ see Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling on page 30 20 Default Setting No system mode is set the switch functions in normal operating mode Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Make sure that no dot1q tunnel port is configured before exiting QinQ mode see switchport mode dot1q tunnel on page 30 21 If there are any dotiq tunnel ports set on the switch the no system mode command will fail 19 8 System MTU Commands 4 9 Example Console config system mode ging Console config Related Commands show system mode 19 9 show system mode This command displays the switch system mode Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The system mode displays as QinQ or Normal mode Example Console config system mode ging Console config end Console tshow system mode System mode is QinQ mode Console Related Commands system mode 19 8 System MTU Commands This section describes commands used to configure the Ethernet frame size on the switch Table 19 5 Frame Size Commands Command Function Mode Page jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 19 10 system mtu Sets the maximum transfer unit GC 19 11 show system mtu Shows the maximum transfer unit size for Fast Ethernet and GC 19 11 Gigabit Ethernet ports 19 9 4 9 System M
532. switchport dotlq ethertype 9100 30 22 Console config if Console sh dotig tunnel 30 21 Dotlq Tunnel Port List Total 1 Dotlq Tunnel Ports 0 Dotliq Tunnel Port Channel Console Configuring Private VLANs Private VLANs provide port based security and isolation between ports within the assigned VLAN Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to and from uplink ports Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch Uplink Ports Primary VLAN promiscuous ports Downlink Ports ga0OO Boo Secondary VLAN private ports Enabling Private VLANs Use the Private VLAN Status page to enable disable the Private VLAN function Web Click VLAN Private VLAN Status Select Enable or Disable from the scroll down box and click Apply Private VLAN Status Private VLAN Status Enabled Figure 12 9 Private VLAN Status CLI This example enables private VLANs Console config pvlan 30 14 Console config 12 17 4A 2 VLAN Configuration Configuring Uplink and Downlink Ports Use the Private VLAN Link Status page to set ports as downlink or uplink ports Ports designated as downlink ports can not communicate with any other ports on the switch except for the uplink ports Uplink ports can communicate with any other ports on the switch and with any designated downlink ports Web Click VLAN Private V
533. system Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply Help Links directly to web help Notes 1 To ensure proper screen refresh be sure that Internet Explorer 5 x is configured as follows Under the menu Tools Internet Options General Temporary Internet Files Settings the setting for item Check for newer versions of stored pages should be Every visit to the page 2 When using Internet Explorer 5 0 you may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser s refresh button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Active i e up or down Duplex i e half or full duplex or Flow Control i e with or without flow control Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 9 3 ES3528 Unit 1 Mode Active htajor Minor LJ e e Gl alam alarm he DIAG Se e P fail J Link Up J Link Down ES3528 WDM Unit 1 Mode Active jj Major D Minor alarm alarm FAN Baws AG i Link Up J Link Down Figure 3 2 Front Panel Indicators 3 Configuring the Switch Main Menu Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions The following table briefly descr
534. t Syntax radius server retransmit number_of_retries no radius server retransmit number_of_retries Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access via the RADIUS server Range 1 30 Default Setting 2 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server retransmit 5 Console config radius server timeout This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the RADIUS server Use the no form to restore the default Syntax radius server timeout number_of_seconds no radius server timeout number_of_seconds Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending a request Range 1 65535 Default Setting 5 Command Mode Global Configuration Example Console config radius server timeout 10 Console config show radius server This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec 21 8 TACACS Client 2 4 Example Console show radius server Remote RADIUS server configuration Global settings Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Server 1 Server IP address 192 168 1 1 Communication key with RADIUS server Server port number 1812 Retransmit times 2 Request timeout 5 Console TACACS Client Terminal Access Controller Access Cont
535. t This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging messages Use the no form to remove a syslog server host Syntax no logging host host_ip_address host_ip_address The IP address of a syslog server Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage Use this command more than once to build up a list of host IP addresses The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five Example Console config logging host 10 1 0 3 Console config logging facility This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages Use the no form to return the type to the default Syntax no logging facility type type A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service Range 16 23 Default Setting 23 Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages See RFC 3164 This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch However it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to store messages in the corresponding database Example Console config logging facility 19 Console config 19 30 Event Logging Commands 4 9 logging trap This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server or limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity Use thi
536. t Configuration Name Admin I Enabled Enabled Enabled Speed Duplex fom a Enabled fom E F Enabled fom Ej F Enabled Autonegotiation F 10h F 10f F 100h TF 1000h 100f M 1000f 100h F 1000h M 100f M 1000f F 10h F 10f F 100h F 1000h M 100f M 1000f F 10h F 10f F 10Gh F 10Gf F 10Gh F 10Gf F 10Gh F 10Gf F Sym Cre F Sym Fe F Sym FFC Media Type None None None Trunk Enabled fom a F Enabled F 10h F 10f F 100h TF 1000h M 100f 1000f F 10Gh F 106f F Sym Cre None 7 Enabled fron E F Enabled F 10h F 10f F 100h M 1000h m 100 M 1000f F 10Gh F 10Gf F Sym FFC None 7 F Enabled fom E F Enabled F 10h F 10f F 100h M 1000h 100 M 1000f F 10Gh F 10Gf F Sym Cre None Enabled F Enabled F 10h F 10f F 100h F 1000h F 100f M 1000f F 10Gh F 10Gf F Sym Cre None 7 Wn I Enabled fom F Enabled F 10h F 108 F 100h M 1000h F 100f F 1000f F 10Gh F 10Gf F Sym Cre None Ogg gig g 8 i Figure 9 2 Port Port Configuration CLI Select the interface and then enter the required settings Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Conso Console config if no shutdown le config if no negotiation le config if speed duplex 100half le config if negotiation le config if capabilities 1
537. t Domain Name sample com Domain Name List Name Server List Console Related Commands ip domain list 34 3 ip name server 34 4 ip domain lookup 34 5 ip domain list This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete host names i e host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted notation Use the no form to remove a name from this list Syntax no ip domain list name name Name of the host Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name Range 1 63 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 34 3 34 Domain Name Service Commands Command Usage e Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time e When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch it will work through the domain list appending each domain name in the list to the host name and checking with the specified name servers for a match e Ifthere is no domain list the domain name specified with the ip domain name command is used If there is a domain list the default domain name is not used Example This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list Console config ip domain list sample com jp Console config ip domain list sample com uk Console config end Console show dns Domain Lookup Status DNS disabled Default Domain Name sample com Domain Name L
538. t Key Settings 6 10 Configuring the Secure Shell 6 CLI This example generates a host key pair using both the RSA and DSA algorithms stores the keys to flash memory and then displays the host s public keys Console ip ssh crypto host key generate 21 20 Console ip ssh save host key 21 21 Console show public key host 21 23 Host RSA 1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761 82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033 86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127 60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025 190932104328579045764891 DSA ssh dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3 8693 YVX1ME1SHLOEcE Re6hlasfEthIwmj hLY400j qUZpcEQUgC Y1lum0Y2uo0Lka Py9ieGWO8 2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO9XTs7XKcO05xfzkBi KviDa 20r1Iz6UK 6vFOgvUDFed1nixYTVo h5v8r0ea2 rpn06DkZAAAAFOQCNZn x17dwpW8Rrv DOnSWw4Q0k 6QAAATEAptkGeB6 B5hwagH4gUuocy6ilTmrmSidgfwO9OGRPUMbCAkCC uzxat0o7 drnIZypMx Sx5RUdGMGgKS 9ywsalcWqHeFY5i1lc31DCNBueeLykZzVS RS tazTKIk zrJh8GLG Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn Q7 IphPqyJ309MK8LFDf mJ EAAACAL8A6tESiswP20FqX7VGoEbzVDSOL RIMFy3 iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc3 1Mt gqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NxgilCg5z7VqbmRm2 8mWc5a f 8TUAg PNWKV6WOhqmshQdotVzDR1e XKNTZj 0OuTwWwfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrb1 DMdAfjnte8MZZs Console Configuring the SSH Server The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication Field Attributes e SSH Server Status All
539. t gateway if you are managing the switch from a different IP subnet For example Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 10 1 0 254 255 255 255 0 Console config if exit Console config ip default gateway 10 1 0 254 If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to the Internet you need to apply for a registered IP address However if you are attached to an isolated network then you can use any IP address that matches the network segment to which you are attached After you configure the switch with an IP address you can open a Telnet session by performing these steps 1 From the remote host enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the device you want to access 2 Atthe prompt enter the user name and system password The CLI will display the Vty n prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged access mode i e Privileged Exec or Vty n gt for the guest to show that you are using normal access mode i e Normal Exec where n indicates the number of the current Telnet session 3 Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command After entering the Telnet command the login screen displays Username admin Password CLI session with the Layer 2 Ethernet Metro Access Switch is opened To end the CLI session enter Exit
540. t server ip address gt Source certificate file name lt certificate file name gt Source private file name lt private key file name gt Private password lt password for private key gt Note The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated To reset the switch type reload at the command prompt console reload Configuring the Secure Shell The Berkley standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix systems Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows and other environments These tools including commands such as rlogin remote login rsh remote shell and rcp remote copy are not secure from hostile attacks The Secure Shell SSH includes server client applications intended as a secure replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools SSH can also provide remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol the switch generates a public key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access authentication SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and SSH enabled management station clients and ensures that data traveling over the network arrives unaltered Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch for management via the SSH protocol Note The switch supports both SSH Version 1 5 and
541. t spanning trees for VLAN groups Glossary 2 Glossary IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID and password for authentication IEEE 802 3ac Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging IEEE 802 3x Defines Ethernet frame start stop requests and timers used for flow control on full duplex links IGMP Snooping Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members IGMP Query On each subnetwork one IGMP capable device will act as the querier that is the device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services If there is more than one multicast switch router on a given subnetwork one of the devices is made the querier and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership In Band Management Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network IP Multicast Filtering A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts IP Precedence The Type of Service ToS octet in the IPv4 header includes three
542. t the stack or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI Web If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning you will not be able to renew the IP settings via the web interface You can only restart DHCP service via the web interface if the current address is still available CLI Enter the following command to restart DHCP service Console ip dhcp restart 35 3 Console Managing Firmware You can upload download firmware to or from a TFTP server or copy files to and from switch units in a stack By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server that file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation You can also set the switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version You must specify the method of file transfer along with the file type and file names as required Command Attributes File Transfer Method The firmware copy operation includes these options file to file Copies a file within the switch directory assigning it a new name file to tftp Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server tftp to file Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch e TFTP Server IP Address The IP address of a TFTP server e File Type Specify opcode operational code to copy firmware e File Name The file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length f
543. t1q ethertype pid no switchport dot1q ethertype tpid Sets the ethertype value for 802 1Q encapsulation This identifier is used to select a nonstandard 2 byte ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames The standard ethertype value is 0x8100 Range 0 ffff hexadecimal Default Setting No dotiq ethertype is set Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Use the switchport dot1q ethertype command to set a custom 802 1Q ethertype value on the selected interface This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802 1Q tagged frames For example 0x1234 is set as the custom 802 1Q ethertype on a trunk port incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the ethertype field as they would be with a standard 802 1Q trunk Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as untagged frames and assigned to the native VLAN of that port All members of a VLAN should be set to the same ethertype Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport dotlq ethertype 9100 Console config if Related Commands show interfaces switchport 24 11 30 22 Chapter 31 Class of Service Commands The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets have greater precedence when traffic
544. table However you can map the priority levels to the switch s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for your own network Table 13 2 CoS Priority Levels Priority Level Traffic Type 1 Background 2 Spare 0 default Best Effort 3 Excellent Effort 4 Controlled Load 5 6 7 Video less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter Voice less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter Network Control Command Attributes e Priority CoS value Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest priority Traffic Class25 Output queue buffer Range 0 7 where 7 is the highest CoS priority queue 25 CLI shows Queue ID 13 3 A 3 Class of Service Web Click Priority Traffic Classes Assign priorities to the traffic classes i e output queues then click Apply Traffic Classes Priority Traffic Class o ey 1 ey fe B e 4 7 5 e7 E 07 P o N as y n anle Figure 13 2 Traffic Classes CLI The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments to a one to one mapping Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config queue cos map 0 0 31 4 Console config queue cos map 1 1 Console config queue cos map 2 2 Console config exit Console show queue cos map 31 6 Information of Eth 1 1 CoS Value 01234567 Priority Queue 01234567 Information of Eth 1 2 CoS Value 01234567 1234567 Priority Queue 0 Ma
545. table dynamic Console 28 2 show mac address table 23 show mac address table This command shows classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show mac address table address mac address mask interface interface vlan vian id sort address vlan interface mac address MAC address e mask Bits to match in the address interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 e vian id VLAN ID Range 1 4093 sort Sort by address vlan or interface Default Setting None Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each interface Note that the Type field may include the following types Learned Dynamic address entries Permanent Static entry Delete on reset Static entry to be deleted when system is reset The mask should be hexadecimal numbers representing an equivalent bit mask in the form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is applied to the specified MAC address Enter hexadecimal numbers where an equivalent binary bit 0 means to match a bit and 1 means to ignore a bit For example a mask of 00 00 00 00 00 00 means an exact match and a mask of FF FF FF FF FF FF means any The maximum number of address entries is 8191 Example Console show mac address table Interface MAC Address VLAN Type Eth
546. tailed information on using the CLI refer to Command Groups on page 17 10 Basic Configuration 2 Remote Connections Prior to accessing the switch s onboard agent via a network connection you must first configure it with a valid IP address subnet mask and default gateway using a console connection DHCP or BOOTP protocol An IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default To manually configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP see Setting an IP Address on page 2 4 Note This switch supports four concurrent Telnet SSH sessions After configuring the switch s IP parameters you can access the onboard configuration program from anywhere within the attached network The onboard configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to the network The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web browser Internet Explorer 5 0 or above or Netscape Navigator 6 2 or above or from a network computer using SNMP network management software Note The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions To access the full range of SNMP management functions you must use SNMP based network management software Basic Configuration Console Connection The CLI program provides two different command levels normal access level Normal Exec and privileged access level Privileged Exec The commands available at the Normal Exec l
547. tatus Indicates if the link is up or down Port operation status Provides detailed information on port state Displayed only when the link is up Operation speed duplex Shows the current speed and duplex mode Flow control type Indicates the type of flow control currently in use IEEE 802 3x Back Pressure or none 10 ES3528 11 ES3528 WDM 9 2 Configuring Interface Connections 9 CLI This example shows the connection status for Port 5 Console show interfaces status ethernet 1 5 24 9 Information of Eth 1 13 Basic information Port type 100TX Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A5 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full Broadcast storm Enabled Broadcast storm limit 500 packets second Flow control Disabled LACP Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Port security action None Media type None Current status Link status Down Operation speed duplex 100full Flow control type None Console Configuring Interface Connections You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable disable an interface set auto negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise or manually fix the speed and duplex mode and flow control Command Attributes Name Allows you to label an interface Range 1 64 characters Admin Allows you to manually disable an interface You can disable an interfa
548. tatus active View Name readaccess Subtree OID 1 3 6 1 2 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active View Name defaultview Subtree OID 1 View Type included Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console 5 18 Chapter 6 User Authentication You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods Port based authentication using IEEE 802 1X can also be configured to control either management access to the uplink ports or client access to the data ports This switch provides secure network management access using the following options User Accounts Manually configure management access rights for users e Authentication Settings Use remote authentication to configure access rights e HTTPS Settings Provide a secure web connection SSH Settings Provide a secure shell for secure Telnet access 802 1X Use IEEE 802 1X port authentication to control access to specific ports IP Filter Filters management access to the web SNMP or Telnet interface Configuring User Accounts The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters However the administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent You should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible and store it in a safe place The default guest name is gu
549. tatus port channel 1 command shows that Trunk1 has been established Console Console Console Console Console Console config interface ethernet 1 46 config if lacp config if exit config interface ethernet 1 47 config if lacp config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 48 Console config if lacp Console config if end Console show interfaces status port channel 1 Information of Trunk 1 Basic information Port type 1000T Mac address 00 30 F1 D4 73 A4 Configuration Name Port admin Up Speed duplex Auto Capabilities 10half 10full 100half 100full 1000full Flow control Disabled Port security Disabled Max MAC count 0 Current status Created by Lacp Link status Up Operation speed duplex 1000full Flow control type None Member Ports Eth1 46 Eth1 47 Eth1 48 Console 25 3 2 5 Link Aggregation Commands lacp system priority This command configures a port s LACP system priority Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax lacp actor partner system priority priority no lacp actor partner system priority actor The local side an aggregate link partner The remote side of an aggregate link e priority This priority is used to determine link aggregation group LAG membership and to identify this device to other switches during LAG negotiations Range 0 65535 Default Setting 32768 Command Mode Interface Configuration
550. te a class map and return to Global configuration mode Syntax no class map class map name match any match any Match any condition within a class map class map name Name of the class map Range 1 32 characters Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map configuration mode Then use the match command page 32 3 to specify the criteria for ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map Only one match command is permitted per class map so the match any field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command for a class map e The class map uses the Access Control List filtering engine so you must also set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match command See mask IP ACL on page 23 6 or mask MAC ACL on page 23 15 for information on configuring an appropriate ACL mask e The class map is used with a policy map page 32 4 to create a service policy page 32 7 for a specific interface that defines packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing Example This example creates a class map call rd_class and sets it to match packets marked for DSCP service value 3 Console Console Console Console Console Console config class map rd_class match any config cmap match ip dscp 3 config cmap exit config access li
551. ted with a host name in the static table or via information returned from a name server a DNS client can try each address in succession until it establishes a connection with the target device Field Attributes Host Name Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses Range 1 127 characters IP Address Internet address es associated with a host name Range 1 8 addresses Alias Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address es as a previously configured entry 16 3 A 6 Domain Name Service Web Select DNS Static Host Table Enter a host name and one or more corresponding addresses then click Apply Static Host Table Host Name IP Address Alias rd5 f0 1 0 55 frd Delete 192 168 1 55 fies Clear Add Static Host Host Name IP Address 1 IP Address 2 IP Address 3 IP Address 4 IP Address 5 IP Address 6 IP Address 7 IP Address 8 Asal Figure 16 2 DNS Static Host Table CLI This example maps two address to a host name and then configures an alias host name for the same addresses Console config ip host rd5 192 168 1 55 10 1 0 55 34 1 Console config ip host rd6 10 1 0 55 Console show hosts 34 6 Hostname ras Inet address 10 1 0 55 192 168 1 55 Alias 1 rd6 Console 16 4 Displaying the DNS Cache 4 6 Displaying the DNS Cache You can display entries in the DNS c
552. tem prompts for data required to complete the copy command The destination file name should not contain slashes or the leading letter of the file name should not be a period and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch Valid characters A Z a z 0 9 _ Due to the size limit of the flash memory the switch supports only two operation code files The maximum number of user defined configuration files depends on available memory You can use Factory_Default_Config cfg as the source to copy from the factory default configuration file but you cannot use it as the destination To replace the startup configuration you must use startup config as the destination 19 13 A 9 System Management Commands The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP server You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware or contact your distributor for help For information on specifying an https certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 6 6 For information on configuring the switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection see ip http secure server on page 21 12 Example The following example shows how to download new firmware from a TFTP server Console copy tftp file TFTP server ip address 10 1 0 19 Choose file type 1 config 2 opcode
553. ter Policy Map configuration mode Then use the class command to enter Policy Map Class configuration mode And finally use the set and police commands to specify the match criteria where the set command classifies the service that an IP packet will receive police command defines the maximum throughput burst rate and the action that results from a policy violation e Currently you may only configure one rule per Class Map but you can assign one or more classes to a policy map Example This example creates a policy called rd_policy uses the class command to specify the previously defined rd_class uses the set command to classify the service that incoming packets will receive and then uses the police command to limit the average bandwidth to 100 000 Kbps the burst rate to 1522 bytes and configure the response to drop any violating packets Console config policy map rd_policy Console config pmap class rd_class Console config pmap c set ip dscp 3 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action drop Console config pmap c 32 5 3 2 Quality of Service Commands set This command services IP traffic by setting a CoS DSCP or IP Precedence value in a matching packet as specified by the match command on page 32 3 Use the no form to remove the traffic classification Syntax no set cos new cos ip dscp new dscp ip precedence new precedence new cos New Class of Service Co
554. ter tag s VLAN 6 After packet classification the packet is written to memory for processing as a single tagged or double tagged packet 7 The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN the outer tag will be stripped If it is a tagged member the outgoing packet will have two tags 12 14 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling f 2D Configuration Limitations for QinQ The native VLAN of uplink ports should not be used as the SPVLAN If the SPVLAN is the uplink port s native VLAN the uplink port must be an untagged member of the SPVLAN Then the outer SPVLAN tag will be stripped when the packets are sent out Another reason is that it causes none customer packets will be forwarded to SPVLAN Static trunk port groups are compatible with QinQ tunnel ports as long as the QinQ configuration is consistent within a trunk port group QinQ and L2MPLS mode cannot be supported at the same time The native VLAN VLAN 1 is not normally added to transmitted frames Avoiding using VLAN 1 as an SPVLAN tag for customer traffic to reduce the risk of misconfiguration Instead use VLAN 1 as a management VLAN instead of a data VLAN in the service provider network There are some inherent incompatibilities between Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching A tunnel port cannot be a routed port Tunnel ports do not support IP Access Control Lists Layer 3 Quality of Service QoS and other QoS
555. terminal to the console port complete the following steps 1 Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software and tighten the captive retaining screws on the DB 9 connector 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the RS 232 serial port on the switch 3 Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows e Select the appropriate serial port COM port 1 or COM port 2 e Set to any of the following baud rates 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Note Set to 9600 baud if want to view all the system initialization messages e Set the data format to 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity e Set flow control to none e Set the emulation mode to VT100 e When using HyperTerminal select Terminal keys not Windows keys Notes 1 When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000 make sure that you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in HyperTerminal s VT100 emulation See www microsoft com for information on Windows 2000 service packs 2 Refer to Line Commands on page 19 19 for a complete description of console configuration options 3 Once you have set up the terminal correctly the console login screen will be displayed For a description of how to use the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 17 1 For a list of all the CLI commands and de
556. ters Configuring a Class Map Creating QoS Policies Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues Chapter 15 Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast VLAN Registration Configuring Global MVR Settings Displaying MVR Interface Status Configuring MVR Interface Status Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups viii 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 9 12 10 12 12 12 16 12 17 12 17 12 18 12 18 12 19 12 20 13 1 13 1 13 1 13 3 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 7 13 7 13 8 13 10 13 11 14 1 14 1 14 2 14 5 14 8 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 5 15 6 15 7 15 8 15 9 15 10 15 11 15 12 15 14 Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces Chapter 16 Domain Name Service Configuring General DNS Service Parameters Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries Displaying the DNS Cache Section Ill Command Line Interface Chapter 17 Overview of Command Line Interface Using the Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI Console Connection Telnet Connection Entering Commands Keywords and Arguments Minimum Abbreviation Command Completion Getting Help on Commands Showing Commands Partial Keyword Lookup Negating the Effect of Commands Using Command History Understanding Command Modes Exec
557. the users table and select the new group SNMPv3 Users New Delete r Name Group Name Model Level Authentication Privancy Actions I daw DefaultROGroup v1 noAuthNoPriv None None Change Group F chris snmpy3users v3 authPriv MD5 DESSE Change Group F steve snmpyGusers v3 authNoPriv MD5 None Change Group SNMPv3 Users New SNMPV3 User User Name G l Group Name C snmpv3users z a Ma SNMPv3 Users Edit Security Level noAuthNoPriv User Authentication Authentication Protocol M 5 1 User Name david e Authentication Password Group Name DetautROGroup x Back Change Data Privacy Privacy Protocol 556 Privacy Password Back Add Figure 5 6 Configuring SNMPv3 Users CLI Use the snmp server user command to configure a new user name and assign it to a group Console config snmp server user chris group r amp d v3 auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien 20 14 Console config exit Console show snmp user 20 15 EngineId 80000034030001 488 5200000 User Name chris Authentication Protocol md5 Privacy Protocol des56 Storage Type nonvolatile Row Status active Console 5 10 Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 5 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name Users must be configured wit
558. ther STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol messages the RSTP node transmits as described below STP Mode If the switch receives an 802 1D BPDU i e STP BPDU after a port s migration delay timer expires the switch assumes it is connected to an 802 1D bridge and starts using only 802 1D BPDUs RSTP Mode If RSTP is using 802 1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires RSTP restarts the migration delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port e Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Toallow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network you must configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN instance assignments Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes Changing modes stops all spanning tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system in the new mode temporarily disrupting user traffic Command Attributes Basic Configuration of Global Settings e Spanning Tree State Enables disables STA on this switch Default Enabled Spanning Tree Type Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D i e when this option is selected the switch will use RSTP set t
559. tic Console 15 6 Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query 4 5 Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast service Command Attribute VLAN ID Selects the VLAN for which to display port members Multicast IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Multicast Group Port List Shows the interfaces that have already been assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service Web Click IGMP Snooping IP Multicast Registration Table Select a VLAN ID and the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll down lists The switch will display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service IP Multicast Registration Table VLAN ID 1 Multicast IP Address 2241 1 12 Multicast Group Port List Unit Portl User Figure 15 4 IP Multicast Registration Table CLI This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1 along with the ports propagating the corresponding services The Type field shows if this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured Console tshow mac address table multicast vlan 1 33 6 VLAN M cast IP addr Member ports Type a 224 1012 Eth1 12 USER a 224 1 2 3 Eth1 12 IGMP Console 15 7 4 5 Multicast Filtering Assigning Ports to Multicast Services Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured us
560. tic Table Adding Static Members 12 8 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs f 2 CLI The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2 Console config interface ethernet 1 1 24 1 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 30 11 Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 2 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged Console config if exit Console config interface ethernet 1 13 Console config if switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged Console config if Adding Static Members to VLANs Port Index Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the selected interface as a tagged member Command Attributes Interface Port or trunk identifier e Member VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member Non Member VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member Web Open VLAN 802 1Q VLAN Static Membership by Port Select an interface from the scroll down box Port or Trunk Click Query to display membership information for the interface Select a VLAN ID and then click Add to add the interface as a tagged member or click Remove to remove the interface After configuring VLAN membership for each interface click Apply VLAN Static Membership by Port Interface Pon 3 Zj C Trunk z Query Member Non Member Vlan 1 l Figure 12 6 VLAN Static Membership by Port CLI This example add
561. timezone usually an acronym Range 1 29 characters hours Number of hours before after UTC Range 0 13 hours minutes Number of minutes before after UTC Range 0 59 minutes before utc Sets the local time zone before east of UTC e after utc Sets the local time zone after west of UTC Default Setting None Command Mode Global Configuration 19 40 Time Commands 4 9 Command Usage This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal Time UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Example Console config clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after UTC Console config Related Commands show sntp 19 40 calendar set This command sets the system clock It may be used if there is no time server on your network or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time server Syntax calendar set hour min sec day month year month day year hour Hour in 24 hour format Range 0 23 e min Minute Range 0 59 sec Second Range 0 59 day Day of month Range 1 31 month january february march april may june july august september october november december year Year 4 digit Range 2
562. tion along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Command Attributes IGMP Status When enabled the switch will monitor network traffic to determine which hosts want to receive multicast traffic This is also referred to as IGMP Snooping Default Enabled Act as IGMP Querier When enabled the switch can serve as the Querier which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Default Disabled IGMP Query Count Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default 2 IGMP Query Interval Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host query messages Range 60 125 seconds Default 125 IGMP Report Delay Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port and removes the entry from its list Range 5 25 seconds Default 10 15 3 4 5 Multicast Filtering IGMP Query Timeout The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before it considers the router port i e the interface which had been receiving query packets to have expired Range 300 500 seconds Default 300 e IGMP Version Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on the network Range 1 3 De
563. tion for bridge extension MIB Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups including name VID and state 30 6 Configuring VLAN Configures VLAN interface parameters including ingress and egress 30 8 Interfaces tagging mode ingress filtering PVID and GVRP Displaying VLAN Displays VLAN groups status port members and MAC addresses 30 13 Information Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs including uplink and downlink ports 30 14 Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 30 16 Configuring 802 1Q Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ to segregate and preserve 30 20 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across the network This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces and globally for the switch as well as how to display default configuration settings for the Bridge Extension MIB Table 30 2 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands Command Function Mode Page bridge ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 30 2 show bridge ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 30 2 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 30 3 switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 30 12 show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE PE 30 3 ga
564. tmask ethertype ethertype bitmask pktformat Check the packet format field If this keyword must be used in the mask the packet format must be specified in ACL rule to match any Any address will be matched 23 15 2 3 Access Control List Commands host The address must be for a single node source bitmask Source address of rule must match this bitmask destination bitmask Destination address of rule must match this bitmask e vid Check the VLAN ID field vid bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask ethertype Check the Ethernet type field e ethertype bitmask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask Default Setting None Command Mode MAC Mask Command Usage e Up to seven masks can be assigned to an ingress or egress ACL e Packets crossing a port are checked against all the rules in the ACL until a match is found The order in which these packets are checked is determined by the mask and not the order in which the ACL rules were entered e First create the required ACLs and inbound or outbound masks before mapping an ACL to an interface Example This example shows how to create an Ingress MAC ACL and bind it to a port You can then see that the order of the rules have been changed by the mask Console config access list mac M4 Console config mac acl permit any any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff an
565. to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access Similarly a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails re authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message Example Console config interface eth 1 2 Console config if dot1lx operation mode multi host max count 10 Console config if dot1x re authenticate This command forces re authentication on all ports or a specific interface Syntax dot1x re authenticate interface interface ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 Command Mode Privileged Exec Command Usage The re authentication process verifies the connected client s user ID and password on the RADIUS server During re authentication the client remains connected the network and the process is handled transparently by the dot1x client software Only if re authentication fails is the port blocked Example Console dotix re authenticate Console dot1x re authentication This command enables periodic re authentication for a specified port Use the no form to disable re authentication Syntax no dot1x re authentication Command Mode Interface Configuration 21 27 2 4 User Authentication Commands Command Usage e The re authentication process verifies the connected client s user ID and password on the RADIUS server During re authentication the client remains connecte
566. to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid address the switch will reject the connection enter an event message in the system log and send a trap message to the trap manager IP address can be configured for SNMP web and Telnet access respectively Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses either individual addresses or address ranges When entering addresses for the same group i e SNMP web or Telnet the switch will not accept overlapping address ranges When entering addresses for different groups the switch will accept overlapping address ranges You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range You must delete the entire range and reenter the addresses You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address or by specifying both the start address and end address 21 33 2 4 User Authentication Commands Example This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses Console config management all client 192 168 1 19 Console config management all client 192 168 1 25 192 168 1 30 Console show management This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management access to the switch through various protocols Syntax show management all client http client snmp client telnet client all client Adds IP address es to the SNMP web and Telnet groups http client Adds IP address es to the web group
567. to be followed by the VLAN state active VLAN is operational suspend VLAN is suspended Suspended VLANs do not pass packets Default Setting By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active Command Mode VLAN Database Configuration Command Usage no vlan vian id deletes the VLAN no vlan vian id name removes the VLAN name no vlan vian id state returns the VLAN to the default state i e active e You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch Example The following example adds a VLAN using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5 The VLAN is activated by default Console config vlan database Console config vlan vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet Console config vlan Related Commands show vlan 30 13 30 7 30 VLAN Commands Configuring VLAN Interfaces Table 30 4 Commands for Configuring VLAN Interfaces Command Function Mode Page interface vian Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC 30 8 switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 30 9 switchport Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 30 9 acceptable frame types switchport ingress filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 30 10 switchport native vlan Configures the PVID native VLAN of an interface IC 30 11 switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 30 11 switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 30 3 switchport forbid
568. to select either DES 56 bit or 3DES 168 bit for data encryption You must generate DSA and RSA host keys before enabling the SSH server 21 17 2 4 User Authentication Commands Example Console ip ssh crypto host key generate dsa Console configure Console config ip ssh server Console config Related Commands ip ssh crypto host key generate 21 20 show ssh 21 22 ip ssh timeout This command configures the timeout for the SSH server Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh timeout seconds no ip ssh timeout seconds The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation Range 1 120 Default Setting 10 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the client during the SSH negotiation phase Once an SSH session has been established the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec timeout command for vty sessions Example Console config ip ssh timeout 60 Console config Related Commands exec timeout 19 22 show ip ssh 21 22 21 18 Secure Shell Commands 21 ip ssh authentication retries This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to reauthenticate a user Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax ip ssh authentication retries count no ip ssh authentication retries count The number of authenticati
569. ty level 7 SMTP destination email addresses ted this company com tt SMTP source email address bill this company com SMTP status Enabled Console Time Commands The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers NTP or SNTP Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and times for event entries If the clock is not set the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup Table 19 14 Time Commands Command Function Mode Page sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers fec 19 38 sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 19 39 sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 19 39 show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE PE 19 40 clock timezone Sets the time zone for the switch s internal clock GC 19 40 calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 19 41 show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE PE 19 42 19 37 A 9 System Management Commands sntp client This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command Use the no form to disable SNTP client requests Syntax no sntp client Default Setting Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage e The time acquired from time servers is us
570. ty of service that an IP packet will receive in the Action field defining the maximum throughput and burst rate in the Meter field and the action that results from a policy violation in the Exceed field Then finally click Add to register the new policy A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same interface with the Service Policy Settings page 14 8 You can configure up to 63 policers i e class maps for Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ingress ports Policing is based on a token bucket where bucket depth i e the maximum burst before the bucket overflows is by specified the Burst field and the average rate tokens are removed from the bucket is by specified by the Rate option After using the policy map to define packet classification service tagging and bandwidth policing it must be assigned to a specific interface by a service policy page 14 8 to take effect Command Attributes Policy Map Modify Name and Description Configures the name and a brief description of a policy map Range 1 16 characters for the name 1 256 characters for the description Edit Classes Opens the Policy Rule Settings page for the selected class entry Modify the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page Add Policy Opens the Policy Configuration page Enter a policy name and description on this page and click Add to open the Policy Rule Settings p
571. uery messages may not be received by the switch In this case Layer 2 IGMP Query can be used to actively ask the attached hosts if they want to receive a specific multicast service IGMP Query thereby identifies the ports containing hosts requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network s performance so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing multicast group hosts or multicast routers switches instead of flooding traffic to all ports in the subnet VLAN You can also configure a single network wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing in other standard or private VLAN groups preserving security and data isolation Multicast VLAN Registration on page 15 9 15 1 4 5 Multicast Filtering Layer 2 IGMP Snooping and Query IGMP Snooping and Query If multicast routing is not supported on other switches in your network you can use IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query page 15 3 to monitor IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers and dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic When using IGMPv3 snooping service requests from IGMP Version 1 2 or 3 hosts are all forwarded to the upstream router as IGMPv3 rep
572. unction Mode Page ip source guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP IC 22 3 address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address ip source guard Adds a static address to the source guard binding table GC 22 5 binding show ip Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each PE 22 6 source guard interface show ip Shows the source guard binding table PE 22 6 source guard binding ip source guard This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP address or source IP address and corresponding MAC address Use the no form to disable this function Syntax ip source guard sip sip mac no ip source guard e sip Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table sip mac Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table Default Setting Disabled 22 3 22 Client Security Commands Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Command Usage 22 4 Source guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives messages from outside the network or firewall and therefore may be subject to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor Setting source guard mode to sip or sip mac enables this function on the selected port Use the sip option to check the VLAN ID source IP address and port number against
573. up Member Configuration CLI This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port Console config interface ethernet 1 2 24 1 Console config if mvr group 228 1 23 1 33 13 Console config if 15 15 4 5 Multicast Filtering 15 16 Chapter 16 Domain Name Service The Domain Naming System DNS service on this switch allows host names to be mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name servers on the network When a client device designates this switch as a DNS server the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding DNS queries to the switch and waiting for a response You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain names to IP addresses configure default domain names or specify one or more name servers to use for domain name to address translation Configuring General DNS Service Parameters Command Usage To enable DNS service on this switch configure one or more name servers and enable domain lookup status To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client i e not formatted with dotted notation you can specify a default domain name or a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order If there is no domain list the default domain name is used If there is a domain list the system will search it for a corresponding entry If none is found it will use the def
574. up to five trap managers e Current Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured Trap Manager IP Address IP address of a new management station to receive notification messages Trap Manager Community String Specifies a valid community string for the new trap manager entry Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page for 5 4 Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 5 Version 1 or 2c clients or define a corresponding User Name in the SNMPv3 Users page for Version 3 clients Range 1 32 characters case sensitive Trap UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager Trap Version Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1 v2c or v3 Default v1 Trap Security Level When trap version 3 is selected you must specify one of the following security levels Default noAuthNoPriv noAuthNoPriv There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP communications AuthNoPriv SNMP communications use authentication but the data is not encrypted only available for the SNMPv3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Trap Inform Notifications are sent as inform messages Note that this option is only available for version 2c and 3 hosts Default traps are used Timeout Th
575. update from the next server in the sequence Web Select SNTP Configuration Modify any of the required parameters and click Apply SNTP Configuration SNTP Client fo Enabled SNTP Polling Interval 16 16384 16 SNTP Server fio 0 19 137 862 140 80 128 250 36 2 Figure 4 21 SNTP Configuration 4 26 Setting the System Clock 4 CLI This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client and then displays the current time and settings Console config sntp client 19 38 Console config sntp poll 16 19 39 Console config sntp server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 19 39 Console config exit Console show sntp 19 40 Current time Jan 6 14 56 05 2004 Poll interval 60 Current mode unicast SNTP status Enabled SNTP server 10 1 0 19 137 82 140 80 128 250 36 2 Current server 128 250 36 2 Console Setting the Time Zone SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time or UTC formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT based on the time at the Earth s prime meridian zero degrees longitude To display a time corresponding to your local time you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is east before or west after of UTC Command Attributes Current Time Displays the current time e Name Assigns a name to the time zone Range 1 29 characters Hours 0 13 The number of hours before after UTC Minutes 0 59 The number of minutes before after
576. uplink port e Private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist simultaneously within the same switch 30 14 Configuring Private VLANs 30 Entering the pvlan command without any parameters enables the private VLAN Entering no pvlan disables the private VLAN Example This example enables the private VLAN and then sets port 12 as the uplink and ports 5 8 as the downlinks Console config pvlan Console config pvlan up link ethernet 1 12 down link ethernet 1 5 8 Console config show pvlan This command displays the configured private VLAN Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show pvlan Private VLAN status Enabled Up link port Ethernet 1 12 Down link port Ethernet 1 5 Ethernet 1 6 Ethernet 1 7 Ethernet 1 8 Console 30 15 30 VLAN Commands Configuring Protocol based VLANs The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined
577. user account will be automatically generated and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host e Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default The recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch Traps are therefore not as reliable as inform messages which include a request for acknowledgement of receipt Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the host However note that informs consume more system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is received Informs also add to network traffic You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host complete these steps 1 Enable the SNMP agent page 5 2 2 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages 3 Create a view with the required notification messages page 5 16 4 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 5 13 To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host complete these steps Enable the SNMP agent page 5 2 Enable trap informs as described in the following pages Create a view with the required notification messages page 5 16 Create a group that includes the required notify view page 5 13 Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides page 5 8 Then configure a remote user page 5 11 OO EO NS Command Attributes Trap Manager Capability This switch supports
578. ut GC 33 9 router port expire time 33 6 IGMP Query Commands 33 ip igmp snooping querier This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier Use the no form to disable it Syntax no ip igmp snooping querier Default Setting Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage IGMP snooping querier is not supported for IGMPv3 snooping see ip igmp snooping version page 33 3 e If enabled the switch will serve as querier if elected The querier is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic Example Console config ip igmp snooping querier Console config ip igmp snooping query count This command configures the query count Use the no form to restore the default Syntax ip igmp snooping query count count no ip igmp snooping query count count The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the multicast group Range 2 10 Default Setting 2 times Command Mode Global Configuration Command Usage The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a multicast client before taking action If a querier has sent a number of queries defined by this command but a client has not responded a countdown timer is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query max response time If the countdown finishes and the client still has not responded then that client i
579. v3 security model AuthPriv SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption only available for the SNMPv3 security model Authentication Protocol The method used for user authentication Options MD5 SHA Default MD5 Authentication Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required Privacy Protocol The encryption algorithm use for data privacy only 56 bit DES is currently available e Privacy Password A minimum of eight plain text characters is required 5 11 5 Simple Network Management Protocol Web Click SNMP SNMPv3 Remote Users Click New to configure a user name In the New User page define a name and assign it to a group then click Add to save the configuration and return to the User Name list To delete a user check the box next to the user name then click Delete SNMPv3 Remote Users lus Name Group Name Engine ID Model Level Authentication Privancy rad 80000000030004e2b316c54321 v3 noAuthNoPriv None l None ISNMPv3 Remote Users New SNMPV3 User User Name Group Name e kg public x Remote IP 192 168 1 19 z Security Model Y1 noAuthNoPriv Security Level User Authentication Authentication Protocol Mos E Authentication 1 Password Data Privacy Privacy Protocol DEs56 z Privacy Password Doo Back aaa Figure 5 7 Configuri
580. ver Commands 21 When you start HTTPS the connection is established in this way The client authenticates the server using the server s digital certificate The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the connection The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5 x and Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later versions The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS Table 21 8 HTTPS System Support Web Browser Operating System Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Netscape Navigator 6 2 or later Windows 98 Windows NT with service pack 6a Windows 2000 Windows XP Solaris 2 6 To specify a secure site certificate see Replacing the Default Secure site Certificate on page 6 6 Also refer to the copy command on page 19 13 Example Console config ip http secure server Console config Related Commands ip http secure port 21 13 copy tftp https certificate 19 13 ip http secure port This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the switch s web interface Use the no form to restore the default port Syntax ip http secure port port_number no ip http secure port port_number
581. vlan page 30 11 30 20 Configuring IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling BO switchport mode dot1q tunnel This command configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport mode dot1q tunnel no switchport mode dot1q tunnel Sets the port as an 802 1Q tunnel port Default Setting All ports are in hybrid mode Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet Port Channel Command Usage Use the switchport mode command to set the switch to QinQ mode before entering this command Example Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode dotiq tunnel Console config if Related Commands show dot1q tunnel page 30 21 show interfaces switchport 24 11 show dot1q tunnel This command displays information about QinQ tunnel ports Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console config system mode ging Console config interface ethernet 1 1 Console config if switchport mode dotigq tunnel Console config if end Console show dotiq tunnel Dotliq Tunnel Port List Total 1 Dotlq Tunnel Ports 0 Dotliq Tunnel Port Channel Console 30 21 30 VLAN Commands Related Commands switchport mode dot1q tunnel page 30 21 switchport dot1q ethertype This command sets the Tag Protocol Identifier TPID value of a tunnel port Use the no form Use the no form to restore the default setting Syntax switchport do
582. xample Console show policy map Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map rd_policy class rd_class Policy Map rd_policy class rd_class set ip dscp 3 Console show policy map interface This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface Syntax show policy map interface interface input interface e ethernet unit port unit Stack unit Range 1 port Port number Range 1 28 port channel channel id Range 1 32 Command Mode Privileged Exec Example Console show policy map interface ethernet 1 5 Service policy rd_policy input Console 32 9 3 2 Quality of Service Commands 32 10 Chapter 33 Multicast Filtering Commands This switch uses IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol to query for any attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service It identifies the ports containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Table 33 1 Multicast Filtering Commands residing in other standard or private VLAN groups preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic Command Groups Function Page IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment 33 1 sets the IGMP version disp
583. y Console config ip mask acl 8 11 8 Access Control Lists Configuring a MAC ACL Mask This mask defines the fields to check in the packet header Command Usage You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port Command Attributes e Source Destination Address Type Use Any to match any address Host to specify the host address for a single node or MAC to specify a range of addresses Options Any Host MAC Default Any e Source Destination Bit Mask Address of rule must match this bitmask VID Bitmask VLAN ID of rule must match this bitmask e Ethernet Type Bit Mask Ethernet type of rule must match this bitmask e Packet Format Mask A packet format must be specified in the rule Web Configure the mask to match the required rules in the MAC ingress or egress ACLs Set the mask to check for any source or destination address a host address or an address range Use a bitmask to search for specific VLAN ID s or Ethernet type s Or check for rules where a packet format was specified Then click Add ACL Mask MAC Configuration Mask MAC Ingress Table Source Bitmask Destination Bitmask VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask Packet Format Mask Remove 00 11 11 11 11 11 Any 3 200 Enabled Remove Remove All Entries Source Address Type Any Source Bitmask Destination Address Type Any Destination Bitmask VID Bitmask Ethernet Type Bitmask
584. y map called rd policy sets the average bandwidth the 1 Mbps the burst rate to 1522 bps and the response to reduce the DSCP value for violating packets to 0 Console config policy map rd_policy 3 32 4 Console config pmap class rd_class 3 32 5 Console config pmap c set ip dscp 4 32 6 Console config pmap c police 100000 1522 exceed action set ip dscp 0 32 6 Console config pmap c Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues This function binds a policy map to the ingress queue of a particular interface Command Usage e You must first define a class map set an ACL mask to match the criteria defined in the class map then define a policy map and finally bind the service policy to the required interface e You can only bind one policy map to an interface The current firmware does not allow you to bind a policy map to an egress queue Command Attributes Ports Specifies a port e Ingress Applies the rule to ingress traffic Enabled Check this to enable a policy map on the specified port e Policy Map Select the appropriate policy map from the scroll down box Web Click QoS DiffServ Service Policy Settings Check Enabled and choose a Policy Map for a port from the scroll down box then click Apply Service Policy Settings Ports Ingress h I Enabled 4 l2 I Enabled rd_policy 3 I Enabled A I Enabled z 5 F Enabled rd_policy 3 z 6 I Enabled zj Fi
585. y vid 3 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M4 permit any any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 Console config access list mac mask precedence in Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask acl exit Console config interface ethernet 1 12 Console config if mac access group M4 in Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M4 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 permit any any MAC ingress mask ACL mask pktformat host any vid Console 23 16 MAC ACLs 23 This example creates an Egress MAC ACL Console config access list mac M5 Console config mac acl deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any Console config mac acl deny tagged eth2 00 11 11 11 11 11 ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config mac acl end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 Console config access list mac mask precedence out Console config mac mask acl mask pktformat ff ff ff ff ff ff any vid Console config mac mask ac1 exit Console config interface ethernet 1 5 Console config if mac access group M5 out Console config if end Console show access list MAC access list M5 deny tagged eth2 host 00 11 11 11 11 11 any vid 3 ethertype 0806 deny tagged 802 3 host 00 11 1
586. ypts only the password in the access request packet from the client to the server while TACACS encrypts the entire body of the packet Command Usage By default management access is always checked against the authentication database stored on the local switch If a remote authentication server is used you must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for the remote authentication protocol Local and remote logon authentication control management access via the console port web browser or Telnet RADIUS and TACACS logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for each user name password pair The user name password and privilege level must be configured on the authentication server The encryption methods used for the authentication process must also be configured or negotiated between the authentication server and logon client This switch can pass authentication messages between the server and client that have been encrypted using MD5 Message Digest 5 TLS Transport Layer Security or TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the authentication sequence For example if you select 1 RADIUS 2 TACACS and 3 Local the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first If the RADIUS server is not available then authentication is attempted using the TACACS server and finally the local user name and password

Edge Products ES3528 Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents